Nepalese Familiarization Course [PDF]

Citation preview

Nepalese Familiarization Course



INTRODUCTION:



1



GEOGRAPHY: Nepal is a land locked South Asian country situated in the lap of the Himalayas. It is located between latitude 26" 22' to 30" 27' North and longitude 80" 4' E to 88" 12' East and elevation ranges from 90 to 8,848 meters. The country is sandwiched between the two most populous countries in the world, India in the east, south and west and China’s Xiang Autonomous Region (Tibet) in the north. Nepal is roughly rectangular in shape, about 650 kilometers (400 miles) wide and 200 kilometers (125 miles) broad, with an area of 147,181 square kilometers (56,827 sq miles). It is separated from Bangladesh by an approximately fifteen kilometer wide strip of the Indian state of West Bengal. Nepal is dependent on India for transit facilities and access to the sea through the Bay of Bengal, even for goods coming from China. Nepal boasts eight of the world’s fourteen highest mountains, including Mount Everest on the border with China. Mt. Everest is the tallest mountain in the world, and is situated between Nepal and the Tibet region of China. The South-east ridge on the Nepalese side of the mountain is technically easier to climb, which is why so many keen climbers go through Nepal to climb Mt. Everest. CLIMATE:



Nepal has a great deal of variation in climate and it is divided into five climatic zones, broadly corresponding to altitude. The tropical and subtropical zones lie below 1,200 meters (3,940 ft), the temperate zone 1,200 to 2,400 meters (3,900 – 7,875 ft), the cold zone 2,400 to 3,600 meters (7,875 – 11,800 ft), the sub arctic zone 3,600 to 4,400 meters (11,800 – 14,400 ft), and arctic zone above 4,400 meters (14,400 ft). Nepal experiences five seasons: summer, monsoon, autumn, winter and spring. The Himalayas block cold winds from central Asia in winter, and forms the northern limit of the monsoon wind patterns. The temperature and rainfall differ from place to place. Altitude affects annual rainfall or precipitation patterns. Up to about 3,000 meters, annual rainfall totals increase as the altitude increases; thereafter, annual totals diminish with increasing altitude and latitude. In addition to this latitudinal differentiation in rainfall, two other patterns can be discerned. First, given the northwestward movement of the moisture-laden summer monsoon (June to September), the amount of annual rainfall generally decreases from east to west. However, there are certain pockets with heavy annual rainfall totals, for example, the Pokhara Valley in central Nepal. Second, the horizontal extension of hill and mountain ranges creates a moist condition on south and east facing slopes, whereas it produces a major rain shadow on the northern sides of the slopes. Eastern Nepal receives approximately 2,500 millimeters of rain annually, the Kathmandu area about 1,420 millimeters, and western Nepal about 1,000 millimeters.



2



The towering Himalayas play a critical role, blocking the northwesterly advances of moist, tropical air from the Bay of Bengal, and ultimately leading to its conversion to rain in the summer. In the winter, this range prevents the outbursts of cold air from Inner Asia from reaching southern Nepal and northern India, thus ensuring warmer winters in these regions than otherwise would be the case. TERRAIN: Nepal is commonly divided into three physiographic areas: Mountain, Hill, and Terai regions. These ecological belts run east-west and are bisected by Nepal’s major river systems. The Terai plains bordering India are part of the northern rim of the Indo-Gangetic plains. They were formed and are fed by three major rivers: the Kosi, the Narayani (India’s Gandak river), and the Karanali. This region has a hot, humid climate. The Hill region abuts the mountains and varies from 1,000 to 4,000 meters in altitude. Two low mountain ranges, the Mahabharat Lekh and Shiwalik Range (also called the Churia range) dominate the region. The hilly belt includes the Kathmandu valley, the country’s most fertile and urbanized area. Despite its geographical isolation and limited economic potential, the region always has been the political and cultural center of Nepal. The Mountain region contains the highest region in the world. The world’s highest mountain, Mount Everest (Sagarmatha in Nepali) at 8,850 meters (29,035 ft) is located on the border with China. Kanchenjunga, the world’s third highest peak, is also located in Nepal. Deforestation is a major problem in all regions, with resulting erosion and degradation of the ecosystem. These ecological regions were divided by the government into development sectors within the frame work of regional development planning. The rhythm of life in Nepal, as in most other parts of monsoonal Asia, is intricately yet intrinsically intertwined with its physical environment. POPULATION:



Nepal has a total population 27,676,547 as of July 2005, with a growth rate of 2.2%. Thirty nine percent of the population is up to 14 years old, 57.3% are aged between 15 and 64, and 3.7% above 65 years. The median age is 20.07 (19.91 for males and 20.24 for females). There are 1,060 males for every 1,000 females. Life expectancy is 59.8 years (60.9 for males and 59.5 for females). Nepal is one of the few countries in the world where males outlive females. According to the Nepal’s Central Bureau of Statistics in 2002, 14.2% of the population lived in urban areas while the remaining 85.8% lived in rural areas. Nepal ranks among the world’s poorest countries with per capita income of around $300 as of October 2006. Based on national calorie/GNP criteria, an estimated 31% of the population is below the poverty line. Total literacy rate is 53.74% (68.51% for males and 42.49% for females).



3



GOVERNMENT:



Since April 2006, Girija Prasad Koirala has been the prime minister, exercising all the executive and legislative powers under the interim constitution signed after the peace negotiation agreement between the SPA (Seven Party Alliance) government and the CPN (Communist party of Nepal) – Maoist. He is the president of the Nepali Congress, the largest political party in Nepal. King Gyanendra is the monarch of Nepal without any executive power or role in the government. Until 1990, Nepal was an absolute monarchy with the King as the head of state of the Hindu kingdom. After the people's movement in April 1990, the existing Panchayat system of government was abolished. Under the new constitution, the legislature was bicameral; democratically elected parliament consisted of the House of Representatives (lower house) and National assembly (upper house). The National Assembly consisted of 60 members, of whom 35 are elected by the House of Representatives, 10 nominated by the King (as head of the state) and remaining 15 elected by an electoral college made up of chairs of village and towns. Legislature in the National Assembly has a six year term and could not be dissolved by the King. The House of Representative consisted of 205 elected members from national single member constituencies. The term of House of Representatives is five years. There has not been a parliamentary election after 1999. Present King Gyanendra ascended to the throne in June 2001, after the Crown Prince Dipendra gunned down his parents King Birendra and Queen Aishwarya and seven other royals before killing himself. A Maoist insurgency, punctuated by a cease–fire in 2001 and in 2003, has been ongoing since the outbreak of insurgency in 1996. A nationwide state of emergency was in effect from November 2001 to August 2002, after the Maoist insurgents broke a four month cease-fire with violent simultaneous attacks on security establishments and on government buildings. During that time, King Gyanendra, under the constitution’s emergency provisions and on the advice of the cabinet, suspended several constitutional rights, including freedom of expression, assembly, privacy, and property. In October 2002, the King dismissed then Prime Minister Sher Bahadur Deuba's government for failing to hold promised general elections because of ongoing insurgency. A cabinet was royally appointed to govern the country until elections could be held at an unspecified future time. On June, 2003 King Gyanendra appointed Surya Bahadur Thapa as prime Minister after Lokendra Bahadur Chand resigned on May 30, 2003. The government and the Maoist declared another cease-fire on January 29, 2003 and held three rounds of talks from April to august 2003. The Maoist again unilaterally broke the cease-fire on august 27, 2003 and intensified their attack on government, security forces, and civilian targets. Prime Minister Thapa resigned in May 2004; on June 2, 2004 King Gyanendra reinstituted formerly dismissed Sher Bahadur Deuba as Prime Minister. In February 2005, Deuba was dismissed and the King assumed direct power and declared a state of emergency for 3 months in view of the serious crises posed to the nation's sovereignty, integrity and security, due to the escalation of violence by the CPN-Maoist rebels.



4



But in April 2006, another major people's movement pressured the King to relinquish power and King Gyanendra reinstated the parliament dismissed in May 2002. Former Prime Minister G.P. Koirala was unanimously selected as the leader of the agitating seven party alliances to lead the government. The Communist Party of Nepal -Maoist which has been waging people's war since February 1996 declared a unilateral cease-fire on April 26, 2006 and reciprocating the insurgents call, the government also announced cease-fire with peace proposal with rebels. Under the constitution of Nepal, judiciary is legally separate from the executive and legislative branches and has increasingly shown the will to be independent of political influence. The Judiciary has the right of judicial review under the constitution. Earlier the King enjoyed the supreme power and appointed the chief justice and all the other judges to supreme, appellate, and district court upon the recommendations of judicial council. Under the interim constitution the Prime Minister has the power to appoint all judges including chief justice on the recommendation of judicial council. All lower court decisions, including acquittals are subject to appeal. Nepal is going through a critical period in its history. The SPA (Seven Party Alliance) and CPN -Maoist (Communist party of Nepal) signed the interim constitution on December 15, 2006 which has 168 articles and will be promulgated once the arms management of the CPN-Maoist is completed. The interim constitution is another big leap in the political history of Nepal. With this, the country is about to enter into a new political direction. The interim constitution has effectively shifted all the privileges and power of the King to the Prime Minister and declared Nepal a secular state. The King is virtually powerless now and the fate of monarchy will be decided by the first meeting of Constitution Assembly. As per the draft, it will be a mixed electoral system for 425-seat Constitution Assembly for which 205 members will be elected by direct voting and 204 will be elected through proportional system ensuring quota for women, indigenous nationalities and religious groups, while 16 members will be nominated by the Prime Minister with the consent of the cabinet. The election for Constitution Assembly is proposed for June 2007.



HISTORY: EARLY HISTORY Modern Nepal was created in the latter half of the 18th century when Prithvi Narayan Shah, the ruler of the small principality of Gorakha, formed a unified country from a number independent hill states. The country was frequently called the Gorakha kingdom; the term “Gurkha” was used for Nepali soldiers that served in the British Army and the Indian Army. After 1800, the heirs of Prithvi Narayan Shah proved unable to maintain firm political control over Nepal. A period of internal turmoil followed, heightened by Nepal’s defeat in a war with the British from 1814 to 1816. Stability was restored after 1846 when the Rana family gained power, entrenched itself through hereditary prime ministers, and reduced the monarch to a figurehead. The Rana regime, a tightly centralized autocracy, pursued a policy of isolating Nepal from external influences. This policy helped Nepal maintain its national independence during the colonial era, but it also impeded the country’s economic development. In 1950, King Tribhuvan, a direct descendent of Prithvi Narayan Shah, fled his “palace prison” to newly independent India, triggering off an armed revolt against the Rana administration. This allowed the return of the Shah family to power. A period of quasi-constitutional rule followed, during which the monarch, assisted by the leaders of fledgling political parties, governed the country. During the 1950’s, efforts were made to frame a constitution for Nepal that would establish a representative form of government, based on a British model.



5



MODERN HISTORY:



In early 1959, King Mahendra the eldest son of late King Tribhuvan issued a new constitution and the first democratic elections for a national assembly were held. The Nepali Congress party, a moderate socialist group, gained a substantial victory in the election. Its leader, B.P. Koirala, the eldest brother of current Prime Minister G P Koirala, formed a government and served as the first elected Prime Minister of kingdom of Nepal. King Mahendra, declaring parliamentary democracy a failure, dismissed the B P Koirala government and promulgated a new constitution on December 16, 1962. The new constitution established a “partyless” panchayat system of governance which King Mahendra considered to be a democratic form of governance best suited to Nepalese tradition. King Birendra ascended to throne at an early age of 27 after the demise of King Mahendra in 1972. The legacy of the partyless panchayat system continued, but after growing student unrest and protest in 1979 against the panchayat regime, King Birendra called for a referendum to decide whether to continue with the existing partyless panchayat system with reforms or to go for a multiparty system of democracy. People voted for the existing system with a narrow margin and the system continued with some reforms, including selection of Prime Minister by the Rastriya panchayat which again had to be approved by the King himself. In 1990, the people’s revolution (“jana andolan”) pressured the King and the government to change. This time the leftist parties united under a common banner of the united left front and joined forces with Nepali Congress party to launch nationwide strikes and demonstrations in all the major cities. This movement for restoration of democracy was resisted by the government in the beginning with security forces dealing with the protesters, and arresting the leaders. But after 45 days of continuous strike and violent protest, almost 50 people lost their life and several hundred were injured. The King succumbed to the protest, declared a multiparty system of governance and lifted the ban on political parties. Krishna Prasad Bhattarai of the Nepali Congress was appointed as the interim Prime Minister and a cabinet was formed with all the political parties including royal nominees. A new constitution was drafted and elections were held with the Nepali Congress winning the majority of seats. Girija Prasad Koirala, the leader of the Nepali Congress became the Prime minister but due to an ongoing intra-party dispute the Parliament was dissolved in 1994 and fresh elections were ordered. In the mid-term election of 1994, none of the party could get the majority except the leftist UML (United Marxist Leninist), which became the largest party and formed a minority government that lasted for 9 months. Nepal witnessed a series of ups and down with frequent changes in political combination having 11 governments over a period of just 10 years. The CPN (Communist Party of Nepal) Maoist launched an armed rebellion against the King and government in February 1996 which has cost over 13,000 innocent lives during the decade old insurgency. In 2001, crown prince Dipendra massacred ten members of the royal family, including King Birendra and Queen Aiswarya, before killing himself. King Gyanendra ascended to the throne in June 2001 after the palace massacre.



6



FOREIGN RELATIONS: Nepal, a land-locked country strategically situated between two Asian giants China and India, has developed a very harmonious and friendly relation with both the neighbors. Nepal and China’s diplomatic relation dates back to 1956 and since then both have maintained the bilateral relations based on the principle of equality and tradition. Nepal has almost 1,560 kilometers of open border with India from all three sides, east, west and south. Both countries renewed their trade and transit treaties in 1990, which dated back since 1950. There was a brief break in trade and transit treaty due to India’s security concerned over Nepal’s relations with China. A bilateral treaty signed in 1991 is renewed every five years. The trade and transit treaty with India allows Nepal to trade with other countries through the Calcutta ports and renewed with mutual consultation from both side. India has helped Nepal in extending transit support by developing a dry port in Nepal by extending the railway line from Calcutta port to Birgunj a bordering town to facilitate easy and timely deliver of cargos. Nepal has played an important role in the formation of the economic development oriented Asian Association for regional Co-operation (SAARC) and its secretariat is based in Nepal. Nepal is also a signatory of agreement on South Asian Free Trade Area (SAFTA), which came into force on January 1, 2006. On international issues, Nepal follows a non-aligned policy and votes with the No-Aligned Movement in United Nations. Nepal participates in a number of UN specialized agencies and is a member of World Trade Organization, World Bank, International Monetary Fund, Colombo Plan and Asian Development Bank. US –NEPAL RELATIONS: Nepal-United States relations date back to 1947, though the US opened its Embassy in Kathmandu in 1959. Since then, relations between the United States and Nepal have been very friendly and based on the equality principle. The United States opened its USAID Mission in Nepal long ago and has been continuously helping Nepal through this mission on various developmental sectors; education and health being the prime ones. The US has been helping Nepal through the Peace Corps but temporarily suspended its operations in 2004 due to increasing security concerns threatened by escalating Maoist insurgency problems, and terminated its Nepal program in 2006. The number of Nepalese students coming to the US to pursue their higher education is increasing every year and numbers of US academics visit Nepal every year to pursue research in the area of their interest. Nepal supports the United States in their global war on terrorism and is an ally in their efforts to deal strongly with the terrorist organizations and their radical members. The United States has helped Nepal in dealing with the Maoist insurgency which has crippled Nepal for the past decade. The United States has played an important role in the recent SPA (Seven Party Alliance) government and the CPN (Communist Party of Nepal) Maoist in signing a broader peace negotiation, which has paved the way for ending the decade old insurgency in Nepal. ECONOMY: Nepal ranks among the world’s poorest countries with per capita income of around $ 300 as of October 2006. Based on national calorie/GNP criteria, an estimated 31% of the population is below the poverty line. Nepal entered the modern era in 1951 without schools, hospitals, roads, telecommunications, electric power, industry, or a civil service. However, the country made progress toward sustainable economic growth since 1950s and is committed to a program of economic liberalization. Agriculture remains Nepal’s principal economic activity, employing over 76% of the population and providing 39% of GDP. Only about 25% of the total area is cultivable; another 33% is forest; most of rest is mountainous. Rice and wheat are the main crops. Real GDP growth during 1996-2002 averaged less than 5%. Real growth experienced a one time jump in 1999, rising to 6%, before slipping back to below 5%. In 2002, the GDP recorded a negative growth rate of 0.33%, largely because of the decade old Maoist insurgency which has crippled the economy of the country. GDP grew 3.1% in 2003 and 3.26% in 2004, and again slipped to 2.4% in 2005, according to Nepal Rastra Bank (Nepal’s Central Bank), published in US government country profile report October 2006. This is early an indicator of unstable economy.



7



Despite its growing trade deficit, Nepal has a balance of payments (BOP) surplus due to money sent home from Nepalese working abroad. In FY 2004/05, however Nepal recorded a much lower balance of payments surplus of $80 million, compared to $217.7 million in 2003/04. The lower BOP surplus in FY 2004/05 is mainly attributed to the lower inflow of net government loans. The decline is primarily in the capital accounts, due primarily to a slow down in development activities funded by foreign grants and loans. According to a report published by UN office for the co-ordination of Humanitarian Affairs (February 2006) Nepal has maintained macroeconomic stability, aided largely by remittances from Nepalese working abroad, budget support from the World Bank and borrowing from the IMF's Poverty Reduction Growth Facility. Inflation has remained at under five percent in 2003/04. The conflict in Nepal has affected development projects, including those aiming to reduce the widespread poverty - the thrust of the government's five-year plan (2002-2007). Nepal is one of the most attractive and cheapest tourist destinations in South Asia and earns large portions of its foreign exchange from tourism. Recent tourist arrivals, during the Maoist cease-fire, show a recovery from the massive decline experienced during the previous years. The fragile security situation, particularly after the Maoist ended their unilateral cease-fire on January 2, 2006, is expected to alter the trend of growth in economy. RELIGION:



Religion in Nepal is comprised of an 80.6% majority of Hindus, 10.7% of Buddhists, Muslims 4.2%, Kirat 3.6%, and other religions 0.9%. Differences between Hindus and Buddhists have been, in general, very subtle and academic in nature due to the intermingling of Hindu and Buddhist beliefs. Both share common temples and worship common deities and many of Nepal’s Hindus could also be regarded as Buddhists and vice versa. Buddhists are mostly concentrated in the eastern regions and the central Terai. Buddhism was relatively more common among the newar and Tibetan-Nepalese groups. Among the Tibetan-Nepalese, those most influenced by Hinduism were Magar, Sunuwar, Limbu and Rai people. Hindu influence is less prominent among the Gurung, Bhutia, and Thakali groups, who employ Buddhist monks for their religious ceremonies. ETHNIC GROUPS:



Nepal, with a population of a little over 27 million people, is made up of over 40 different races and tribes. The country offers such diversity that a visitor may experience any life style from the stone age, in the far west and high hills, to the jet age of Kathmandu. The two major groups in Nepalese society are Tibeto-Burmans, or Mongoloids



8



from the north, and Indo-Aryans from the south. Many customs are inherited from both sides and have been developed by influence of the land, climate and available resources. The largest ethnic group is the Chhetri with 15.5%. Other groups are the Brahman – Hill 12.5%, Magar 7%, Tharu 6.6%, Tamang 5.5%, Newar 5.4%, Kami 3.9%, Yadav 3.9%, others 32.7%, unspecified 2.8%. Nepali is the National language with 47.8% of the population speaking it as their first language. Other languages include Maithali 12.1%, Bhojpuri 7.4%, Tharu (Dagaura/Rana) 5.8%, Tamang 5.1%, Nepal Bhasa 3.6%, Magar 3.3%, Awadhi 2.4%, others 10%, unspecified 2.5%. Certain ethnic groups in Nepal are categorized according to their occupation. They are Kamis (smiths), Damais (tailors), Dhobis (washerman), Sarkis (cobblers), Gaines (professional singers), and Khumbaras (porters). CULTURE:



The rich cultural heritage of Nepal has evolved over centuries. This multidimensional cultural heritage encompasses within itself cultural diversities of various ethnic, tribal and social groups, located at different altitudes, and also manifested in various other forms, including music, dance, art and crafts; folklore and folktales; languages and literature; philosophy and religion; festivals and celebrations; food and drinks. Nepali culture is influenced by the culture of India bordering on the south and Tibet, the northern neighbor and autonomous region of China. There are similarities in clothing, languages and food habits. A typical Nepali meal is “dal-bhat,” which is boiled rice served with lentils, vegetables and some spicy relish. This meal is consumed twice daily, once in the morning and another after the sun has set. Between these main meals, a snack such as “chiura” (beaten rice) and tea is popular. A wedding in the kingdom of Nepal is a major celebration which may continue over several days. The festivities incorporate a big party, lively music, a feast, and much dancing with fun for all concerned. A Nepalese bride will dress in the bridal color of red, beautifully dressed and with fancy jewelry. Traditionally, the bride and groom are carried to the wedding ceremony. A priest or monk will bless the couple, gifts are exchanged and then the party really begins. The country is a whirlwind of colorful and exotic cultural expression, particularly in art, dance and music. All of this contributes to giving a Nepalese wedding a totally unique cultural identity. FAMILY:



9



Rural people are traditionally religious minded and prefer to live in joint families in rural areas, whereas the people in urban areas are a mixed of joint and single family. The role of family is very significant and all the family affairs are managed and dominated by the head of the family, who is the elder male in the family. Nepalese families are traditionally patriarchal in nature and the ancestral and family property goes to the male siblings. Recent laws have given women the right to paternal property, but only if the female member is not married until 35 years of age. If she gets married after becoming eligible, she has to return the inherited property. Most of the marriages are arranged and decided by the parents, and although youngsters have begun choosing their partners, they still have to receive parental approval. After the marriage the wife takes on the surname or family name of her husband. The typical family on an average will consist of 5 to 7 members and usually 2 generations live together. But it will differ in rural and urban areas. In rural areas, even today one might find 3 generations sharing and living together while in urban areas it might be 2 generations living together or the youngsters prefer to live independently as a single family. Being patriarchal, Nepalese families prefer to have at least one male child primarily due to reasons such as religious beliefs. It is believed that after the death of the parent (father/mother) the eldest son of the family has to perform the last rituals. The family bond is very strong due to the joint family orientation. Even if the family lives separately, they have moral bindings and obligations towards their parents to look after them during their old age. The society gives these traditional values the highest priority.



FOODS:



The Nepalese food differs from one culture to another, however typical food can be described as “dal” (lentil soup), “bhat” (steamed rice), and “tarkari” (curried vegetables). It is the staple diet of most of the Nepalese people. Most popular lentils eaten in Nepal are black, red and yellow. The majority of Nepalese take two meals in the morning and evening. There is generally no tradition for breakfast in Nepalese culture, but people generally have tea both in the morning and afternoon. Nepali food is practical rather than gourmet fare, which is not to say it is not tasty. “Saag,” spinach, mustard green or broad leaved mustard, is a standard accompaniment to plain steamed rice for lunch or dinner. “Tarkari” is any vegetables or group of vegetables in curry usually in a broth that can be made in many different combinations. “Masu” is meat with spices (curry) and usually served with rice. Most Nepalese eat mutton, chicken and some eat buffalo and pork as well. People traditionally do not eat beef because cows are sacred and killing cows is prohibited by law. However, in hotels beef is available for the guest and tourists. Relishes: “Achar” - a sour, spicy or sweet pickle, can be made in different ways and combinations. The most popular are made up of ground tomatoes, sliced radish, boiled or diced potatoes or chili (red or green). Desert: “Dahi” (Yogurt / curd) - usually made up of buffalo milk. “Juju dhau”: popular creamy curd from Bhaktapur, an old tourist city adjacent to Kathmandu, the Nepalese capital. “Juju” literally means ‘King’. Other foods: “Aloo tama bodi” - special Nepalese traditional curry made with potato, bamboo shoots and local beans. Momo - dumplings filled with minced meat (usually buffalo, chicken and mutton) served steamed or fried is very popular as afternoon snacks or even meals. “Sekuwa” - grilled meat usually made from mutton, chicken, duck, buff, and wild boar. “Sukuti” - spicy dried meat roasted over a charcoal fire, especially served in small and big restaurant, and is eaten with drinks.



10



Nepal being one of the world’s popular tourist destinations, a variety of foods is available everywhere from the small side streets to the five star luxury hotels. All sorts of continental dishes combined with Indian, Pakistani specialties, hot Chinese cuisine, Thai curries, Japanese sushi, Korean, and Vietnamese are available in Nepal. Therefore, there are plenty of choices for food and eating in Nepal that could be fun and enjoyable. ARTS:



Nepalese art and crafts reflects the religious themes of Hinduism, Buddhism, and specific deities. The cultural history of Nepalese art is traditionally divided into five major periods: Pre-Licchavi, Licchavi, transitional, early Malla, and late malla periods.



11



LANGUAGE: Nepali, an Indo-Arian language, belongs to the Indo-European language family and it has a long tradition of writing. It is said to have developed from Sanskrit, one of the major classical languages of South Asia. It is written in the Devanagari script, like many other languages of South Asia. Nepali is spoken by about 50.3 % of the total Nepali population as the mother tongue (1991 Census of Nepal), and is the national language of Nepal. It is lingua franca for more than sixty languages or dialects spoken in the region that comprises present-day Nepal. Nepali is the official language of Nepal. Written Nepali, in particular, departs from spoken Nepali in some respects. To function well in Nepal one needs to be familiar with both, the everyday spoken Nepali, as well as official, literate Nepali. As a medium of administration, education, radio, television, press and mass communication, the role of Nepali is unchallenged in Nepal. Nepali is also a second language to as many as 30% of Nepali. Nepali is spoken by a large number of people outside of Nepal. Nepali is written in the phonetically based Devanagari script using the Sanskrit sound system. This means that Nepali is a “what you see is what you read” language. Nepali words do not have any hidden or implied sounds; for the most part, if a sound is written it is pronounced, if it is not written it is not pronounced. This makes reading Nepali relatively straightforward once the alphabets and writing or phonetic conventions are understood. Nepali is a Subject-Object-Verb language. ु Example: म नेपाली बो छ। ma nepali bolchhu. Literally: I Nepali speak. I speak Nepali. There are singular and plural forms. There are tenses as well, like English. In Nepali we do not have prepositions, we have post position. In English we say on the table, in Nepali we say table on. “Tebulmaa” Due to the socio-cultural reasons there are free, borrowed words from Nepali to other languages, and vice-versa. There are many loan words from English, as well as scientific, technical and foreign cultural terms that have been worked into Nepali exactly as they are used in other countries. There are many more borrowed words from Sanskrit.



Nepali Vowels Pure Vowels: Table 1



अ (also) a (asal = good) उ(book) u(ukaalo=uphill)



आ (army) aa (aamaa = mother)



इ (in) i (inaar = well)



ई (ink) i (ishwar = God)



ऊ(put) u(un+wool)



ए ( aid) e(ek=one)



ऐ (a+I = ai) ai(ainaa=mirror)



Dipthongs: Table 2 ओ(only) O(okhar+walnut)



औ(a+u+au) au (aushadhi=medicine)



12



Nepali vowels are made up of eight pure vowels sounds, अ, आ, इ, ई, उ, ऊ, ए, ऐ, and two dipthongs “o”



ओ, and “au”औ.



In Nepali there are two “I,” short “I” इ, and long “I” ई, also two u, short “u” उ, and long “u” ऊ only distinguished in writing. In speaking, both are pronounced with the same caveat as above applies. Consonants Sound: Table 3 A Non-aspirated



B Aspirated



C Non-aspirated



ग ga



घ gha



(cup)



(khmer)



(girl)



(ghar= house)



च cha



छ chha



ज ja



झ (jha



(chop)



(chha= six)



(jump)



(jha)



क ka



1



2 3 4



6



8



2. 3. 4.



ञ yna (young)



ड Da



ढ Dha



ण Na



(Tea)



त ta



(Th)



थ tha



(Dog)



द da



(Dh)



ध dha



(N)



(tapaai=you)



(Th)



फ pha



(the)



ब ba



(dharma)



भ bha



(nurse)



(pundit)



(father)



(ball)



(bh)



(mall)



न na म ma



य ya



र ra



ल la



व wa



(young)



(run)



(lunch)



(shop)



(shop)



(sun)



(worse) ह(ha) (hunt)



kchha (kchhetri)



1.



(swing)



ठ Tha



श(sha)



7



E Nasal ङ nga



ट Ta



प pa



5



ख kha



D Aspirated



ष(sha)



स(sa)



ऽ tra (trust)



gya g+y



Velar consonants क, ख, ग, घ, ङ (ka, kha, ga, gha, nga)



Palatal consonants च, छ, ज, झ, ञ ( cha, chha, ja, jha, yna)



Retroflex consonants ट, ठ,ड, ढ, ण (Ta, Tha, Da, Dha, Na)



Dental consonants त, थ, द, ध,न (ta, tha, da, dha, na)



In this consonant chart, aspirated consonants are indicated by the addition of “h” after the consonant sound. pha- फ is pronounced as F in English. And bha – भ is pronounced as V in English.



13



6. ( य ya, र ra, ल la and व wa) are considered “semi-vowels” 7. ( श sha, ष sha and स sa) are three “s” in Nepali



8.( kchha, ऽ tra and gya ) are two letters combinations, contains special conjunct consonants characters mostly used in spelling words derived from Saskrit. ka+sha= kchha ta+ra=tra



( is a combination of ka sha)



ऽ ( is a combination of ta and ra)



ga+ya=gya



( is a combination of gya and na)



Combining Vowels and Consonants to make words: All consonants in the Nepali alphabet are distinct syllables which have an “a” Sound built in at the end. For example: क ka , ख kha, ग ga already have “a” sound built in .



For any other vowels, other than “a” अ a vowel sign is applied to the consonant to make a composite syllable. For



example, the vowel sign ई is combined with consonants “ka” to make a separate consonant “ki” क . . Vowel signs in Table 4 Vowels Vowel with vowel sign Syllable sound



अ a क ka cut



आ aa का kaa car



इ i क ki kick



ई i क ki kill



उ u कु ku cook



ऊ u कू ku cook



ए e के ke kate



ऐ ai कै kai kaiser



ओ o को ko cola



औ au कौ kau cauliflower



Conjuncts in Nepali: A conjunct is formed when two consonants are joined, with the first consonant losing the embedded अ sound in the process. It is very important in Nepali language to understand how they are formed. One way to from conjuncts is to add a backward slash (called halant in Nepali). For example क (ka) is converted into क् .



ख ्, ग ्, घ ्, च ्



, ज ्, झ ्,



,



,



, प ्, फ् ,



Another way to form conjuncts is to write half consonants and join with another consonant like this chart: English Word



Syllable Breakdown (conjuncts in bold)



conjuncts



का + ठ + मा + न ् + डू



Nepali Spelling ( with combined consonants0 काठमा डू



Kathmandu Alaska



अ +ला +स ् +का



अलाःका



ःका(skaa)



Canada



क् + या +ना +डा



यानाडा



या(kyaa)



Mumbai



मु +म ् +ब +ई



मु बई



ब( mba)



Maryland



मे+ र+ ल ् +या +न ् +ड



मे र या ड



या (lyaa),



14



डू (nDu)



ड(nD)



These consonants are marked by the halant at the base. (Ta) Butter ब टर ( Tha) ( Da) Fodder फ डर (Dha) Conjuncts involving “ra” र are created four different ways. Some examples are as follows: Position of “ra” र in conjunct sound “ra” र is the initial sound in the conjunct “ra” र is the second sound in the conjucts “ra” र with “ya” य Used only on oval/ rounded consonants ट, ठ, ड, ढ



“ra” र with “ta” त consonant



Form taken by “ra”



English words



Nepali words



Flying “ra” र (because it flies over the consonant)



Ward= वाड



गनु = to do



Kicking “ra” र (because it is placed at the foot of the consonant)



Brand= ॄा ड



Curd= कड



Great= मेट



वष = year



(prem) ूेम = love



(raamro) राॆो = good



Rally= याली



(maryo) म यो = died



Drum= सम



(Trak) शक = Truck



Dream= सम



( mudraa) मुिा = currency



Tram= ऽाम



(satra)सऽ = seventeen



15



Lesson 1 People and Geography मान्छे र भूगोल maanchhe ra bhugol



This lesson will introduce you to: - Simple greetings and basic introductions in Nepali. - How to greet people in formal and informal situations in Nepal. - Personal pronouns. - Possessive pronouns. - How to use the verbs “to be” and “to live” in the present tense. - Basic geography of Nepal.



PEOPLE 1. Listen to these simple greetings and phrases in Nepali and repeat them after the speaker. Hello/Hi



Namaste



नमःते!



Good morning.



Namaste



नमःते!



Good afternoon.



Namaste



नमःते!



Good Evening.



Namaste



नमःते!



How are you?



sanchai/ tapaailaai kasto chha?



सन्चै / तपाईंलाई कःतो छ?



Note: “Namaste” is the universal Nepali greeting. It is appropriate for greeting people anytime and is used for both “hello” and “goodbye.” 2. Familiarize yourself with personal pronouns. Listen to the audio and repeat after the speaker. म



I



ma



you



tapaai



तपाईं



he



wahaa



वहाँ



she



wahaa



वहाँ



we



haami



हामी



you (plural) tapaaiharu



तपाईंहरू



they



उनीहरू



uniharu



16



3. Listen to the following dialogues and repeat after the speaker. Then, read the dialogues in pairs. Ram: Good morning!



Namaste!



नमःते।



Hari: Good morning.



Namaste!



नमःते।



Ram: Good afternoon!



Namaste!



नमःते।



Hari: Good afternoon.



Namaste!



नमःते।



Ram: How are you?



Tapaailaai kasto chha?



तपाईंलाई कःतो छ?



Hari: Fine, thank you. And you? Ram: Very well.



Sanchhai chha. Dhanyabaad. tapaailaai ni? Malaai pani sanchhai chha.



सन्चै छ।धन्यवाद।तपाईंलाईं िन?



Ram: Good evening, Hari.



Namaste Hari.



नमःते, हरी ।



Hari: Good evening.



anamaste!



नमःते।



Ram: How are you, Hari?



Sanchai Hari?



सन्चै हरी?



Hari: Fine, thank you. And you? Ram: Fine. Good night.



Sanchai chha. Dhanyabaad. Tapaailaai ni? Sanchhai. Shubha raatri.



सन्चै छ।धन्यवाद।तपाईंलाईं िन? सन्चै।शुभ राऽी।



Hari: Good night, Ram.



Shubha raatri, Ram.



शुभ राऽी राम।



Informal Ram: Hi, Hari.



Namaste, Hari.



नमःते, हरी ।



Hari: Hi!



Namaste!



नमःते।



Ram: How are you?



Sanchai?



सन्चै।



Hari: Good. And you?



Thik chha. Tapaailaai ni?



ठ क छ।तपाईंलाई िन?



Ram: Good!



Thik chha.



ठ क छ।



Hari: Bye!



Pheri bheTaulaa.



फेरी भेटौंला।



मलाई पिन सन्चै छ।



4. Use the dialogues above as a model and compose your own similar dialogues. Work in pairs or in small groups.



17



GEOGRAPHY



Map of Nepal



18



Study the chart below which details usage of the verb ‘hunu’ or ‘to be.’ Noun / Prounoun I



Positive ma



म



am



hu



tapaai tapaaiharu



तपाईं



are



hunuhunchha



wahaa wahaaharu



वहाँ



are



We



haami haamharu



हामी



You



timi timiharu



ितमी



u uniharu



You



He /she



He/ she /it They



हँु



Negative not



hoina



होईन



हनु ु हु न्छ



not



hunuhunna



हनु ु हु न्न



hunuhunchha



हनु ु हु न्छ



not



hunuhunna



हनु ु हु न्न



are



hau



हौं



not



hoinau



होइनौं



are



hau



हौ



not



hoinau



होईनौ



ऊ



is



ho



हो



not



hoina



होईन



उनीहरू



are



hun



हन ु



not



hoinan



होईनन ्



तपाईंहरू वहाँहरू हामीहरू ितमीहरू



मेरो घर नेपाल हो।



I am from…



Mero ghar Nepal ho.



You are from…



Tapaaiko ghar America ho



तपाईंको घर अमे रका हो।



He is from…



Wahaako ghar Japan ho.



वहाँको घर जापान हो।



She is from…



Wahaako ghar Pakistan ho.



वहाँको घर पा कःतान हो।



It is from…



Usko ghar Bhutan ho.



उःको घर भुटान हो।



We are from…



Haamro ghar China ho.



हाॆो घर चीन हो।



You are from…



Timro ghar Korea ho.



ितॆो घर को रया हो।



They are from…



Uniharuko ghar India ho.



उनीहरुको घर भारत हो।



5. Listen to the following sentences and repeat after the speaker. 1. I am Nepali.



Ma Nepali hu.



I am from Nepal.



Mero ghar Nepal ho.



2. He is Nepali.



Wahaa Nepali hunuhunchha.



He is from Nepal.



Wahaako ghar Nepal ho.



3. She is Nepali.



Wahaa Nepali hunuhunchha.



19



म नेपाली हँु ।



मेरो घर नेपाल हो। वहाँ नेपाली हनु ु हु न्छ।



वहाँको घर नेपाल हो। वहाँ नेपाली हनु ु हु न्छ।



She is from Kathmandu.



Wahaako ghar Kathmandu ho.



वहाँको घर काठमान्डू हो।



4. We are Nepali.



Haami Nepali hau.



हामी नेपाली हौं।



We are from Pokhara.



Haamro ghar Pokhara ho.



हाॆो घर पोखरा हो।



5. You are Nepali.



Tapaai Nepali hunuhunchha.



You are from Bhaktapur.



Tapaaiko ghar Bhaktapur ho.



तपाईं नेपाली हनु ु हु न्छ।



6. They are Nepali.



Uniharu Nepali hun.



They are from Pokhara.



Uniharuko ghar Pokhara ho.



तपाईंको घर भ पुर हो। उनीहरू नेपाली हन। ु ्



उनीहरूको घर पोखरा हो।



When you conjugate the verbs “to live, to sit, to stay, and to reside, “basnu” is the present tense and future tense as well. All verbs are conjugated this way. Noun /Pronoun म ma तपाईं(हरू) tapaai(haru) वहाँ(हरू) wahaa(haru) हामी(हरू) haami(haru) ितमी(हरू) timi(haru) ऊ u उनीहरू uniharu



Positive बःछु baschhu बःनुहु न्छ basnu hunchha बःनुहु न्छ basnu hunchha बःछौं baschhau बःछौ baschhau बःछ baschha बःछन ् baschhan



Negative बिःदन basdina बःनुहु न्न basnu hunna बःनुहु न्न basnu hunna बःदै नौं basdainau बःदै नौं basdainau बिःदन basdina बःदै नन ् basdainan



English I live I don’t live You live You don’t live You live You don’t live We live We don’t live You live You don’t live He lives She doesn’t live They live They don’t live



6. Pretend you and your classmates are from Nepal. Introduce yourself and your classmates to your friend in Nepali. Use the model below and the map. MODEL: ma Nepali hu. mero ghar Nepal ho. Ram Nepali hunuhunchha. wahaako ghar Nepal ho. म नेपाली हँु । मेरो घर नेपाल हो। राम नेपाली हनु ु हु न्छ। वहाँको घर नेपाल हो। Hari ra Sita Nepali hunuhunchha.wahaaharuko ghar Nepal ho. हरी र सीता नेपाली हनु ु हु न्छ। वहाँहरूको घर नेपाल हो।



20



Note: “kahaa” means where. Where are you from?



Tapaaiko ghar kahaa ho?



तपाईंको घर कहाँ हो?



Where is he (or she, or it) from? Where are we (they) from?



Wahaako ghar kahaa ho?



वहाँको घर कहाँ हो?



Haamro ghar kahaa ho?



हाॆो घर कहाँ हो?



7. Listen to the following dialogues in Nepali and repeat after the speaker. Follow along in your workbook. Mero ghar Kathmandu ho.



मेरो घर काठमान्डू हो।



Tapaaiko ghar kahaa ho?



तपाईंको घर कहाँ हो ?



Mero ghar Pokhara ho.



मेरो घर पोखरा हो।



Sitako ghar Bhaktapur ho.



सीताको घर भ पुर हो।



Hariko ghar kahaa ho?



हरीको घर कहाँ हो ?



Wahaako ghar Lalitpur ho.



वहाँको घर लिलतपुर हो।



3. A. I am from Jomasom.



Mero ghar Jomsom ho.



मेरो घर जोमसोम हो।



Where are you and Sunita from?



Tapaai ra Sunitako ghar kahaa ho? Haamro ghar Dhulikhel ho.



तपाईं र सुिनताको घर कहाँ हो ? हाॆो घर धुिलखेल हो।



4. A. Ram is from Nagarkot.



Ramko ghar Nagarkot ho.



रामको घर नगरकोट हो।



Where are Shiv and Sushila from?



Shiva ra Sushilako ghar kahaa ho? Uniharuko ghar Biratnagar ho.



िशव र सुशीलाको घर कहाँ हो ?



1. A. I am from Kathmandu. Where are you from? B. I am from Pokhara. 2. A. Sita is from Bhaktapur. Where is Hari from? B. He is from Lalitpur.



B. We are from Dhulikhel.



B. They are from Biratnagar.



Note: “हो/ho” means yes and “होईन /hoina” means “no” in Nepali.



21



उनीहरुको घर िबराटनगर हो।



9. Role-play the dialogues above using the map of the Nepal. Am I from…? Mero ghar Nepal ho? मेरो घर नेपाल हो? Are you from…? Tapaaiko ghar Pokhara ho? तपाईंको घर पोखरा हो? Is he from…? Wahaako ghar Pokhara ho? वहाँको घर पोखरा हो? Is she from…? Wahaako ghar Nagarkot ho?



Yes, I am. Ho, mero ghar Nepal ho. हो, मेरो घर नेपाल हो। Yes, you are. Ho, tapaaiko ghar Pokhara ho. हो, तपाईंको घर पोखरा हो। Yes, he is. Ho, wahaako ghar Pokhara ho. हो, वहाँको घर पोखरा हो। Yes, she is. Ho, wahaako ghar Nagarkot ho.



वहाँको घर नगरकोट हो? Is it from…? Usko ghar Kathmandu ho? उःको घर काठमान्डू हो? Are we from…? Haamro ghar Bhaktapur ho?



हो, वहाँको घर नगरकोट हो। Yes, it is. Ho, usko ghar Kathmandu ho. हो, उःको घर काठमान्डू हो। Yes, we are. Ho, haamro ghar Bhaktapur ho.



हाॆो घर भ पुर हो? Are they from…? Uniharuko ghar Lalitpur ho?



हो, हाॆो घर भ पुर हो। Yes, they are. Ho, uniharuko ghar Lalitpur ho.



उनीहरूको घर लिलतपुर हो?



हो, उनीहरूको घर लिलतपुर हो।



No, I am not. Hoina, mero ghar Nepal hoina. होईन, मेरो घर नेपाल होईन। No, you are not. Hoina, tapaaiko ghar Pokhara hoina. होईन, तपाईंको घर पोखरा होईन। No, he is not. Hoina, wahaako ghar Pokhara hoina. होईन, वहाँको घर पोखरा होईन। No, she is not. Hoina, wahaako ghar Nagarkot hoina. होईन,वहाँको घर नगरकोट होईन। No, it is not. Hoina, usko ghar Kathmandu hoina. होईन, उःको घर काठमान्डू होईन। No, we are not. Hoina, haamro ghar Bhaktapur hoina. होईन, हाॆो घर भ पुर होईन। No, they are not. Hoina, uniharuko ghar Lalitpur hoina. होईन, उनीहरूको घर लिलतपुर होईन।



9. Read the following dialogues and role-play them with a partner. Tapaaiko ghar Nepal ho?



तपाईंको घर नेपाल हो?



Ho, mero ghar Nepal ho.



हो, मेरो घर नेपाल हो।



2. A. Are you from Pokhara?



Tapaaiko ghar Pokhara ho?



तपाईंको घर पोखरा हो?



B. No, I am not. I am from Kathmandu.



Hoina, mero ghar Pokhara hoina. Mero ghar Kathmandu ho.



होईन, मेरो घर पोखरा होईन।



3. A. Is Ram from Nepal?



Ramko ghar Nepal ho?



रामको घर नेपाल हो?



Ho, wahaako ghar Nepal ho.



हो, वहाँको घर नेपाल हो।



1. A. Are you from Nepal? B. Yes, I am from Nepal.



B. Yes, he is from Nepal.



22



मेरो घर काठमान्डू हो।



4. A. Are Ram and Sita from Pokhara?



Ram ra Sitako ghar Pokhara ho?



राम र सीताको घर पोखरा हो?



B. Yes, they are.



Ho, wahaaharuko ghar Pokhara ho.



हो, वहाँहरूको घर पोखरा हो।



What is your name? Tapaaiko naam ke ho? तपाईंको नाम के हो?



What is your name? Tapaaiko naam ke ho? तपाईंको नाम के हो?



My name is Ram. Mero naam Ram ho. मेरो नाम राम हो।



My name is Hari. Mero naam Hari ho. मेरो नाम हरी हो।



I



ma



म



My



mero



मेरो



You



tapaai



तपाईं



Your



tapaaiko



तपाईंको



He



wahaa



वहाँ



His



wahaako



वहाँको



She



wahaa



वहाँ



Her



wahaako



It



u



उ



वहाँको



Its



usko



उःको



We



haami



हामी



Our



haamro



हाॆो



You



timi



ितमी



Your



timro



ितॆो



They



uniharu



उनीहरू



Their



uniharuko



उनीहरूको



23



What is her name? Wahaako naam ke ho? वहाँको नाम के हो? Her name is Sita. Wahaako naam Sita ho. वहाँको नाम सीता हो।



What is his name? Wahaako naam ke ho? वहाँको नाम के हो? His name is Hari. Wahaako naam Hari ho. वहाँको नाम हरी हो।



10. Listen to the following dialogue and repeat after the speaker. A. Good morning!



namaste!



नमःते।



B. Good morning!



namaste!



नमःते।



A. My name is Shiva. What is your name?



mero naam shiva ho. tapaaiko naam ke ho?



मेरो नाम िशव हो।



B. My name is Ravi.



mero naam ravi ho.



मेरो नाम रिव हो।



A. Nice to meet you, Tera.



tapaailaai bhetera khushi laagyo, shiva. malaai pani, ravi.



तपाईंलाई भेटेर खुशी लाग्यो, िशव।



B. Nice to meet you, Ravi.



24



तपाईंको नाम के हो?



मलाई पिन,रिव।



11. Work in pairs or in small groups. Look at the pictures above and make up appropriate dialogues with greetings for them. Grammar Note: Word order Nepali word order is always subject-object-verb. Example: मेरो नाम हरी हो। Mero naam Hari ho. This phrase means ÔMy name is HariÕ but literally translates to ÔMy name Hari is.Õ 12. Listen to the following statements and repeat after the speaker.



Streets of Kathmandu



Barahi Mandir, Pokhara



My name is Hari. Mero naam Hari ho. मेरो नाम हरी हो। I live in Kathmandu. Ma Kathmandumaa baschhu. ु म काठमान्डू मा बःछ।



His name is Ram. Wahaako naam Ram ho. वहाँको नाम राम हो। He lives in Pokhara. Wahaa Pokharamaa basnu hunchha. वहाँ पोखरामा बःनुहु न्छ।



25



Bhaktapur (Bhadgaon) Durbar Square Her name is Sushila. Wahaako naam Sushila ho. वहाँको नाम सुशीला हो। She lives in Bhaktapur. Wahaa Bhaktapurmaa basnu hunchha. वहाँ भ पुरमा बःनुहु न्छ।



Patan



Janakpur



We live in Patan. Haami Patanmaa baschhau. हामी पाटनमा बःछौं।



They live in Janakpur. Uniharu Janakpurmaa baschhan. उनीहरू जनकपुरमा बःछन ्।



13. Read the following sentences and translate them into English. Check your work in the Answer Key. 1. Ram Pokharamaa basnuhunchha. राम पोखरामा बःनुहु न्छ। 2. Tapaai Bhaktapurmaa basnuhunchha? तपाईं भ पुरमा बःनुहु न्छ? Ho, ma Bhaktapurmaa baschhu. ु हो, म भ पुरमा बःछ। 3. Ram Bhaktapurmaa basnuhunna. राम भ पुरमा बःनुहु न्न। 4. Tapaai kahaa basnuhunchha? तपाईं कहाँ बःनुहु न्छ? Ma Biratnagarmaa baschhu. ु म िबराटनगरमा बःछ। 5. Ram ra Sita kahaa basnu hunchha? राम र सीता कहाँ बःनुहु न्छ? Wahaaharu Nagarkotmaa basnuhunchha. वहाँहरू नगरकोटमा बःनुहु न्छ।



26



14. Listen to the following dialogue and repeat after the speaker. Follow along in your workbook. Then work in pairs or in small groups and make up a similar dialogue. A. Namaste . नमःते। B. Namaste. नमःते। A. Mero naam Sushila ho. Tapaaiko naam ke ho? मेरो नाम सुशीला हो।तपाईंको नाम के हो? B. Mero naam Shiva ho. मेरो नाम िशव हो। A. Tapaailaai bheTera khushi laagyo, Shiva. तपाईंलाई भेटेर खुशी लाग्यो, िशव। B. Malaai pani khushi laagyo, Sushila. मलाईं पिन खुशी लाग्यो, सुशीला.। A. Ma Kathmandumaa baschhu. Tapaai kahaa basnu hunchha ? ु तपाईं कहाँ बःनुहु न्छ? म काठमान्डू मा बःछ। B. Ma Pokharamaa baschhu. ु म पोखरामा बःछ। 15. Work in pairs or in small groups. Imagine that you are new to the class. Ask your partner about the rest of the students (their names and where they live). Use the model below. MODEL: A. Wahaako naam ke ho? वहाँको नाम के हो? B. Wahaako naam Ram ho. वहाँको नाम राम हो। A. Wahaa kahaa basnuhunchha? वहाँ कहाँ बःनुहु न्छ?



B. Wahaa Pokharamaa basnuhunchha. वहाँ पोखरामा बःनुहु न्छ। 16. What is the question? Read the answers below and produce the questions in Nepali. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. Hoina, mero ghar Kathmandu hoina. mero ghar Pokara ho. होईन, मेरो घर काठमान्डू होईन। मेरो घर पोखरा हो। 2. Ho, ma Asannmaa baschhu. ु हो, म असनमा बःछ।



27



3. Ho, wahaako ghar Biratnagar ho. हो, वहाँको घर िबराटनगर हो। 4. 5.



हो, वहाँ महाराजगंजमा बःनुहु न्छ। Hoina, wahaako ghar Janakpur hoina. wahaako ghar Patan ho. होईन, वहाँको घर जनकपुर होईन । वहाँको घर पाटन हो।



6. Ho, mero naam Rekha ho. हो, मेरो नाम रे खा हो। 7. Hoina, wahaako naam Ram hoina. होईन, वहाँको नाम राम होईन। 8. Ho, mero ghar Katmandu ho. हो, मेरो घर काठमान्डू हो।



28



End-of-Lesson Tasks



1. Pretend that you are at a party. Introduce yourself to other people and ask them for their names, where they are from, and where they live. Work in pairs or in small groups. Use the model below. MODEL: A. namaste! mero naam Ram ho. tapaaiko naam ke ho? नमःते, मेरो नाम राम हो । तपाईंको नाम के हो? B. namaste! mero naam Hari ho. नमःते, मेरो नाम हरी हो। A. mero ghar Nepal ho. tapaaiko ghar kahaa ho? मेरो घर नेपाल हो। तपाईंको घर कहाँ हो? B. mero ghar Dharan ho. मेरो घर धरान हो। A. ma Kathmandumaa baschhu . tapaai kahaa basnuhunchha? ु तपाईं कहाँ बःनुहु न्छ? म काठमान्डू मा बःछ। B. ma Pokharamaa baschhu. म पोखरामा बःछु्।



29



2. Introduce your friend to your classmates. You may follow the example below. Wahaako naam Shyam ho. वहाँको नाम ँयाम हो। Wahaako ghar Nepal ho. वहाँको घर नेपाल हो। Wahaa Nepali hunuhunchha. वहाँ नेपाली हनु ु हु न्छ। Wahaa Pokharamaa basnuhunchha. वहाँ पोखरामा बःनुहु न्छ।



30



Vocabulary List Hello



Namaste



नमःते



Hi



Namaste



नमःते



Good morning



Namaste



नमःते



Good afternoon



Namaste



नमःते



Good evening



Namaste



नमःते



Good night



Shubha raatri



शुभ राऽी



Good-bye



Basnus hai?



बःनुस है ?



How are you?



Sanchai?



सन्चै?



Fine/ very well



Sanchai /raamro chha



सन्चै / राॆो छ



Thank you



Dhanyabaad



धन्यवाद



You are welcome



Swaagat chha



ःवागत छ



Nice to meet you.



Bhetera khushi laagyo



भेटेर खुशी लाग्यो



My name is …



Mero naam ……. Ho



मेरो नाम ………… हो



I



Ma



म



He



Wahaa



वहाँ



She



Wahaa



वहाँ



You



Tapaai



तपाईं



We



Haami



हामी



You (plural)



Tapaaiharu



तपाईंहरू



They



Uniharu



उनीहरू



To live/ in



Basnu / maa



बःनु / मा



No



Hoina



होईन



Yes



Ho



हो



To be



Hunu



To be from



Baat



हनु ु



Where are you from?



Tapaai kahaabaat?



तपाईं कहाँबाट?



What is your name?



Tapaai ko naam ke ho?



तपाईंको नाम के हो?



Where do you live?



Tapaai kahaa basnuhunchha?



Mine



Mero



तपाईं कहाँ बःनुहु न्छ?



Yours



Tapaaiko



बाट



मेरो



तपाईंको



31



His



Wahaako



वहाँको



Hers



Wahaako



वहाँको



Ours



Haamro



हाॆो



Yours



Timro



ितॆो



Theirs



Uniharuko



उनीहरूको



32



ANSWER KEY 13. 1. Ram lives in Pokhara. राम पोखरामा बःनुहु न्छ। 2. Do you live in Pokhara? Yes, I do. ु तपाईं पोखरामा बःनुहु न्छ? हो, म पोखरामा बःछ। 3. Hari does not live in Pokhara. हरी पोखरामा बःनुहु न्न। 4. Where do you live? I live in Biratnagar. ु तपाईं कहाँ बःनुहु न्छ? म िबराटनगरमा बःछ। 5. Where do Ram and Sita live? They live in Nagarkot. राम र सीता कहाँ बःनुहु न्छ? वहाँहरु पोखरामा बःनुहु न्छ। 16. Your questions should be similar in grammatical form to those below, although some city and people names may be different. 1. Are you from Kathmandu? तपाईंको घर काठमान्डू हो? Tapaaiko ghar Kathmandu ho? 2. Do you live in Pokhara? तपाईं पोखरामा बःनुहु न्छ? Tapaai Pokharamaa basnuhunchha? 3. Is he from Bhaktapur? वहाँको घर भ पुर हो? Wahaako ghar Bhaktapur ho?



4. Does she live in Lalitpur? वहाँ लिलतपुरमा बःनुहु न्छ? Wwahaa Lalitpurmaa basnuhunchha? 5. Is he from Dharan? वहाँको घर धरान हो? Wahaako ghar Dharan ho?



6. Is your name Ram? तपाईंको नाम राम हो? Tapaaiko naam Ram ho? 7. Is his name Shiva? वहाँको नाम िशव हो? Wahaako naam Shiva ho? 8. Are you from Dhulikhel? तपाईंको घर धुिलखेल हो? Tapaaiko ghar Dhulikhel ho?



33



Lesson 2 Living and Working बसाई र कामगराई basaai ra kaamgaraai



This lesson will introduce you to: - Typical housing arrangements for most people living in Nepal. - Using “or” in questions about living arrangements and professions. - The verb “to have.” - Names of professions (singular and plural forms).



1. Look at the pictures below and listen to the words. Repeat the words after the speaker.



apartment deraa डे रा



apartment building deraa bhawan डे रा भवन



room kothaa कोठा



house ghar घर



military camp sainik shibir सैिनक िश वर



tent tent टे न्ट



barracks byaarek यारे क



hotel hotel होटे ल



34



2. Match the Nepali words on the left with their English equivalents on the right. Replay the audio from the previous section if necessary. टे न्ट



tent



Hotel



कोठा



kothaa



Tent



घर



ghar



Barracks



डे रा



deraa



Room



होटे ल



hotel



Military camp



डे रा भवन



deraa bhawan



House



byaarek



Apartment



sainik shibir



Apartment building



यारे क सैिनक िश वर



3. Read the following sentences and translate them into English. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. राम सैिनक िश वरमा टे न्टमा बःनुहु न्छ। Ram sainik shibirmaa Tentmaa basnuhnunchha. 2. ौीमती रीता थापा सानो डे रामा बःनुहु न्छ। shrimati Rita Thapa saano Deraamaa basnuhunchha. ू 3. हरी र सीता काठमान्डू मा ठलो घरमा बःनुहु न्छ। Hari ra Sita Kathmandumaa Thulo gharmaa basnuhunchha. 4. िशव होटे लमा बःनुहु न्छ। Shiva hotelmaa basnuhunchha. 5. सुशील र चन्ि यारे कमा बःनुहु न्छ। Sushil ra Chandra byaarekmaa basnuhunchha. 6. सुधीर र म मेरो घरमा बःछ । Sudhir ra ma mero gharmaa baschhau.



4. Listen to the following dialogues and repeat after the speaker. Follow along in your workbook. Then, break into pairs or small groups and make up similar dialogues. 1. A. I live in a big house. Where do you live? Ma Thulo gharmaa baschhu. Tapaai kahaa basnuhunchha? ू ु तपा कहाँ बःनुहु न्छ? म ठलो घरमा बःछ।



B. I live in a tent in a military camp. Ma sainik shibirmaa tentmaa baschhu. ु म सैिनक िश वरमा टे न्टमा बःछ।



2. A. Shyam lives in the hotel. Where does Sunita live? Shyam hotelmaa basnuhunchha. Sunita kahaa basnuhunchha?



B. Nita lives in an apartment building. Nita Deraa bhawanmaa basnuhunchha.



35



ँयाम होटे लमा बःनुहु न्छ।सुिनता कहाँ बःनुहु न्छ? 3. A. We live in the barracks. Where do Madan and Kamala live? hammi byaarekmaa baschhau. Madan ra Kamala kahaa basnuhunchha? हामी यारे कमा बःछ ।मदन र कमला कहाँ बःनुहु न्छ?



िनता डे रा भवनमा बःनुहु न्छ। B. They live in the military camp. Wahaaharu sainik shibirmaa basnuhunchha. वहाँह सैिनक िश वरमा बःनुहु न्छ।



Grammar Note: “Or” is क (“ki”) in Nepali. For example: Tapaailaai chiyaa khaana manlaagchha ki kaphi? “Do you like to drink tea or coffee?” Tapaailaai samaachaar herna manlaagchha ki khel? “Do you like to watch news or the game?”



5. Read the following dialogues and translate them into English. Check your translations with the Answer Key. Then, work in pairs or in small groups, and make up similar dialogues. 1. A. तपा बःनुहु न्छ?



आ नो घरमा बःनुहु न्छ क डे रामा



Tapaai aaphno gharmaa basnuhunchha ki Deraamaa?



ु B. म घरमा बःछ।



2. A. वहाँह B. वहाँह



Ma gharmaa baschhu.



होटे लमा बःनुहु न्छ क डे राको घरमा?



Wahaaharu hotelmaa basnuhunchha ki Deraako gharmaa? Wahaaharu Deraako gharmaa basnuhunchha.



डे राको घरमा बःनुहु न्छ।



6. Compose questions using the model and the words below. Check your work with the Answer Key. MODEL: Tapaai hotelmaa basnuhunchha ki byaarekmaa? तपा होटे लमा बःनुहु न्छ क यारे कमा? तपा



tapaai



टे न्ट / यारे क



Tapaai TenTmaa basnuhunchha ki byaarekmaa?



वहाँह



wahaaharu



होटे ल / घर



Wahaaharu hotelmaa basnuhunchha ki gharmaa?



वहाँ



wahaa



डे रा



Wahaa Deraa bhawanmaa basnuhunchha ki sainik shibirmaa?



भवन/



सैिनक िश वर वहाँ



wahaa



कोठा /टे न्ट



Wahaa koThaama basnuhunchha ki TenTmaa?



हामी



haami



डे रा / होटे ल



Haami Deraamaa baschhau ki hotelmaa?



36



7. Listen to the speaker and write down the words you hear in Nepali. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. 2. 3. 4. Grammar Note: ‘To have’ In Nepali, there is no exact translation for “to have.” For instance, “Mero bhaai chha” literally means, “My younger brother exists” or “My younger brother is living,” rather than “I have a younger brother.” When referring to an elder or more respected person, use ‘hunuhunchha’ (positive) or ‘hunuhunna’ (negative). When referring to youngsters or non-living things use ‘chha’ (positive) or ‘chhaina’ (negative). Study the examples below. I have a house.



Mero ghar chha.



मेरो घर छ।



You have a dog.



Tapaaiko kukur chha.



तपाईको कुकुर छ।



He/she has a cat.



Wahaako biraalo chha.



वहाँको बरालो छ।



We have a car.



Haamro gaaDi chha.



हाॆो गाडी छ।



You (plural) have a pen.



Tapaaiharuko kalam chha.



तपाईह को कलम छ।



They have a family.



Wahaaharuko pariwaar chha.



वहाँह को प रवार छ।



8. Listen to the following sentences and repeat after the speaker. Follow along in your workbook. 1. I have a house in Kathmandu.



Mero ghar Kathmandumaa chha.



मेरो घर काठमान्डू मा छ।



2. We have a room in an apartment building.



Haamro kothaa deraako bhawan maa chha.



हाॆो कोठा डे राको भवनमा



3. Ram has an apartment in Bhakatpur. 4. Hari and Sita have their house in Dhulikhel.



Ramko deraa Bhaktapurmaa chha.



रामको डे रा भ पुरमा छ।



Hari ra Sitako aaphno ghar Dhulikhelmaa chha.



ह र र सीताको आ नो घर



37



छ।



धुिलखेलमा छ।



9. Make up sentences using the correct form of the verb “to have.” MODEL: I have an apartment. मेरो डे रा छ Mero deraa chha. mero



मेरो



tapaaiko



तपा को



wahaako



वहाँको



wahaako



वहाँको



usko



उःको



haamro



हाॆो



ghar घर chha



छ



deraa डे रा kothaa कोठा



wahaaharuko वहाँह को Cultural Note: Nepalese Labor Force A majority of people in Nepal are farmers as farming is the primary occupation available in Nepal. In addition, Nepal is also a major tourist destination and people living in the hilly regions are engaged in the transport of goods as porters or as tourist guides. Other jobs available are in government offices, the private sector, as well as professional jobs like doctors and engineers. The information technology sector is comparatively less developed in Nepal.



10. Listen to the new vocabulary related to professions and repeat after the speaker. Profession



peshaa / kaam/ byaabsaay



पेशा / काम / यावसाय



Doctor



daaktar



डाक्टर



Nurse



nars



नस



Laborer



kaamdaar



कामदार



Teacher



shikchhak



िशक्षक



Student



bidhyaarthi



वधाथ



Soldier



sipaahi



िसपाही



Mechanic



mistri



िम ी



Farmer



kisaan



Police Officer



prahari adhikrit



ूहरी अिधकृ त



Waitress



wetres



वेटरे स



Interpreter



anubaadak



अनुवादक



कसान



38



11. Circle the profession that the person in the picture is most likely to be.



nars ki shikchhak? नस क िशक्षक?



prahari adhikrit ki kisaan? ूहरी अिधकृ त क कसान?



wetres ki daakter? वेटरे स क डाक्टर?



sipaahi ki anubaadak? िसपाही क अनुवादक?



12. Match the Nepali words on the right with their English equivalents on the left. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. Profession



A. वेटरे स



wetres



2. Doctor



B. कसान



kisaan



3. Nurse



C. अनुवादक



anubaadak



4. Laborer



D. पेशा



peshaa



5. Teacher



E. नस



nars



6. Student



F. ूहरी अिधकृ त



prahari adhikrit



39



7. Soldier



G. डाक्टर



daakter



8. Mechanic



H. कामदार



kaamdaar



9. Farmer



I.



10. Police Officer



J. िसपाही



sipaahi



11. Waitress



K. िम ी



mistri



12. Interpreter



L. िशक्षक



shikchhak



वधाथ



bidhyaarthi



Note: To convert the singular forms of these professions to the plural forms, simply add ह of the word. For example: Singular sipaahi िसपाही



(“haru”) to the end



Plural sipaahiharu िसपाहीह



13. Listen to the plural form of nouns related to the names of professions, and repeat after the speaker. Profession peshaa पेशा Doctor daakter डाक्टर Nurse nars नस Laborer kaamdaar कामदार Teacher shikchhak िशक्षक Student bidhyaarthi वधाथ Soldier sipaahi िसपाही



professions peshaaharu पेशाह doctors daakterharu डाक्टरह nurses narsharu नसह laboreres kaamdaarharu कामदारह teachers shikchhakharu िशक्षकह students bidhyaarthiharu वधाथ ह soldiers sipaahiharu िसपाहीह



40



Mechanic mistri िम ी Farmer kisaan कसान Police officer prahari adhikrit ूहरी अिधकृ त Waitress wetres वेटरे स Interpreter anubaadak अनुवादक



mechanics mistriharu िम ीह farmers kisaanharu कसानह police officers prahari adhikritharu ूहरी अिधकृ त waitresses wetresharu वेटरे सह interpreters anubaadakharu अनुवादकह



14. Listen to the speaker and put a circle around each word you hear. Replay the audio as many times as you need. Check your answers with the Answer Key. A. . He is a mechanic/ farmer वहाँ िम ी / कसान हनहन्छ। ु ु B. They are teachers / doctors. वहाँह िशक्षकह / डाक्टरह हनहन्छ। ु ु C. She is an interpreter / student. वहाँ अनुवादक / वधाथ हनहन्छ ु ु । D. They are police officers / soldiers. वहाँह ूहरी अिधकृ तह / िसपाहीह हनहन्छ ु ु ।



41



End-of-Lesson Tasks



1. Give a brief introduction of yourself in Nepali, listing your name, where you are from, where you live, and what your occupation is. MODEL: Mero naam kamala ho. Ma Nepali hu. mero ghar Nepal ho. मेरो नाम कमला हो।म नेपाली हँु । मेरो घर नेपाल हो। Ma Kathmamdumaa baschhu. Ma shikchha hu. Ma deraamaa baschhu. ु म िशक्षक हँु । म डे रामा बःछ। ु म काठमान्डू मा बःछ।



2. Listen to the recording and circle the professions you hear. Check your work with the Answer Key. A.



1. वेटरे स 2. ूहरी अिधकृ त 3.अनुवादक



B.



1. नस 2. िशक्षक 3.



C.



कसान



1. डाक्टर 2. नस 3. वधाथ



42



3. Produce questions to go along with the following answers. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1._________________________? Mero naam Shyam ho. मेरो नाम ँयाम हो। 2._________________________? Mero ghar Nepal ho. मेरो घर नेपाल हो। 3._________________________? Ho, ma Pokharamaa baschhu. ु हो,म पोखरामा बःछ। 4._________________________? Mero ghar chhaina. Ma Deraamaa baschhu. ु मेरो घर छै न।म डे रामा बःछ। 5._________________________? Ho, ma mistri hu. हो, म िम ी हँु ।



43



Vocabulary List Apartment



Deraa



डे रा



Apartment building



Deraa bhawan



डे रा भवन



Barracks



Byaarek



Military camp



Sainik shibir



सैिनक िश वर



House



Ghar



घर



Tent



Tent



टे न्ट



Room



Kothaa



कोठा



Big



Thulo



ू ठलो



Small



Saano



सानो



Profession



Peshaa



पेशा



Farmer



Kisaan



कसान



Doctor



Daakter



डाक्टर



Nurse



Nars



नस



Laborer



Kaamdaar



कामदार



Teacher



Shikchhak



िशक्षक



Student



Bidhyaarthi



वधाथ



Soldier



Sipaahi



िसपाही



Mechanic



Mistri



िम ी



Waitress



Wetres



वेटरे स



Interpreter



Anubaadak



अनुवादक



Police officer



Prahari adhikrit



ूहरी अिधकृ त



To have



Chha



छ



यारे क



44



ANSWER KEY Exercise 3 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.



Ram lives in a tent at the military camp. Shrimati Thapa lives in a small apartment. Hari and Sita live in a big house in Kathmandu. Shiva lives in a hotel. Sushil and Chandra live in the barracks. Sudhir and I live in our house.



Exercise 5 1. A. Do you live in a house or in an apartment? B. I live in a house. 2. A. Do they live in a hotel or in an apartment building? B. They live in an apartment building. Exercise 6. Here are sample questions to compare against your work. Your questions may vary compared to the ones translated below. तपा टे न्टमा बःनुहु न्छ क यारे कमा? tapaai TenTmaa basnuhunchha ki byaarekmaa ? वहाँह होटे लमा बःनुहु न्छ क घरमा? wahaaharu hotelmaa basnuhunchha ki gharmaa? वहाँ डे रा भवनमा बःनुहु न्छ क सैिनक िश वरमा? wahaa Deraa bhawanmaa basnuhunchha ki sainik shibirmaa? वहाँ एउटा घरमा बःनुहु न्छ क पुरै घरमा? wahaa euTaa gharmaa basnuhunchha ki purai gharma? हामी डे रामा बःछ क होटे लमा? haami Deraamaa baschhau ki hotelmaa?



Exercise 7 1. Tent



टे न्ट Tent



2. House



घर ghar



3. Military camp



सैिनक िश वर sainik shibir



4. Hotel



होटे ल hotel



45



Exercise 11 Nurse



Nars नस



Farmer



Kisaan कसान



Waitress Wetres वेटरे स Sipaahi िसपाही



Soldier



Exercise 12 1. Profession



D.पेशा



peshaa



2. Doctor



G. डाक्टर



DaakTer



3. Nurse



E.नस



nars



4. Laborer



H.कामदार



kaamdaar



5. Teacher



L.िशक्षक



shikchhak



6. Student



I. वधाथ



bidhyaarthi



7. Soldier



J. िसपाही



sipaahi



8. Mechanic



K. िम ी



mistri



9. Farmer



B. कसान



kisaan



10. Police Officer



F. ूहरी अिधकृ त



prahari adhikrit



11. Waitress



A. वेटरे स



weTres



12. Interpreter



C. अनुवादक



anubaadak



Exercise 14 A. He is a farmer. Wahaa kisaan hunuhunchha. B. They are teachers. Wahaaharu shikchha hunuhunchha. C. She is an interpreter. Wahaa anubaadak hunuhunchha. D. They are officers. Wahaaharu prahari hunuhunchha.



कसान



kisaan shikchhak



िशक्षक



anubaadak



अनुवादक



prahari



अिधकृ त



End of Lesson Exercise 2 A. 3 अनुवादक



anubaadak



interpreter



B. 2 िशक्षक



shikchhak



teacher



C. 3 वधाथ



bidhyaarthi



student



46



End of Lesson Exercise 3 1. तपा को नाम के हो? Tapaaiko naam ke ho? What is your name? 2. तपा को घर कहाँ हो? Tapaaiko ghar kahaa ho? Where are you from? 3. तपा पोखरामा बःनुहु न्छ? Tapaai Pokharamaa basnuhunchha? Do you live in Pokhara? 4. तपा को घर छ क डे रामा बःनुहु न्छ? Tapaaiko ghar chha ki deraamaa basnuhunchha? Do you live in a house or an apartment? 5. तपा िम ी हनु ु हु न्छ? Tapaai mistri hunuhuchha? Are you a mechanic?



47



Lesson 3 Days of the Week, Numbers, Ages of People ह ाको नाम, सं या, उमेर र मा छे haptaako naam , sankhyaa, umer ra maanchhe



This lesson will introduce you to: - Days of the week. - Numbers from 0 to 100. - How to understand and respond to questions about what day it is. - How to find out somebody’s age and tell how old you are.



1. Listen to the days of the week and repeat them after the speaker. Monday



sombaar



सोमबार



Tuesday



mangalbaar



मंगलबार



Wednesday



budhabaar



बुधबार



Thursday



bihibaar



Friday



shukrabaar



शुबबार



Saturday



shanibaar



शिनबार



Sunday



aaitabaar



आईतबार



बह बार



Read the days of the week several times, practicing pronunciation. Replay the audio if necessary.



2. Listen to the following dialogues and repeat after the speaker. Follow along in the workbook. Work in pairs or in small groups and role-play the dialogues using the names of the other days of the week. आईतबार सोमबार मंगलबार बुधबार बह बार शुबबार शिनबार aaitabaar sombaar mangalbaar budhabaar bihibaar shukrabaar shanibaar



48



1. What day is it today?



Aaja ke baar ho?



आज के बार हो?



Today is Monday.



Aaja sombaar ho.



आज सोमबार हो।



2. Is today Monday?



Aaja sombaar ho?



आज सोमबार हो?



Ho, aaja sombaar ho.



हो, आज सोमबार हो।



Aaja sombaar ho?



आज सोमबार हो?



Hoina, aaja mangalbaar ho.



होईन, आज मंगलबार हो।



Yes, today is Monday. 3. Is today Monday? No, today is Tuesday.



3. Listen to the pronunciations and read the numbers from 0 to 10.



0



० shunya शू य



1



१ ek एक



2



२ dui दई ु



3



३ tin तीन



4



४ chaar चार



5



५ paach पाँच



6



7



६ chha छ



७ saat सात



8



८ aath आठ



9



९ nau नौ



10 १० dash दश



4. Practice using the numbers. Work with a partner and tell them in Nepali your home telephone number, work telephone number, and address numbers, etc. 5. Read the following dialogue. Pay attention to the numbers. A. What is your telephone number?



Tapaaiko telephone number kati ho?



तपाईको टे िलफोन नंम्बर



B. My telephone number is (360) 984- 0217.



Mero telephone number (tin chha shunya) nau aath chaar – shunya dui ek saat ho. Tapaaiko gharko number kati ho?



मेरो टे िलफोन नंम्बर



Mero gharko number ek shunya chaar paach chha ho.



मेरो घरको नंम्बर १०४५६



A. What is your house number? B. My house number is 10456.



कित हो? (३६०) ९८४-०२१७ हो। तपाईको घरको नंम्बर कित हो? हो।



6. Role-play the dialogue with a partner using Exercise 5 as a model. Pretend one of you is a receptionist who wants to know your name, telephone number, and house number. Ask each other questions and use as many numbers in your answers as you can.



49



7. Listen to the sentences and write down the missing numbers you hear. Check your work with the Answer Key. MODEL: मेरो टे िलफोन नंम्बर ५६७_८_४ हो। Mero telephone number paach chha saat aatch char (५६७_८_४) ho. 1. Mero Telephon number ६७__६५३ ho. मेरो टे िलफोन नंम्बर ६७__६५३ हो। 2. Mero Telephone number ४३२__०१ ho. मेरो टे िलफोन नंम्बर ४३२__०१ हो। 3. Mero Telephone number ८९६४५__ ho. मेरो टे िलफोन नंम्बर ८९६४५__ हो। 4. Mero Telephone number ४__०६९२ ho. मेरो टे िलफोन नंम्बर ४__०६९२ हो। 5. Mero telephone number ९७८__६४५ ho. मेरो टे िलफोन नंम्बर ९७८__६४५ हो।



8. Listen as the speaker says the numbers 11 to 19. Repeat after the speaker. 11 eleven



११



eghaara



एघार



12 twelve



१२



baarha



बा॑



13 thirteen



१३



terah



ते॑



14 fourteen



१४



chaudha



चौध



15 fifteen



१५ pandhra



प य



16 sixteen



१६



sorah



सो॑



17 seventeen



१७ satra



सऽ



18 eighteen



१८



अठार



19 nineteen



१९ unnaais



athaara



उ नाइस



50



9. Now read the numbers from 20 to 29 in Nepali: 20 twenty



२० bis



बीस



21 twenty-one



२१ ekkaais



ए काइस



22 twenty-two



२२ baais



बाइस



23 twenty-three



२३ teis



तेइस



24 twenty-four



२४ chaubis



चौबीस



25 twenty-five



२५ pachchis



प चीस



26 twenty-six



२६ chhabis



छ बीस



27 twenty-seven



२७ sattaais



स ाइस



28 twenty-eight



२८ aaththaais



अ ठाइस



29 twenty-nine



२९ unantis



उन तीस



10. Read the texts and translate into English. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. Mero naam Sunita ho. Ma Pokharamaa baschhu. ma weteres hu. mero ghar chha. Mero gharko number ekkaais ho. ु मेरो नाम सुिनता हो।म पोखरामा बःछ।म वेटरे स हँु । मेरो घर छ। मेरो घरको नंम्बर ए काइस हो।



2. Ram sipaahi ho. U deraako bhawanmaa baschha. Usko deraako number pacchis ho. राम िसपाह हो। उ डे राको भवनमा बःछ। उःको डे राको नंम्बर प चीस हो। 3. वहाँको नाम सुशीला हो। वहाँ िश क हनु ु हु छ।वहाँ घरमा बःनुहु छ। वहाँको घरको नंम्बर १६ हो। Wahaako naam Sushila ho. Wahaa shikchhak hunuhunchha. Wahaa gharmaa basnuhunchha. Wahaa ko gharko number १६ ho.



4. हर र सीताको घर बराटनगरमा छ।वहाँह को घरको नंम्बर १४ हो। Hari ra Sitako ghar Birantnagarmaa chha. wahaaharuko gharko number १४ ho.



51



11. Listen to the speaker and circle the number you hear in each row. Check your work with the Answer Key. A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I.



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9



-



10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19



-



21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29



12. Listen to the next set of numbers. Repeat after the speaker. 30



thirty



३० tis



तीस



40



forty



४० chaalis



चालीस



50



fifty



५० pachaas



पचास



60



sixty



६० saathi



साठ



70



seventy



७० sattari



80



eighty



८० asi



स र



90



ninety



९० nabbe



न बे



१०० ek saya



एक सय



100 one hundred



असी



13. Read the following numbers in Nepali. 30, 31, 40, 42, 50, 53, 60, 64, 70, 75, 80, 86, 90, 97, 100. Grammar Note: Asking about someone’s age A polite way of asking an elder their age is ‘Tapaai kati barsha hunubhayo?’ Or you may also ask: ‘Tapaai kati barsha?’. A less formal way of asking someone’s age is: ‘U kati barsha bhayo?’ Or, you may also ask: ‘U kati barsha?’. This is the form you should use with peers, or young people. Here are some more examples: “Timi kati barsha bhayau?” How old are you? “Uniharu kati barsha bhae?” How old they are?



52



14. Listen to several short exchanges asking about ages. Repeat after the speaker. 1. A. How old are you? B. I am 32 years old. 2. A. How old is he? B. He is 11. 3. A. How old is she? B. She is 86 years old. 4. A. Is she 34 years old? B. No, she is 35.



5. A. Are you 21? B. Yes, I am 21. 6. A. What is your age? B. I am 47.



तपा



कित बष हनु ु भयो?



Tapaai kati barsha hunubhayo? Ma battis barsha bhae.



म ब ीस वष भएँ।



U kati barsha bhayo?



उ कित बष भयो?



U egaarah barsha bhayo.



उ एघार बष भयो।



Wahaa kati barsha hunuhubhayo? Wahaa chhyaalis barsha hunubhayo.



वहाँ कित वष हुनुभयो?



Wahaa chaautis barsha hunubhayo? Hoina, wahaa paitis barsha hunubhayo.



वहाँ च तीस वष हनु ु भयो?



वहाँ छयालीस वष हनु ु भयो।



होईन, वहाँ पतीस वष हनु ु भयो।



Tapaai ekkaais barsha?



तपा



ए काइस वष?



Ho, ma ekkaais.



हो, म ए काइस।



Tapaaiko umer kati bhayo?



तपा को उमर कित भयो?



Ma saitaalis.



म सतालीस।



15. Tell your classmates in Nepali how old you are and ask them about their ages. 16. Listen and match the age with the name. Check you work with the Answer Key. Sunita Ram Kabita Rita Shekhar



11 72 52 29 43



53



End-of-Lesson Tasks



1. Listen to the following statements in Nepali. For each passage, write down the person’s name, age and occupation. Pause or replay the audio as necessary until you understand the relevant information. Check your work with the Answer Key. A.



B.



C.



नमःते ! मेरो नाम ँयाम हो।म छ बीस वष भएँ।म ूहर अिधकृ त हँु ।



वहाँको नाम दनेश हो।वहाँ चालीस वष हनु ु भयो।वहाँ िसपाह हनु ु हु छ।



वहाँको नाम अिनता हो। वहाँ चौवालीस वष हनु ु भयो।वहाँ िश क हनु ु हु छ।



A



B



C



Name Age Occupation 2. Do the following activities in Nepali. Ask what day it is. Say what day it is today. Ask someone’s age. Say how old you are.



54



Vocabulary List Day



Din



दन



Today



Aaja



आज



Year



Barsha



वष



Monday



Sombaar



सोमबार



Tuesday



Mangalbaar



मंगलबार



Wednesday



Budhabaar



बुधबार



Thursday



Bihibaar



Friday



Shukrabaar



शुबबार



Saturday



Shanibaar



शिनबार



Sunday



Aaitabaar



आईतबार



Telephone



Telephone



टे िलफोन



Number



Sankhyaa



सं या



Age



Umer



उमेर



Old



Budho



बूढो



How old are you?



Tapaai kati barsha?



तपा



What day is it today?



Aaja ke baar ho?



आज के बार हो?



Today is Monday.



Aaja sombaar ho.



आज सोमबार हो।



I am 25 years old.



Ma pachchis barsha bhae.



म प चीस वष भएँ।



0



zero



० shunya



शू य



1



one



१ ek



एक



2



two



२ dui



3



three



३ tin



दई ु



4



four



४ chaar



चार



5



five



५ paach



पाँच



6



six



६ chha



छ



7



seven



७ saat



सात



8



eight



८ aath



आठ



9



nine



९ nau



नौ



10



ten



१० dash



दश



11



eleven



बह बार



तीन



११ eghaara



एघार



55



कित वष?



12



twelve



१२ baarha



बा॑



13



thirteen



१३ terha



ते॑



14 fourteen



१४ chaudha



चौध



15



१५ pandhra



प ी



16 sixteen



१६ sorah



सो॑



17



१७ satra



सऽ



18 eighteen



१८ athaarah



अठार



19 nineteen



१९ unaais



उ नाइस



20 twenty



२० bis



बीस



fifteen seventeen



21



twenty-one



२१ ekkaais



ए काइस



22



twenty-two



२२ baais



बाइस



23



twenty-three



२३ teis



तेइस



24



twenty-four



२४ chaubis



चौबीस



25



twenty-five



२५ pachchis



प चीस



26



twenty-six



२६ chhabbis



छ बीस



27



twenty-seven



२७ sattaais



स ाइस



28



twenty-eight



२८ athaais



अ ठाइस



29



twenty-nine



२९ unantis



उन तीस



30



thirty



३० tis



तीस



40



forty



४० chaalis



चालीस



50 fifty



५० pachaas



पचास



60



६० saathi



साठ



70 seventy



७० sattari



स र



80



eighty



८० asi



असी



90



ninety



९० nabbe



न बे



sixty



100 one hundred



१०० ek saya



एक सय



56



ANSWER KEY Exercise 7 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.



4 5 0 3 2



Exercise 10 1. My name is Sunita. I live in Pokhara. I am a waitress. I have a house. My house number is 21. 2. Ram is a soldier. He lives in an apartment building. His apartment number is 25. 3. Her name is Sushila. She is a teacher. She lives in a house. Her house number is 16. 4. Hari and Sita have a house in Biratnagar. Their house number is 14. Exercise 11 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I.



10 12 3 24 5 16 27 18 29



Exercise 16 Kabita is 52 years old.



Kabita baaunna barsha hunubhayo.



Sunita is 11 on Friday.



Sunita egaarah barsha bhayo.



Is Rita 30 years old? No, he is 29.



Rita tis barsha hunubhayo? hoina, wahaa unantis barsha hunubhayo.



Ram is 72 years old.



Ram bahattari barsha hunubhayo.



How old is Shekhar? He is 43.



Shekhar kati barsha hunubhayo? wahaa trichaalis barsha hunubhayo.



57



क बता बाउ न वष हनु ु भयो।



सुिनता एघार वष भयो। रता तीस हनु ु भयो?



होईन, वहाँ उन तीस वष हनु ु भयो।



राम बह र वष हनु ु भयो।



शेखर कित वष हनु ु भयो?



वहाँ ऽीचालीस वष हनु ु भयो।



End of Lesson Exercise 1 A. Hi, my name is Shyam. I am 26 years old. I am a police officer. Namaste! mero naam Shyam ho. Ma chhabbis barsha bhae. Ma prahari adhikrit hu. B. His name is Dinesh. He is 40. He is a soldier. Wahaako naam Dinesh ho. Wahaa chaalish barsha hunubhayo. Wahaa sipaahi hunuhunchha. C. Her name is Anita. She is 44. She is a teacher. Wahaako naam Anita ho. Wahaa chauwaalis barsha hunubhayo. Wahaa shikchhak hunuhunchha.



58



Lesson 4 Daily Activities



दै िनक िबयाकलाप dainik kriyaaklaap



This lesson will introduce you to: - How to ask for and tell time. - Typical daily activities in Nepal. - The verbs “to go,” “to study,” “to play,” “to work,” “to watch,” “to read,” “to eat,” and “to get up.” - The past tense of the verbs.



1. Listen as the speaker tells time in Nepali. Repeat after the speaker.



What time is it? It is four o’clock. Kati bajyo? Chaar bajyo. कित ब यो? चार ब यो।



What time is it? It is four fifteen. Kati bajyo? Sawaa chaar bajyo. कित ब यो? सवा चार ब यो।



What time is it? It is four thirty. Kati bajyo? Saadhe chaar bajyo. कित ब यो? साढे चार ब यो।



What time is it? It is four forty-five. Kati bajyo? Paune paach bajyo. कित ब यो? पौने पाँच ब यो।



59



What time is it? It is three twenty. Kati bajyo? Tin bis bajyo/ (Tin bis) bhayo/ Tin bjera bis minet gayo. कित ब यो? तीन बीस ब यो / भयो



What time is it? It is three forty. Kati bajyo? Tin chaalis bajyo/ (Tin chaalis) bhayo/ Tin bjera chaalis mineT gayo. कित ब यो? तीन चालीस ब यो / भयो/



तीन बजेर बीस िमनेट गयो



तीन बजेर चालीस िमनेट गयो।



2. What time is it? Fill in the clock faces with the correct times according to how they are listed in Nepali below. A.पन्ी तीस pandhrah tis B. िबहानको आठ पतालीस bihaanako pandhra tis C. छ दश chha dash D. िबहान नौ बजे bihaana nau baje A.



E. तेइस तीस teis tis F. ते॑ पचपन्न terah pachpanna G. बा॑ ब यो baahra bajyo H. चार पन्ी chaar pandhrah B.



E.



C.



F.



D.



G.



60



H.



3. Listen to the following exchanges and identify the clock time mentioned in each. Check your work with the Answer Key. A.



8:15



-



9:00



B.



9:50



-



9:15



C.



5:10



-



8:50



D.



4:13



-



4:30



E.



7: 50



-



7:10



4. Compose dialogues according to the model below. Work in pairs or in small groups. Use the times listed below. MODEL: A. - कित ब यो? kati bajyo? B. - िदउँ सोको दई ु ब यो। diusoko dui bajyo. 8:00 am, 7:15 am, 10:30 am, 2:10 pm, 4:45 pm, 6:50 pm, 12:00, 11:05 Study the chart below which introduces new verbs. I go



ma jaanchhu



म जान्छु



you go



tapaai jaanuhunchha



तपा



he goes



wahaa jaanuhunchha



वहाँ जानुहु न्छ



we go



haami jaanchhau



हामी जान्छ



you go



tapaai jaanuhunchha



तपा



they go



uniharu jaanchhan



उनीह



जानुहु न्छ



जानुहु न्छ जानछन ्



ma adhyayan म अ ययन गछर्ु garchhu you study tapaai adhyayan तपा अ ययन garnuhunchha गनुह र् ु न्छ he studies wahaa वहाँ अ ययन adhyayan गनुह र् ु न्छ garnuhunchha we study haami adhyayan हामी अ ययन garchhau गछ you study tapaai adhyayan तपा अ ययन garnuhunchha गनुह र् ु न्छ they study uniharu उनीह अ ययन adhyayan गनर्छन ् garchhan



I study



61



म काम गछर्ु



I watch



you work



ma kaam garchhu tapaai kaam garnuhunchha



तपा



you watch tapaai hernuhunchha



तपा



he works



wahaa kaam garnuhunchha



वहाँ काम



he watches



wahaa hernuhunchha



वहाँ हे नह ुर् ु न्छ



हामी काम गछ



we watch



haami herchhau



हामी हे छ



तपा



you watch tapaai hernuhunchha



तपा



they watch



uniharu herchhan



उनीह



I work



we work haami kaam garchhau you tapaai kaam work garnuhunchha



काम



गनुह र् ु न्छ



गनुह र् ु न्छ



काम



गनुह र् ु न्छ उनीह



काम



ma herchhu



म हे छु र् हे नह ुर् ु न्छ



हे नह ुर् ु न्छ हे नछ र् न ्



they work



uniharu kaam garchhan



I eat



ma khanchhu



म खान्छु



I read



ma paDhchhu



म पढ्छु



you eat



tapaai  khanuhunchha wahaa khanuhunchha haami khanchhau tapaai khanuhunchha uniharu khanchhan



तपा खानुहु न्छ



you read



तपा



वहाँ खानुहु न्छ



he reads



हामी खान्छ



we read



हामी पढ्छ



तपा



you read



tapaai paDhnuhunchha wahaa paDhnuhunchha haami paDhchhau tapaai paDhnuhunchha uniharu paDhchhan



ma khelchhu



म खेल्छु



I get up



ma uThchhu



म उठ्छु



तपा



you get up he gets up



tapaai uThnuhunchha wahaa uThnuhunchha tapaai uThnuhunchha uniharu uThchhan haami uThchhau



तपा



he eats we eat you eat they eat I play



you play tapaai khelnuhunchha he plays wahaa khelnuhunchha you play tapaai khelnuhunchha they uniharu play khelchhan we play haami khelchhau



गनर्छन ्



उनीह



खानुहु न्छ खानछन ्



खेल्नुहु न्छ



वहाँ खेल्नुहु न्छ तपा



खेल्नुहु न्छ



उनीह



खेलछन ्



हामी खेल्छ



they read



you get up they get up we get up



62



पढ्नुहु न्छ



वहां पढ्नुहु न्छ



तपाई पढ्नुहु न्छ उनीह



पढछन ्



उठ्नुहु न्छ



वँहा उठ्नुहु न्छ तपा



उठ्नुहु न्छ



उनीह



उठ्छन ्



हामी उठ्छ



5. Listen to the short statements that describe each activity in the pictures below. Repeat after the speaker. Pay attention to new verbs and other new vocabulary.



They play basketball. Wahaaharu baasketbal khelnuhunchha वहाँह बाःकेटबल खेल्नुहु न्छ।



She goes to the market. Wahaa bajaar jaanuhunchha वहाँ बजार जानुहु न्छ।



They study at school. Uniharu schoolmaa padhchhan उनीह ःकुलमा पढछन ्।



She works in the hospital. Wahaa aspataalmaa kaam garnuhunchha वहाँ अःपतालमा काम गनुह र् ु न्छ।



He plays soccer. Wahaa soccer khelnuhunchha वहाँ सकर खेल्नुहु न्छ।



The girl eats lunch. Keti diusoko khaanaa khaanchha केटी िदउँ सोको खाना खान्छ।



63



The man reads a book. Logne maanchhe kitaab paDhnuhunchha लोग्ने मान्छे िकताब पढ्नुहु न्छ।



The woman watches television. Swaasni maanchhe telivision hernuhunchha ःवाःनी मान्छे टे िलिभजन हे नह ुर् ु न्छ।



Grammar Note: Prepositions In Nepali one word, ‘maa’ is used for three prepositions: ‘at,’ ‘in,’ and ‘on.’ There is a separate word for the preposition ‘to’: ‘laai.’ 6. Listen to the following statements in Nepali and repeat after the speaker. Follow along in the workbook. Replay the audio if necessary. A. The boy goes to school at 7:30.



Ketaa saadhe saat baje school jaanchha.



केटा साढे सात बजे ःकुल



B. The man eats breakfast at seven o’clock.



िबहान सात बजे लोग्ने



C. The woman watches television in the evening.



Bihaana saat baje logne maanchhe naastaa khaanuhunchha. Belukaa swaasni maanchhe telivision hernuhunchha.



D. The girl studies at home in the afternoon. E. Sushila goes to the market in the morning.



Diuso keti gharmaa padhchha. Bihaana Sushila bajaar jaanuhunchha.



िदउँ सो केटी घरमा पढ्छ।



F. Ram plays soccer on Friday.



Shukrabaar Ram soccer khelnuhunccha.



शुबबार राम सकर



G. I get up at 7:00.



Maa saat baje uthchhu.



64



जान्छ।



मान्छे नाःता खानुहु न्छ।



बेलक ु ा ःवाःनी मान्छे टे िलिभजन हे नह ुर् ु न्छ।



िबहान सुशीला बजार जानुहु न्छ।



खेल्नुहु न्छ।



ु म सात बजे उठ्छ।



7. Match the following sentences with the pictures below. Check your answers with the Answer Key. ु 1. म साढे नौ बजे ःकुल जान्छ। Ma saadhe nau baje school jaanchhu. 2. िबहान सात बजे उनीह नाःता खानछन।् Bihaana saat baje uniharu naastaa khanchhan. 3. हामी िबहान पढ्छ । Haami bihaana padhchhau. 4. वहाँ बेलक ु ा िकताब पढ्नुहु न्छ। Wahaa belukaa kitaab padhnuhunchha.



A #______________



B #_______________



C #____________



D #_________________



65



8. Read the following text and, in Nepali, answer the questions below in complete sentences. If you have any difficulty you may go to the Answer Key to check the text or the questions in English. ँयाम िब ाथ हनु ु हु न्छ। वहाँ ःकुलमा पढ्नुहु न्छ। हरे किदन वहाँ सवा सात बजे उठ्नुहु न्छ। वहाँ साढे सात बजे नाःता खानुहु न्छ। वहाँ आठ बजे ःकुल जानुहु न्छ। वहाँ ःकुलपिछ बाःकेटबल खेल्नुहु न्छ। वहाँ बेलक ु ा िकताबह



र आईतबार पढ्नुहु न्न।



पढ्नुहु न्छ र टे िलिभजन हे नह ुर् ु न्छ। ँयाम शिनबार



Shyam bidyaarthi hunuhunchha. wahaa schoolmaa paDhnuhunchha. harekdin wahaa sawaa saat baje uThnuhunchha. wahaa saaDhe saat baje naastaa khaanuhunchha. wahaa aaTh baje school jaanuhunchha. wahaa schoolpachhi baasketbal khelnuhunchha. wahaa belukaa kitaabharu paDhnuhunchha ra television hernuhunchha. Shyam shanibaar ra aaitabaar paDhnuhunna. 1. ँयाम िशक्षक हनु ु हु न्छ? Shyam shikchhak hunuhunchha? 2. वहाँ कहाँ पढ्नुहु न्छ? Wahaa kahaa paDhnuhunchha? 3. वहाँ सवा सात बजे के गनुह र् ु न्छ? Wahaa sawaa saat baje ke garnuhunchha? 4. वहाँ कित बजे नाःता खानुहु न्छ? Wahaa kati baje naastaa khaanuhunchha? 5. वहाँ आठ बजे के गनुह र् ु न्छ? Wahaa aaTh baje ke garnuhunchha? 6. वहाँ कित बजे बाःकेटबल खेल्नुहु न्छ? Wahaa kati baje baaskeTbal khelnuhunchha? 7. वहाँ बेलक ु ा के गनुह र् ु न्छ? Wahaa belukaa ke garnuhunchha? 8. वहाँ शिनबार र आईतबार पढ्नुहु न्छ? Wahaa shanibaar ra aaitabaar paDhnuhunchha?



66



9. Rearrange the following statements into a logical order for a daily schedule. Check your work with the Answer Key. ु 1. म साथीह सँग िदउँ सोको खाना खान जान्छ। Ma saathiharusanga diusoko khaanaa khaana jaanchhu. 2. म टे िलिभजन हे छु र् । Ma telivision herchhu. ु 3. म ःकुल जान्छ। Ma school jaanchhu. ु 4. म साथीसंग बेलक ु ाको खाना खान्छ। Ma saathisanga belukaako khaanaa khaanchhu. ु 5. म बाःकेटबल खेल्छ। Ma basketbal khelchhu. ु 6. म नाःता खान्छ। Ma naastaa khaanchhu. ु 7. म घरमा पढ्छ। Ma gharmaa padhchhu. 10. Tell your partner about your daily schedule. Use the words and word combinations given below. हे रक िदन



उठ्नु



नाःता खानु



काममा जानु



karek din



uThnu



naastaa khaanu



kaammaa jaanu



बाःकेटबल खेल्नु baasketbal khelnu



बजार जानु bajaar jaanu



िकताब पढ्नु kitaab paDhnu



टे िलिभजन हे नुर् television hernu



67



िदउँ सोको खाना खानु diusoko khaana khaanu बेलक ु ा belukaa



11. Listen to the five short statements. Circle the English statement that is the equivalent to each Nepali statement you hear. Replay the audio as many times as you need. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. A. I play soccer after school. B. I play soccer after dinner. C. I play soccer after work. 2. A. She goes to the market in the evening. B. She goes to the market in the afternoon. C. She goes to the market in the morning. 3. A. I go to work in the morning. B. I go to school in the morning. C. I go to the market in the morning. 4. A. I study at home on Saturday. B. I play soccer at home on Saturday. C. I eat breakfast at home on Saturday. 5. A. He watches television in the afternoon. B. He watches television in the evening. C. He watches television in the morning. I went



ma gae



म गएँ



I studied



maile paDhe



मैले पढ



you went



tapaai janu bhayo



तपा



you studied



tapaaile paDhnubhayo



तपा ले पढनु



वहाँ जानुभयो



we went



wahaa jaanubhayo haami gayau



हामी गय



you went



timi gau



ितमी गयौ



they went



Unuharu gae



उनीह



I worked



maile kaam gare tapaaile kaam garnubhayo



मैले काम गर



he went



you worked



जानुभयो



he studied



wahaale paDhnubhayo we studied haamle paDhau you timile paDhau studied they unuharule studied paDhe



गए



I watched



तपा ले काम गनुर् you watched भयो



68



भयो वहाँले पढ्नुभयो हामीले पढ ितमीले पढौ उनीह ले पढे



maile here



मैले हे रँ



tapaaile hernubhayo



तपा ले हे नभ ुर् यो



he watched



wahaale kaam garnubhayo



वहाँले काम



we watched you watched



haamile heryau timilr heryau



हामीले हे य ितमीले हे य



they watched



uniharule here



उनीह ले हे रे



मैले खाएँ



I read



maile paDhe



मेले पढ



तपा ले खानुभयो



you read



tapaaile paDhnubhayu



तपा ले पढनु



wahaale kaam garnubhayo



वहाँले काम गनुर्



we worked you worked



haamile kaam garyau timile kaam garyau



हामीले काम गय



they worked



unuharule kaam gare



उनीह ले काम



I ate



maile khaae



you ate



tapaai khaanubhayo



he worked



he ate we ate you ate they ate I played you played he played we played you played they played



भयो ितमीले काम गय गरे



wahaale वहाँले खानुभयो khaanubhayo haamile हामीले खाय khaayau timile khaayau ितमीले खायौ unuiharule उनीह ले खाए khaae maile khele मैले खेल tapaaile तपा ले खेल्नु khelnubhayo भयो wahaale वहाँले खेल्नु भयो khelnubhayo haamile हामीले खेल khelyau timile khelyau ितमीले खेलौ uniharule khele



उनीह ले खेले



गनुर् भयो



भयो



wahaale वहाँले पढनुभयो paDhunubhayo we read haamile हामीले पढ paDhyau you read timile pDhyau ितमीले पढौ they read uniharule उनीह ले पढे paDhe I got up maile paDhe मैले पढ you got up tapaai तपा उठ्नु uThnubhayo भयो he got up wahaa वहाँ उठ्नुभयो uThnubhayo we got up haami uThyau हामी उठ he read



you got up timi uThyau



ितमी उठौ



they got up



उनीह



uniharu uThe



Grammar Note: The simple past tense in Nepali uses the suffix “le” for transitive verbs. For example: “khaanu” - “to eat” “maile khaae - “I ate” But: “jaanu” - “to go” “ma gae” - “I went”



69



उठे



Intransitive verbs list To go



jaanu



जानु



To come



aaunu



आउनु



To sleep



sutnu



सु नु



To walk



hidnu



िहं नु



To return



pharkanu



फकर्नु



To wait



parkhanu



पखर्नु



To laugh



haasnu



हाँःनु



To wake up



uthnu



उठ्नु



To live/ sit



basnu



बःनु



To cry



runu



नु



Transitive verbs list To eat



khaanu



खानु



To read



padhnu



पढ्नु



To work



kaam garnu



काम गनुर्



To do



garnu



गनुर्



To write



lekhnu



ले नु



12. Read the following sentences and translate them into English. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. िहजो म ःकुल गएँ। Hijo ma school gae. 2. गएको वषर् मैले र साथीह ले बाःकेटबल खेल । Gaeko barsha maile ra mero saathiharule baaskeTbal khelyau. 3. गएको ह ा उनीह िकनमेल गनर् गए। Gaeko haptaa uniharu kinmel garna gae. 4. िहजो म नौ बजे घरमा िथएँ। Hijo ma nau baje grmaa thie 5. िहजो हामीले छ बजे बेलक ु ाको खाना खाय । Hijo haamile chha baje belukaako khaanaa khaayau 6. गएको वषर् केटाले संगीत र िहसाब पढ्यो। Gaeko barsha keTaale sangit ra hisaab padhyo.



70



7. िहजो केटीले टे िलिभजन हे य । Hijo ketile television heryo. 8. गएको आइतबार मैले िकताब पढे । Gaeko aaitabaar maile kitaab paDhe. 9. एक वषर् अगाडी म नेपालमा िथएँ। Ek barsha agadi ma Nepalmaa thie. 10. दई ु वषर् अिघ हाॆो घर काठमान्डू मा िथयो। Dui barsha aghi haamro ghar Kathmandumaa thiyo. Grammar note: Prepositions that indicate ‘when’ yesterday – िहजो - hijo last year /week /Sunday – गएको बषर्,हा ा, आईतबार – gaeko barsha,haptaa, aaitabaar a year ago – एक बषर् अिघ – ek barsha aghi 13. Complete the following sentences using the verbs located in the box below. Check your answers with the Answer Key. अ ययन



खेल



गर adhyayan khele gare



िथएँ



हे र



उठ



गएँ



काम गर



खाएँ



thie



here



uthe



gae



kaam gare



khaae



1 .िहजो सात बज े _______________। Hijo ma saat baje ______________. 2. मैले मेरो आमाबासँग नाःता ____________। Maile mero aamaabaasanga naastaa ________. 3. गएको आइतबार िकनमेल _____________। Gaeko aaitabaar kinmel ________________. 4. गएको सोमबार बाःकेटबल ________________। Gaeko sombaar maile baasketbal _____________. 5. िहजो मैले टे िलिभजन _________________। Hijo maile Telivison _______________. 6. गएको वषर् मैले होटे लमा ______________। Gaeko barsha maile hotelmaa ____________. 7. तीन वषर् अिघ मैले ःकुलमा ____________________। Tin barsha aghi maile schoolmaa __________________. 8. गएको ह ा म नगरकोटमा ______________। Gaeko haptaa ma Nagarkotmaa ___________.



71



14. Listen to the following dialogue and repeat after the speaker. Make up similar dialogues using the words and word combinations given below. Work in pairs or in small groups. A. िहजो तपाईले के गनुभ र् यो? Hijo tapaaile ke garnubhayo? B. िहजो मैले टे िलिभजन हे र। Hijo maile television here. A. िहजो तपाईले कित घण्टा टे िलिभजन हे नभ र् यो। Hijo tapaaile kati ghantaa telivision hernubhayo? B. एक घण्टा। Ek ghantaa. 15. Make up similar dialogues using more words and word combinations given below. Work in pairs or in small groups. 1. िहजो hijo 2. िहजो hijo 3. गएको वषर् gayako barsha 4. गएको वषर् gaeko barsha 5. गएको आईतबार gayako aaitabaar 6. एक वषर् अिघ ek barsha aghi 7. एक वषर् अिघ ek barsha aghi



टे िलिभजन हे नुर् telivision hernu िकनमेल गनुर् garnu होटे लमा काम गनुर् hotelmaa kaam garnu ःकुलमा पढ्नु Schoolmaa padhnu िकताब पढ्नु kitaab padhnu बाःकेटबल खेल्नु baasketbal khelnu हनु ु hunu



एक घण्टा ek ghantaa दई ु घण्टा dui ghanTaa चार ह ा chaar ghantaa आठ ह ा aath haptaa एक घण्टा ek ghantaa छ ह ा chha haptaa दई ु ह ा dui haptaa



72



End-of-Lesson Tasks 1. Listen to the following statements read in Nepali. Circle the times you hear. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.



6:30 - 5:30 6:00 7:00 9:30 8:30 5:30 5:45 in the morning - in the evening



2. Read the following text in Nepali. Put T (True) or F (False) next to the statements that are written below the text. Check your work with the Answer Key. ु रो सानो घर छ ।म यो ःकुलको िशक्षक हँु ।म नमःते! मेरो नाम िशव हो।म भ पुरमा बःछ।मे



ु हे रक िदन म छ (६) बजे उठ्छ।म ु ु िहसाब र संगीत िसकाउँ छ। नाःता खाएर ःकुल जान्छ।म



ु गलबार र िबहीबार म दई ु ःकुल पिछ म िकनमेल ःकुलमा आठ बजे पुग्छ।मं ु घण्टा सकर खेल्छ। ु ु बेलक गनर् जान्छ।म पाँच बजे घरमा पुग्छ। ु ा म एकघण्टा टे िलिभजन हे छु र् र दई ु घण्टा िकताब



ु पढ्छ। Namste! Mero nam Shiva ho. Ma Bhaktapurmaa baschhu. Mero saano ghar chha.ma yo schoolko shikchhak hu. Harek din ma chha baje uthchhu. Ma naastaa khaaera school jaanchhu. ma schoolmaa aath baje pugchhu. mangalbaar ra bihibaar ma dui ghanyaa soccer khelchhu. Schoolpachhi ma kinmel garna jaanchhu. Ma paach baje ghar pugchhu. Belukaa ma ekghantaa television herchhu ra dui ghantaa kitaab padhchhu. 1. _______Shiva lives in Bhaktapur. 2. _______ He lives in small house. 3. _______ He is a student. 4. _______ He studies math and music. 5. _______ Everyday he gets up at 6:00 a.m. 6. _______ He does not have breakfast. 7. _______He is at school at 8:00. 8. _______Shiva plays soccer on Saturday and Monday for 3 hours. 9. _______He goes shopping after school. 10. ______ In the evening he works for 2 hours. 3. Describe your daily schedule of activities, including the times, in Nepali. For example, start with what time you get up, then eat breakfast, etc. “I get up at 6:00 and eat breakfast at 6:30. I go to school at …..” 73



4. Find out what your partner did yesterday at 7:00 am, 7:30 am, 10:00 am, 1:00 pm, 4:00 pm, and 8:00 pm, and how long each activity lasted. Work in pairs or in small groups.



74



Vocabulary List After



Pachhi



पिछ



In the morning



Bihaana



िबहान



In the afternoon



Diuso



िदउँ सो



In the evening



Belukaa



बेलक ु ा



Everyday



Harek din



हरे क िदन



Last week



Gaeko haptaa



गएको ह ा



A year ago



Ek barsha aghi



एक वषर् अिघ



Last Sunday (Monday, Tuesday, etc.) At school



Gaeko aaitabaar( गएको आइतबार (सोमबार, sombaar,mangalbaar,budhbaar,bihibaar, मंगलबार, बुधबार, िवहीबार, Shukrabaar,shanibaar) शुबबार, शिनबार) Schoolmaa ःकुलमा



Math



Hisaab



िहसाब



Music



Sangit



संगीत



Book



Kitaab



िकताब



Breakfast



Naastaa



नाःता



Lunch



Diuko khaanaa



िदउँ सोको खाना



Dinner



Belukaako khaanaa



बेलक ु ाको खाना



Home



Ghar



घर



At home



Gharmaa



घरमा



Market



Bajaar



बजार आइतबार



On Sunday Aaitabaar (Monday, Tuesday…) To go (to) Jaanu



जानु



To go shopping



Kinmel garnu



िकनमेल गनुर्



To play soccer/basketball To watch television



Khelnu



खेल्नु



Hernu



हे नुर्



To eat breakfast (lunch, dinner) To get up/wake up



Khaanu



खानु



Uthnu



उठ्नु



To read



Padhnu



पढ्नु



To study



Adhyayan garnu



अ ययन गनुर्



75



To work



Kaam garnu



काम गनुर्



What time is it?



Kati bjyo?



कित ब यो?



It is three o’clock.



Tin bajyo?



तीन ब यो



When



Kahile



किहले



Man



Logne maanchhe



लोग्ने मान्छे



Woman



Swaasni maanchhe



ःवाःनी मान्छे



Boy



Ketaa



केटा



Girl



Keti



केटी



76



ANSWER KEY Exercise 2 A. three thirty pm B. eight forty-five am C. ten after six D. zero nine hundred



E. eleven thirty pm F. thirteen fifty-five G. twelve o’clock H. four fifteen



Exercise 3



A.



B.



C.



D.



E.



कित ब यो? सवा आठ ब यो। kati bajyo? sawaa aaTh bajyo. 8:15 am कित ब यो? नौ पचास ब यो / भयो। kati bajyo? nau pachaas bajyo/ bhayo. 9:50 कित ब यो? पाचँ दश ब यो / भयो। kati bajyo? paach dash bajyo/ bhayo. 5:10 कित ब यो? साढे चार ब यो। kati bajyo? saaDhe chaar bajyo. 4:30 pm कित ब यो? सात दश ब यो / भयो। kati bajyo? saat dash bajyo/ bhayo. 7:10



Exercise 7 A 3. B 1. C. 2. D 4.



We study in the morning. I go to school at 9:30. They eat breakfast at 7:00. She reads a book in the evening.



Exercise 8 Shiva is a student. He studies at school. Everyday he gets up at 7:15. He has breakfast at 7:30. He goes to school at 8:00. After school he plays basketball. He reads books and watches TV in the evening. Shiva does not study on Saturday and Sunday. िशव िब ाथ हो। ऊ ःकुलमा पढ्छ। हरे क िदन ऊ सवा सात बजे उठ्छ।साढे सात बजे ऊ नाःता खान्छ।आठ बजे ऊ ःकुल जान्छ।ःकुल पिछ ऊ बाःकेटबल खेल्छ। बेलुका ऊ िकताब पढ्छ र टे िलिभजन हे छर्।िशव शिनबार र आईतबार पढ्दै न। 77



िशव िशक्षक हो? होईन, िशव िब ाथ हो। Shive shikchhak ho? Hoina, Shiva bidyaarthi ho. ऊ कहाँ पढ्छ? ऊ ःकुलमा पढ्छ। U kahaa paDhchha? U schoolmaa paDhchha. सवा सात बजे ऊ के गछर् ? ऊ सवा सात



1. Is Shiva a teacher? No, Shiva is a student.



2. Where does he study? He studies at school. 3. What does he do at 7:15? He gets up at 7:15.



बजे उठ्छ । Sawaa saat baje u ke garchha? U sawaa saat baje uThchha. ऊ कित बजे नाःता खान्छ? ऊ साढे सात



4. When does he have breakfast? He has breakfast at 7:30.



बजे नाःता खान्छ। U kati baje naastaa khaanchha? Usaadhe saat baje naastaa khaanchha. आठ बजे ऊ के गछर् ? ऊ आठ बजे ःकुल



5. What does he do at 7:30? He has breakfast at 7:30.



जान्छ। Aath baje u ke garchha? U aath baje school jaanchha. ऊ कित बजे बाःकेटबल खेल्छ? ःकुल पिछ



6. When does he play basketball? He plays basketball after school.



ऊ बाःकेटबल खेल्छ। U kati baje baaskeTball khelchha? School pachhi u baaskeTbal khelchha. बेलक ु ा ऊ के गछर् ? बेलुका ऊ िकताब पढ्छ



7. What does he do in the evening? He reads books and watches TV in the evening.



र टे िलिभजन हे छर्। Belukaa u ke garchha? Belukaa u kitaab padhchha ra telivision herchha. शिनबार र आईतबार ऊ पढ्छ? होईन, िशव



8. Does he study on Saturday and Sunday? No, Shiva does not study on Saturday and Sunday.



शिनबार र आईतबार पढ्दै न। Shanibaar ra aaitabaar u padhchha? Hoina, Shiva shanibaar ra aaitabaar paDhdaina.



78



Exercise 9 Your answers may vary. However, did you understand the statements? 6. I eat breakfast. ु म नाःता खान्छ। ma naastaa khaanchhu. 3. I go to school. ु म ःकुल जान्छ। ma school jaanchhu. 1. I go to lunch with my friends. ु म साथीसंग िदउँ सोको खाना जान्छ। ma saathisanga khaanaa khaanchhu. 5. I play basketball. ु म बाःकेटबल खेल्छ। ma basketball khelchhu. 4. I eat dinner with my friend. ु म साथीसंग बेलक ु ाको खाना खान्छ। ma saathisanga belukaako khaanaa khaanchhu. 7. I study at home. म घरमा अ ययन गछर्ु । ma gharmaa addyayan garchhu. 2. I watch television. म टे िलिभजन हे छु र् । ma Telivision herchhu. Exercise 11 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.



B C A B A



I play soccer after dinner. She goes to the market in the morning. I go to work in the morning. I play soccer at home on Saturday. He watches television in the afternoon.



Exercise 12 1. Yesterday I went to school. 2. Last year my friends and I played basketball. 3. They went shopping last week. 4. I was at home at 9:00 yesterday. 5. We ate dinner at 6:00 yesterday. 6. The boy studied music and math at school last year. 7. The girl watched television yesterday.



79



8. Last Sunday I read a book. 9. I was in Paris a year ago. 10. We had a house in Kathmandu two years ago. Exercise 13 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.



got up ate went played watched was studied went



uthne khaae gae khele here thie padhe gae



I got up at 7:00 yesterday. I ate breakfast with my parents. I went shopping last Sunday. I played basketball last Monday. I watched television yesterday. I was at the hotel last year. I studied at school three years ago. I went to Pokhara last week.



End of Lesson Exercise 1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.



6:30 7:00 9:30 5:45 in the morning



Exercise 2 1. T 2. T 3. F 4. F 5. T 6. F 7. T 8. F 9. T 10. F



The man lives in Bhaktapur. He lives in small house. He is a student. He studies math and music. Everyday he gets up at 6:00 a.m. He does not have breakfast. He is at school at 8:00. Shiva plays soccer on Saturday and Monday for 3 hours. He goes shopping after school. In the evening he works for 2 hours.



Hello. My name is Shiva. I live in Bhaktapur. I have a small house. I am a teacher at this school. I teach math and music. Everyday I get up at 6:00 a.m. I eat breakfast and go to school. I am at school at 8:00 a.m. On Tuesday and Thursday I play soccer for 2 hours. After school, I go shopping. I am home at 5:00. In the evening I watch TV for an hour and read books for 2 hours.



80



Lesson 5 Meeting the Family पिरवार भेटने pariwaar bheTne



This lesson will introduce you to: - The kinship terms used for immediate and extended family. - How to ask and answer simple questions about family members. - The pronouns “who,” “this,” “that,” “these,” and “those.” The majority of the Nepalese population (almost 81%) are Hindus. Buddhists comprise another 11%, Muslims 4%, and Kirat the remaining 4%. The people are traditionally religious minded and prefer to live in joint families in rural areas. The urban population is a mix of extended and nuclear families. The role of the family is very significant in Nepal. All family affairs are managed and directed by the head of the family, usually a male. Nepalese families are traditionally patriarchal. The ancestral and family properties are bequeathed to the elder male member of the family or are divided among the sons, but not sisters daughters. However, if a daughter remains unmarried until after she reaches 35 years of age, she becomes eligible to receive a share of the family property. Most marriages are arranged and decided by the parents, but things have changed recently and young people have begun to make their own decisions. After the wedding, the wife will carry the surname, or family name of her husband and it is passed on from generation to generation. The typical family will consist of five to seven members and usually two generations will live together. This does vary from rural to urban areas. In rural areas, even today, one might find three generations sharing and living together, while in urban areas it might be just two generations living together. Young adults may prefer to live independently as a single family. The typical Nepalese family will have two to three children though younger generations prefer to have only two children. According to traditional religious beliefs in Nepalese society, parents prefer to have at least one male child. This stems in part from the belief that after the death of the parent (father or mother) the eldest son of the family must perform their last rites. This duty cannot be performed by a daughter. Even families that live separately have moral bindings and obligations toward their parents; to look after them during their old age. The society gives these traditional values the highest priority.



81



1. Look at these photos of families. Listen to the kinship terms and repeat after the speaker.



Family



pariwaar



पिरवार



Parents



aamaabaa



आमाबा



Mother



aamaa



आमा



Father



baa



बा



Children



chhoraachhori



छोराछोरी



Daughter



chhori



छोरी



Son



chhoraa



छोरा



Grandparents



hajurbaahajuraamaa



हजुरबाहजुरआमा



Grandfather



hajurbaa



हजुरबा



Grandmother



hajuraamaa



हजुरआमा



Elder/older sister



didi



िददी



Younger sister



bahini



बिहनी



Elder /older brother



daai



दाइ



Younger brother



bhaai



भाइ 82



Grammar Note: Pronouns ko



को



who



yo



यो



this



tyo



यो



that



yi



यी



these



ti



ती



those



2. Listen to the following dialogues and repeat them after the speaker. Role-play the dialogues using the pictures above. 1. A. Who is this? B. This is my mother. 2. A. Who is that? B. That is my sister. 3. A. Who are they? B. They are my parents. 4. A. Who are they? B. They are my grandparents.



wahaa ko hunuhunchha?



वहाँ को हनु ु हु न्छ?



wahaa mero aamaa hunuhunchha.



वहाँ मेरो आमा हनु ु हु न्छ।



u ko ho?



ऊ को हो?



u mero bahini ho.



ऊ मेरो बिहनी हो।



wahaaharu ko hunuhunchha?



वहाँहरु को हनु ु हु न्छ?



wahaaharu mero aamaabaa hunuhunchha. wahaaharu ko hunuhunchha? wahaaharu mero hajurbaa hajuraamaa hunuhunchha.



वहाँहरु मेरो आमाबा हनु ु हु न्छ। वहाँहरु को हनु ु हु न्छ?



वहाँहरु मेरो हजुरबा हजुरआमा हनु ु हु न्छ।



3. Translate the following sentences into English. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. मेरो आमा र बाको एकजना छोरा र दई ु जना छोरीहरु छन।् mero aamaa ra baako ekjanaa chhoraa ra duijanaa chhoriharu chhan. ु 2. म मेरो हजुरबा र हजुरआमासँग ठू लो घरमा बःछ। ma mero hajurbaa ra hajuraamaasanga Thulo gharmaa baschhu.



83



3. वहाँको आमाबा पोखरामा बःनुहु न्छ। वहाँहरु मजदरहरु हनु ु ु हु न्छ। wahaako aamaabaa Pokharamaa basnuhunchha. wahaaharu majdurharu hunuhunchha. 4. मेरो दईजना दाइ हनु ु ु हु न्छ। वहाँहरु िसपाही हनु ु हु न्छ। वहाँहरु सैिनक िश वरमा बःनुहु न्छ। mero duijanaa daai hunuhunchha. wahaaharu sipaahi hunuhunchha. wahaaharu sainik shiwirmaa basnuhunchha. 5. वहाँको िददी हनु ु हु न्छ। वहाँको नाम सीता हो। wahaako didi hunuhunchha. wahaako naam Sita ho. 6. मेरो दाइ तीस वषको हनु ु हु न्छ। वहाँको एकजना छोरा र एकजना छोरी छन ्। mero daai tis barshako hunuhunchha. wahaako ekjanaa chhoraa ra ekjanaa chhori chhan.



4. Talk about your mother/father/sister/brother/grandfather/grandmother according to the model below: 1. name 2. age 3. occupation 4. where they live (city and type of residence)



MODEL: वहाँ मेरो बा हनु ु हु न्छ। वहाँको नाम िशव हो। वहाँ ४८ वष हनु ु भयो। वहाँ िश क हनु ु हु न्छ। वहाँ काठमान्डू मा बःनुहु न्छ। वहाँको सानो घर छ।



wahaa mero baa hunuhunchha. wahaako naam Shiva ho. wahaa ४८ barsha hunubhayo. wahaa shikchhak hunuhunchha. wahaa Kathmandumaa basnuhunchha. wahaako saano ghar chha. 5. Create questions in Nepali to the following answers. Check your work with the Answer Key for some suggested questions. 1. _____________________________? हो, वहाँ मेरो दाइ हनु ु हु न्छ। ho, wahaa mero daai hunuhunchha.



84



2. _____________________________? वहाँको नाम राम हो। wahaako naam Ram ho. 3.______________________________? वहाँ पाटनमा बःनुहु न्छ। wahaa Patanmaa basnuhunchha. 4.______________________________? वहाँ डा टर हनु ु हु न्छ। wahaa doctor hunuhunchha. 5. ______________________________? वहाँ सोमबार काममा जानुहु न्छ। wahaa sombaar kaammaa jaanuhunchha. 6. ______________________________? होइन, वहाँ मंगलबार बेसबल खे नुहु न्छ। hoina, wahaa mangalbaar baseball khelnuhunchha.



6. Listen to the audio and circle the word you hear. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. mother



-



father



2. daughter



-



son



3. family



-



parents



4. children



-



grandparents



5. sister



-



brother



6. grandmother -



grandfather



7. Listen and repeat after the speaker. Follow along in the workbook. ौीमान ्



Husband



shrimaan



Wife



shrimati



Married



bibaahit



ववािहत



Unmarried/Single



abibaahit



अ ववािहत



ौीमती



85



8. Finish the sentences by filling in the blanks with the words in the boxes located above the sentences. Check your answers with the Answer Key. 1. छोरा chhoraa



पाचँ वषको paach barshako



मेरो दाइ वहाँ



तीस वषको tis barshako



हनु ु हु न्छ। वहाँको ौीमती



हनु ु हु न्छ।



Radha ho. wahaa



वहाँको wahaako



हनु ु हु न्छ।



डा टर doctor



नाम राधा हो।



hunuhunchha.



Naam



hunuhunchha.



वहाँहरुको



छ। ऊ



Wahaaharuko



bibaahit



ववािहत bibaahit



hunuhunchha. wahaako shrimati



Mero daai



2. ववािहत



वहाँको / उःको wahaako / usko



छ।



chha. u



नाम र व हो। chha.



naam Ravi ho.



उःको



आठ



छोरीहरु



उःको



बिहनी



दश वषको



िसपाही



उनीहरुको



usko



वषको aaTh barshako



chhoriharu usko



bahini



dash barshako



sipaahi



uniharuko



हिरको



छ।



नाम गीता हो। ऊ



Hariko



chha.



naam Gita ho. U



उसको ौीमान ् Usko shrimaan



हो। ho.



छ। chha.



नाम राजन हो। उनीहरुको दईजना ु



छन।्



naam Rajan ho. Uniharuko duijanaa



ू नामहरु सीता र रीता हो। सीता ठलो हो र Naamharu Sita ra Rita ho. Sita Thulo ho ra



छ। रीता chha. Rita



86



chhan . छ। chha.



9. Listen to several short dialogues as people answer questions about their family members. Listen as many times as necessary, then write down what you year and translate it into English. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. Question Answer 2. Question Answer 3. Question Answer 4. Question Answer 5. Question Answer 6. Question Answer 7. Question Answer 8. Question Answer 9. Question Answer



10. Read and translate the text. Put T (True) or F (False) next to the statements below. Check your answers with the Answer Key. राजेशको हजुरबा र हजुरआमा हनु ु हु न्छ। वहाँहरु रमेश र वहाँको पिरवारसँग बःनुहु न्छ। राजेशको दाइभाइहरु छै नन।् वहाँको दइजना िददीहरु हनु ु ु हु न्छ। वहाँहरु व ाथ हरु हनु ु हु न्छ। राजेश ववािहत हनु ु हु न्छ। वहाँको ौीमती डा टर हनु ु हु न्छ। रमेश र वहाँको ौीमतीको एकजना छोरी र एकजना छोरा छन।्



Rajeshko hajurbaa ra hajuraamaa hunuhunchha. wahaaharu Ramesh ra wahaako pariwaarsanga basnuhunchha. Rajeshko daaibhaaiharu chhainan. wahaako duijanaa didiharu hunuhunchha. wahaaharu bidyarthiharu hunuhunchha. Rajesh bibaahit hunuhunchha. wahaako shrimati doctor hunuhunchha. Ramesh ra wahaako shrimatiko ekjanaa chhori ra ekjanaa chhoraa chhan.



87



1. ________Rajesh has parents. 2. _______ He is married. 3. ________He has two sisters. 4. ________Rajesh and his wife are students. 5. ________He is a doctor. 6. ________Rajesh has two children.



88



End-of-Lesson Tasks 1. Give a brief description in Nepali of your immediate family. Include the age, name, and profession of each person, and tell whether each person is married or single, and where he/she lives. If you want to, use real pictures of your family members. 2. Ask your classmate, in Nepali, about his/her mother/father/sister/brother/etc. What are their names, how old are they, where do they live, and what are their professions? 3. Work in small groups. Describe the pictures below. Use new vocabulary.



89



Vocabulary List Parents



Aamaabaa



आमाबा



Father



Baa



बा



Mother



Aamaa



आमा



Children



Chhoraachhori



छोराछोरी



Son



Chhori



छोरा



Daughter



Chhori



छोरी



Elder brother



Daai



दाइ



Younger brother



Bhaai



भाइ



Elder sister



Didi



िददी



Younger sister



Bahini



बिहनी



Grandparents



Hajurbaahajuraamaa



हजुरबाहजुरआमा



Grandmother



Hajuraamaa



हजुरआमा



Grandfather



Hajurbaa



हजुरबा



Husband



Shrimaan



Wife



Shrimati



Married



Bibaahit



ववािहत



Unmarried/single



Abibaahit



अ ववािहत



Who is this/that?



Wahaa ko hunuhunchha?



Who are these/those?



Wahaaharu ko hunuhunchha?



वहाँ को हनु ु हु न्छ?



This/that is…



Yo / tyo ho ……..



यो / यो हो



These/those are…



Yi / ti



यी / ती



ौीमान ् ौीमती



90



वहाँहरु को हनु ु हु न्छ?



ANSWER KEY Exercise 3 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.



My mother and father have one son and two daughters. I live with my grandparents in a big house. His parents live in Pokhara. They are laborers. I have two brothers. They are soldiers. They live in a military camp. She has a sister. Her name is Sita. My brother is 30 years old. He has a son and a daughter.



Exercise 5 These are some possible questions. Yours may vary slightly. 1. वहाँ तपाईको दाइ हनु ु हु न्छ?



wahaa tapaaiko daai hunuhunchha?



Is this your brother?



2. वहाँको नाम के हो?



wahaako naam ke ho?



What is his name?



3. वहाँ कहाँ बःनुहु न्छ?



wahaa kahaa basnuhunchha?



Where does he live?



wahaa ke kaam garnuhunchha?



What is his occupation?



5. वहाँ किहले काममा जानुहु न्छ?



wahaa kahile kaammaa jaanuhunchha?



When does he go to work?



wahaa mangalbaar kaam garnuhunchha?



Does he work on Tuesday?



4. वहाँ के काम गनुहन्छ ु ?



6. वहाँ मंगलबार काम गनुहन्छ ु ? Exercise 6 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.



Father Daughter Family Grandparents Sister Grandfather



Exercise 8 1. My brother is married. His wife is 30 years old. Her name is Radha. She is a doctor. मेरो दाइ ववािहत हनु ु हु न्छ।वहाँको ौीमती तीस वषको हनु ु हु न्छ।वहाँको नाम राधा हो।वहाँ डा टर



हनु ु हु न्छ। Mero daai bibaahit hunuhunchaa. Wahaako shrimati tis barshako hunuhunchha. Wahaako naam Radha ho. wahaa doctor hunuhunchha. They have a son. He is 5 years old. His name is Ravi. Wahaaharuko ekjanaa chhoraa chha. U paach barshako chha. Usko naam Ravi ho. वहाँहरुको एकजना छोरा छ। ऊ पाचँ वषको छ। उसको नाम र व हो।



91



2. Hari has a sister. Her name is Gita. She is married. हरीको बिहनी छ। उसको नाम गीता हो। ऊ ववािहता छ। Hariko bahini chha. Usko naam Gita ho. U bibaahit chha. Her husband is a soldier. His name is Rajan. They have two daughters. उसको ौीमान ् िसपाही हो। उसको नाम राजन हो।उनीहरुको दईजना छोरीहरु छन ्। ु Usko shrimaan siphai ho. Usko naam Rajan ho. Uniharuko duijanaa chhoriharu chhan. Their names are Sita and Rita. Sita is older and is 10 years old. Rita is 8 years old. ू उनीहरुको नामहरु सीता र रीता हो। सीता ठलो हो र दश वषको छ। रीता आठ वषको छ। Uniharuko naamharu Sita ra Rita ho. Sita Thulo ho ra dash barshako chha. Rita aaTh barshako chha. Exercise 9 1. Who is she? She is my sister. वहाँ को हनु ु हु न्छ? ऊ मेरो बिहनी हो। wahaa ko hunuhunchha? u mero bahini ho. 2. Is she married? No, she is single. वहाँको वहा भयो? होईन, ऊःको वहा भएको छै न। wahaako bihaa bhayo? hoina, usko bihaa bhaeko chhaina. 3. Who is he? He is my husband. वहाँ को हनु ु हु न्छ? वहाँ मेरो ौीमान ् हनु ु हु न्छ। wahaa ko hunuhunchha? wahaa mero shrimaan hunuhunchha. 4. Is he married? Yes, he is वहाँको वहा भयो? हो, वहाँको वहा भयो। wahaako bihaa bhayo? ho, wahaako bihaa bhayo. 5. Who are they? They are my children. उनीहरू को हन ु ्? उनीहरू मेरो छोराछोरी हन। ु ् uniharu ko hun? uniharu mero chhoraachhori hun. 6. Where do they live? They live in the apartment. उनीहरू कहाँ बःछन ्? उनीहरू डे रामा बःछन।् uniharu kahaa baschhan? uniharu Deraamaa baschhan. 7. Do you have any brothers? Yes, I have two brothers. तपाईंको दाइभाइ हनु भाइहरु छन।् ु ु हु न्छ? हो, मेरो दईजना tapaaiko daaibhaai hunuhunchha? ho, mero duijanaa bhaaiharu chhan. 8. Who is that? That is my wife. वहाँ को हनहन्छ ु ु ? ऊ मेरो ौीमती हो। wahaa ko hunuhunchha? u mero shrimati ho. 9. Does she have any children? Yes, she has two sons. वहाँको छोराछोरी छ? हो, वहाँको दईजना छोराहरु छन।् ु wahaako chhoraachhori chha? ho, wahaako duijanaa chhoraaharu chhan.



92



Exercise 10 1. F 2. T 3. T 4. F 5. F 6. T



Rajesh has parents. He is married. He has two sisters Rajesk and his wife are students. Rajesh is a doctor. Rajesh has two children.



Rajesh has a grandfather and a grandmother. They live with Rajesh and his family. Rajesh has no brothers. He has two sisters. They are students. Rajesh is married. His wife is a doctor. Rajesh and his wife have a daughter and a son.



93



Lesson 6 Around Town



शहर चारै ितर shahar chaaraitira



This lesson will introduce you to: - Cardinal directions. - Names of urban buildings and landmarks. - How to ask and answer questions about the locations of places and buildings.



1. Listen to and repeat the cardinal directions. North Northwest uttarpashchim



उ र-



Northeast



uttarpurba



उ र- पूवर्



East



purba



पूवर्



Southeast



dakchhin - purba



दि ण-



पिँचम



pashchim



पिँचम



Southwest dakchhinpashchim



दि ण-



West



उ र



uttar



पिँचम South



dakchhin



94



दि ण



पूवर्



2. Listen to the following sentences and repeat after the speaker. Follow along in your workbook. Mount Everest is north of Kathmandu.



Sagarmaathaa Kathmanduko uttermaa parchha.



Pokhara is west of Kathmandu.



Pokhara Kathmanduko pashchimmaa parchha.



Bhaktapur is east of Kathmandu.



Bhaktapur Kathmadnuko purbamaa parchha.



सगरमाथा काठमान्डू को उ रमा पछर् । पोखरा काठमान्डू को पिँचममा पछर् । भ पुर काठमान्डू को पूवम र् ा पछर् ।



3. Work with a partner. Tell each other where certain cities or locations are in relation to other cities or locations. Compose sentences according to the exercise above and the model below. MODEL: Los Angeles is south of San Francisco. लस एन्जलस सन ृानसीःकोको दि णमा पछर् । Los Angeles San Franciscoko dakshinmaa parchha. The apartment building is east of the military camp. डे रा भवन सैिनक िश वरको पूवम र् ा पछर् । Deraa bhawan sainik shibirko purbamaa parchha.



4. Topographical features, urban buildings and landmarks are useful reference points when getting to know a new area or for giving and receiving directions. Listen to a list of common sites and features. Repeat after the speaker while you follow along in the workbook. वमानःथल



Airport



bimaansthal



Bank



bank



बक



Building



bhaban



भवन



House



ghar



घर



Bus station



bas bisauni



बस बसौनी



Train station



relbe station



रे लवे ःटे शन



Police station



prahari chauki



ूहरी चौकी



Café



coffeeghar



कफीघर



Restaurant



reshTauranT



रे ु रेन्ट 95



Church/mosque/temple



girjaaghar / masjid / mandir



िगजार्घर / मिःजद / मंिन्दर



Movie theater



sinemaa hall



िसनेमा हल



Hospital



aspataal



अःपताल



Market



bajaar



बजार



Pharmacy



aushadhi pasal



औषधी पसल



Post office



hulaakghar



Store



bhanDaar



हुलाकघर



भ डार



Park



paark



पाकर्



Factory



kaarkhaanaa



कारखाना



Bridge



pul



पुल



Farm



khet



खेत



Field



maidaan



मैदान



Forest



jungal



जंगल



Lake



taal



ताल



Mountain



himaal



River



nadi



हमाल नदी



5. Match the English word in the left column with the Nepali equivalent in the right column. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. Airport



kaarkhaanaa



कारखाना



2. Bank



aspataal



अःपताल



3. Bus Station



bimaansthal



4. Café



aushadhi pasal



औषधी पसल



5. Church



reshTauranT



रे ु रेन्ट



6. Movie Theater



paark



पाकर्



7. Factory



hulaakghar



8. Hospital



bas bisauni



हलाकघर ु



बस बसौनी



9. Park



bank



बक



10. Pharmacy



coffeeghar



कफीघर



11. Post Office



sinemaa hall



सनेमा हल



12. Restaurant



girjaaghar



िगजार्घर



वमानःथल



96



6. Translate the following sentences from Nepali into English. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. बजार बकको दि णमा पछर् । bajaar bankko dakchhinmaa parchha. 2. नदी हमालह को पूवम र् ा पछर् । nadi himaalharuko purbamaa parchha. 3. वमानःथल होटे लको पिँचममा पछर् । bimaansthal hotelko pashchimmaa parchha. 4. हमालह र नदीह जंगलको पूवम र् ा पछर् । himaalharu ra nadiharu jungleko purbamaa parchha. 5. नदी खेतको दि णमा पछर् । nadi khetko dakchhinmaa parchha. 6. िसनेमा हल अःपतालको पूवम र् ा पछर् । sinemaa hall aspataalko purbamaa parchha. 7. ताल पाकर्को उ रमा पछर् । taal parkko uttarmaa parchha. 7. Practice composing and pronouncing the vocabulary. Create sentences according to the model. Use the words below. MODEL: पाकर् हलाकघरको पूवम र् ा पछर् । ु paark hulaakgharko purbamaa parchha. 1. वमानःथल bimaansthal 2. बक bank 3. औषधी पसल aushadhi pasal 4. पुल pul 5. बस बसौनी bas bisauni 6. कारखाना kaarkhaanaa 7. खेत khet



- पूवम र् ा purbamaa - दि णमा dakshinmaa - पिँचममा pashchimmaa - उ रमा uttarmaa - पूवम र् ा purvamaa - दि णमा dakshinmaa - पिँचममा pashchimmaa



97



- ताल taal - अःपताल aspataal - हलाकघर ु hulaakghar - नदी nadi - ूहरी चौकी prahari chauki - हमाल himaal - मैदान maidaan



8. पाकर् park



- उ रमा uttarmaa



- ताल taal



8. Listen to the speaker and circle the term you hear. Check your answers with the Answer Key. 1. उ र



पिँचम



दि ण



2. बक



पाकर्



पुल



3. रे ल ःटे शन



बस बसौनी



4. रे ु रेन्ट



कफीघर



कारखाना



5. हलाकघर ु



औषधी पसल



अःपताल



6. िगजार्घर



िसनेमा हल



कारखाना



7. ताल



नदी



खेत



8. भवन



पुल



वमानःथल



हमाल



9. Listen to the following words and word combinations and repeat after the speaker. Follow along in your workbook. In front of……



agaaDi



अगाडी



Next to……



chheumaa



छे उमा



Between…… and……



bichmaa…..ra



Around the corner from……



kunaako najikai / waripari paari



Across from……



98



बचमा……….र कुनाको निजकै / चारै ितर पारी



10. Listen and repeat after the speaker. Follow along in your workbook. Then translate dialogues into English. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. ताल कहाँ छ? ताल जंगलको छे उमा छ। taal kahaachha? taal jungleko chheumaa chha. 2. बजार कहाँ छ? बजार ूहरी चौकी र िगजार्घरको बचमा छ। bajaar kahaachha? bajaar prahari chauki ra girjaagharko bichmaa chha. 3. हलाकघर कहाँ छ? हलाकघर अःपतालबाट कुनाको निजकै छ। ु ु hulaakghar kahaa chha? hulaakghar aspataalbaaTa kunaako najikai chha. 4. रे लवे ःटे शन कहाँ छ? रे लवे ःटे शन पाकर्को पारी छ। relbe station kahaa chha? relbe station paarkko paari chaa. 5. कफीघर कहाँ छ? यो होटे लको अगाडी छ। coffeeghar kahaa  chha? yo hotelko agaaDi chha. 11. Work with a partner. Compose similar dialogues using the words from the box below the dialogue. Role-play your dialogues. Model: A. माफ गनुस र् ्, महोदय। पाकर् कहाँ छ? maaph garnus, mahoday. paark kahaa chha? A. Excuse me, Sir. Where is the park? B. पाकर् अःपतालको अगाडी छ। paark aspataalko agaaDi chha. B. The park is in front of the hospital. A. धन्यवाद। dhanyabaad A. Thank you. B. केही छै न। kehi chhaina. B. You are welcome. 1. पाकर् paark 2. वमानःथल bimaansthal 3. जंगल jungle 4. ूहरी चौकी prahari chauki



- अगाडी agaaDi - पारी paari - छे उमा chheumaa - कुनाको निजकै kunaako waripari



अःपताल aspataal - बस बसौनी bas bisauni - हमाल himaal - िसनेमा हल sinemaa hall -



99



5. िगजार्घर girjaaghar



- बचमा bichmaa



- कारखाना र पाकर् kaarkhaanaa ra paark



100



End-of-Lesson Tasks 1. Translate each phrase into Nepali. Check your work with the Answer Key. A. B. C. D. E. F.



The restaurant is next to the hotel. The park is north of the lake. The bank is between the church and the bus station. The market is south of the bridge. The café is across from the bookstore. The field is in front of the farm.



2. Work with a partner or in small groups. In Nepali, compose a list of the facilities on your base. Then draw a schematic map of the base and describe the locations of each facility.



101



Vocabulary List Where



Kahaa



कहाँ



North



Uttar



उ र



South



Dakchhin



दि ण



East



Purba



पूवर्



West



Pashchim



पिँचम



Mountain



Himaal



Lake



Taal



ताल



River



Nadi



नदी



Forest



Jungle



जंगल



Bridge



Pul



पुल



Store



Bhundaar



भ डार



Market



Bajaar



बजार



Church/mosque/temple



Girjaaghar / masjid / mandir



िगजार्घर / मिःजद / मंिन्दर



Restaurant



Reshtaurant



रे ु रेन्ट



Café



Coffeeghar



कफीघर



Park



Paark



पाकर्



Bank



Bank



बक



Airport



Bimaansthal



वमानःथल



Train station



Relbe station



रे लवे ःटे शन



Bus station



Bas bisauni



बस बसौनी



Pharmacy



Aushadhi pasal



औषधी पसल



Hospital



Aspataal



अःपताल



Movie Theater



Sinemaa hall



सनेमा हल



Factory



Kaarkhaanaa



कारखाना



Farm



Khet



खेत



Post office



Hulaakghar



Field



Maidaan



हलाकघर ु



Police station



Prahari chauki



ूहरी चौकी



In front of



Agaadi



अगाडी



हमाल



मैदान



102



छे उमा



Next to



Chheumaa



Between



Bichmaa



Around the corner from



Kunaako najikai



कुनाको निजकै



Across from



Paari



पारी



बचमा



103



ANSWER KEY Exercise 5 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.



7. A 8. B 9. F 10. D 11. G 12. E



C I H J L K



Exercise 6 1. The market is south of the bank 2. The river is east of the mountains. 3. The airport is west of the hotel. 4. The mountains and lakes are east of the forest. 5. The river is south of the farm. 6. The movie theater is east of the hospital. 7. The lake is north of the park. Exercise 8 1. north



उ र



2. bridge



पुल



3. bus station



बस बसौनी



4. café



कफीघर



5. post office



हलाकघर ु



6. church 7. farm 8. mountain



िगजार्घर खेत



हमाल



Exercise 10 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.



Where is the lake? The lake is next to the forest. Where is the market? The market is between the police station and the church. Where is the post office? The post office is around the corner from the hospital. Where is the train station? The train station is across from the park. Where is the café? It is in front of the hotel.



104



End of Lesson Exercise 1 A. The restaurant is next to the hotel. रे ु रेन्ट होटे लको छे उमा छ। B. The park is north of the lake. पाकर् तालको उ रमा छ। C. The bank is between the church and the bus station. बक िगजार्घर र बस बसौनीको बचमा छ। D. The market is south of the bridge. बजार पुलको दि णमा छ। E. The café is across from the bookstore. कफीघर कताब पसलको पारीमा छ। F. The field is in front of the farm. मैदान खेतको अगाडी छ।



105



Lesson 7 Shopping



िकनमेल गनुर् kinmel garnu



This lesson will introduce you to: - Customs and practices accepted in the Nepali market places. - Names of foods and stores. - How to make purchases in Nepali shops. - The verbs “to want,” “to buy,” “to pay,” and “to take.” - The modal verb “can.” Nepal ranks among the world’s poorest countries with a per capita income of around $300 as of October 2006. Based on national calorie/GNP criteria, an estimated thirty one percent of the population is below the poverty line. Nepal entered the modern era in 1951 without schools, hospitals, roads, telecommunications, electric power, industry, or a civil service; however, the country has made progress toward sustainable economic growth since the 1950s and is committed to a program of economic liberalization (US Bureau of South Asia and Central Asian affairs, October 2006). Agriculture remains Nepal’s principal economic activity, employing over seventy six percent of the population and providing thirty nine percent of the GDP. Only about twenty five percent of the total area is cultivable; another thirty three percent is forest; and the rest is mostly mountainous. Rice and wheat are the main crops. Real GDP growth during 1996-2002 averaged less than five percent. Real growth experienced a one time jump in 1999; it rose to six percent, before it slipped back to below five percent. In 2002, the GDP recorded a negative growth rate of 0.33%, largely because of the decade old Maoist insurgency, which has crippled the economy of the country. GDP grew 3.1% in 2003 and 3.26% in 2004, and again slipped to 2.4% in 2005, according to Nepal Rastra Bank (Nepal’s Central Bank), which published a US government country profile report October 2006. This is early an indicator of an unstable economy. According to a report published by the UN office for the co-ordination of Humanitarian Affairs (February 2006) Nepal has maintained macroeconomic stability, aided largely by remittances from Nepalese working abroad, budget support from the World Bank and borrowing from the IMF's Poverty Reduction Growth Facility. Inflation has remained at under five percent in 2003/04. The conflict in Nepal has affected development projects, including those aiming to reduce the widespread poverty - the thrust of the government's five-year plan (2002-2007). Nepal still remains one of the most attractive and cheapest tourist destinations in South East Asia which earns a large portion of its foreign exchange in tourism. Recent tourist arrivals, during the Maoist cease-fire, show a recovery from the massive decline experienced during the previous years. The fragile security situation, particularly after the Maoists ended their unilateral cease-fire on January 2, 2006, is expected to alter the trend of growth in the economy. The average cost of living in urban and rural areas will vary greatly depending upon the need of individual families, but on average a family can live adequately on Rs. 35,000 / year.



106



The local currency in Nepal is the Rupee. US $ 1 = Nepalese Rupee 71.33 (January 08, 2007)



1. Listen to the following vocabulary and repeat after the speaker.



Banana keraa केरा



Pear naaspaati नासपाती



Tomato golbheDaa गोलभेंडा



Potato aalu आलु



Milk dudh दध ु



Butter baTTar बट्टर



Egg phul / anDaa फुल / अन्डा



Cheese chij िचज



Cereal siriyal िसिरयल



Bread paauroTi पाउरोटी



Sugar chini िचनी



Ice Cream aaiskrim आइसबीम



107



Fish



Chicken



maachhaa माछा



kukhuraa कुखुरा



2. Work in pairs or in small groups. Ask your partner what foods he or she has at home. Use the model below. MODEL: A. घरमा के के छ? gharmaa ke ke chha? B. घरमा केरा, गोलभेंडा र आलु छ? gharmaa keraa, gobheDaa ra aalu chha.



3. Familiarize yourself with the new vocabulary. Listen to the speaker and follow along in the workbook. Look at the pictures and try to guess the meaning of the bolded words.



यो िकराना पसल हो। yo kiraanaa pasal ho



धन मायाँ िकराना पसलमा काम गछर् । ऊ खचान्ची हो। Dhana maayaa kiraanaa pasalmaa kaam garchha. u khachaanchi ho.



. 108



हीरा बहादरु िकराना पसलमा काम गछर् । ऊ बे ने मान्छे हो। Hira Bahadur kiraanaa pasalmaa kaam garchha. u bechne maanchhe ho.



सरीता लुगा पसलमा काम गछर् । ऊ लुगा बे ने मान्छे हो। Sarita lugaa pasalmaa kaam garchha. u lugaa bechne maanchhe ho.



ान लुगाको पसलमा काम गछर् । ऊ खचान्जी हो। Gyaan lugaako pasalmaa kaam garchha. u khachaanchi ho.



Did you understand the bolded words? िकराना पसल kirana pasal grocery store खचान्ची khachaanchhi cashier बे ने मान्छे bechne maanchhe salesperson लुगा पसल lugaa pasal clothing store 4. Work in pairs or in small groups. Make up dialogues using the model below. MODEL: A सोनाम कहाँ काम गछर् ? Sonam kahaa kaam garchha? A. Where does Sonam work? B. सोनाम िकराना पसलमा काम गछर् । Sonam kiraanaa pasalmaa kaam garchha. B. She works at the grocery store.



109



Grammar note: The construction “want + infinitive” (e.g. “want to buy”): I want to buy…



malaai kinna manlaagchha मलाई िकन्न मन लाग्छ



You want to buy…. tapaailaai kinna manlaaghha तपाईंलाई िकन्न मन लाग्छ He wants to buy…. wahaalaai kinna manlaagchha वहाँलाई िकन्न मन लाग्छ She wants to buy….wahaalaai kinna manlaagchha वहाँलाई िकन्न मन लाग्छ We want to buy… haamilaai kinna manlaagchha हामीलाई िकन्न मन लाग्छ They want to buy….uniharulaai kinna manlaagchha उनीहरुलाई िकन्न मन लाग्छ



5. Familiarize yourself with the new vocabulary. Listen to the speaker and follow along in the workbook. Look at the pictures and try to guess the meaning of the bolded words.



क पनालाई िकताब िकन्न मनलाग्छ। ऊ



महे न्िलाई घडी िकन्न मन लाग्छ। ऊ उपहार



िकताब पसलमा छ। Kapanalaai kitaab kinna manlaagchha. u kitaab pasalmaa chha.



पसलमा छ। Mahendralaai ghaDi kinna manlaagchha.u uphaar pasalmaa chha.



110



Did you understand the bolded words? िकताब पसल kitaab pasal bookstore घडी ghaDi clock उपहार पसल uphaar pasl gift store 6. Match each Nepali sentence in the left column with the English equivalent in the right column. Check your answers with the Answer Key. A. Kabita wants to buy fish. 1. मलाई पाउरोटी र बट्टर िकन्न मनलाग्छ। malaai paauroTi ra baTTar kinna manlaagchha B. They want to buy cheese. 2. हरीलाई िकताब िकन्न मनलाग्छ। Harilaai kitaab kinna mablaagchha. C. I want to buy bread and butter. 3.किबतालाई माछा िकन्न मनलाग्छ। Kabitalaai maachhaa kinna manlaagchha. D. My sister wants to buy clothes. 4. महे न्िलाई घडी िकन्न मनलाग्छ। Mahendralaai ghaDi kinna manlaagchha. E. Mahendra wants to buy a clock. 5. हामीलाई उपहार िकन्न मनलाग्छ। haamilaai uphaar kinna manlaagchha. F. Hari wants to buy a book. 6. उनीहरुलाई चीज िकन्न मनलाग्छ। unuharulaai chij kinna manlaagchha. G. We want to buy a gift. 7. मेरो बिहनीलाई लुगा िकन्न मनलाग्छ। mero bahinilaai lugaa kinna manlaagchha. Note: “roTi” रोटी means “plain bread” and “paauroTi” पाउरोटी means “a loaf of bread” in Nepali. A kilo of pears



ek kilo naaspaati



एक िकलो नासपाती



A box of cereal



ek paakeT sirial



एक पाकेट िसिरयल



A bag of potatoes



ek jholaa aalu



एक झोला आलु



A loaf of bread



paauroTi



पाउरोटी



A bottle of water



ek sisi paani



एक िससी पानी



A carton of milk



ek kaarTun dudh



A dozen eggs



ek darjan phul



एक काटर्ु न दध ु



एक दजर्न फुल



111



7. Work with a partner or in small groups. Pretend that you are planning to have a surprise birthday party for one of your classmates. You need to buy some food and gifts. Make a shopping list and tell your partner in Nepali what you want to buy. Note: “ek kilo chiniko kati paisa parchha”? एक िकलो िचनीको कित पैसा पछर् ? How much for one kilo of sugar? Question Word: “kati” कित means “how much” or “how many.”



8. Listen to the following dialogue and repeat after the speaker. A. Excuse me. I want to buy cheese. How much is it? सुनुस त, मलाई िचज िकन्न मन लाग्छ।एक िकलो िचजको कित पछर् ? Sunus ta, malaai chij kinna manlaagchha. ek kilo chijko kati pachha? B. A kilo of cheese is Rs.100. एक िकलो िचजको एक सय (१००) रूिपयाँ। Ek kilo chijko eksaya rypiyaa. A. Thank you. धन्यवाद। Dhanyabaad. B. You are welcome. केही छै न। Kehi chhaina. 9. Pretend you want to buy the items listed below. One of your classmates is a salesperson. Role-play an “In the Shop” dialogue using the dialogue above as a model. Work in pairs or in small groups. 1. एक िकलोमाम नासपातीको पैंसठी (६५) रूिपयाँ। A kilogram of pears - Rs.65 ek kilogram naaspaatiko paisaThi (65) rupiyaa 2. एक िकलो माछाको एकसय बीस (१२०) रूिपयाँ। A kilo of fish - Rs.120 ek kilo maachhaako eksaya bis 120) rupiyaa 3. एक िकलोमाम आलुको तीस(३०)रूिपयाँ। A kilogram of potatoes - Rs. 30 ek koligram aaluko tis 30) ruoiyaa 4. एक बोतल पानीको पन्ी (१५) रूिपयाँ। A bottle of water - Rs. 15 ek botal paaniko pandhrah (15) rupiyaa



112



5. एक िलटर दधको पचीस(२५) रूिपयाँ। ू A liter of milk - Rs.25 ek liTar dudhko pachis rupiyaa. 6. एक पाउन्ड पाउरोटीको बीस(२०) रूिपयाँ। A loaf (1 pound of bread) - Rs.20 ek paaunD paauroTiko bis rupiyaa. 7. एक दजर्न फुलको पचास(५०) रूिपयाँ। A dozen eggs - Rs. 50 ek darjan phulko pachaas rupiyaa.



10. Complete the sentences using the words in the box above the sentences. Check your answers with the Answer Key. लुगा पसल lugaa pasal



िकराना पसल kiraanaa pasal



िकताब पसल kitaab pasal



उपहार पसल uphaar pasal



1.मेरो आमाबा ____________मा उपहार िकन्नुहु न्छ। mero aamaabaa __________________maa uphaar kinnuhunchha. 2. उनीहरु गोलभेंडा र आलु ________________मा िकन्छन ्। unuharu golbheDaa ra aalu __________maa kinchhan. 3. मेरो भाइ ______________मा िकताब िकन्छ। mero bhaai ____________maa kitaab kinchha. 4. मेरो िददी _______________मा लुगा िकन्नुहु न्छ। mero didi ____________maa lugaa kinnuhunchha. 5. हामी लुगाहरु, िकताबहरु र उपहारहरु _________________ मा िकन्न सक्छौं। haami lugaaharu, kitaabharu ra uphaarharu _____________________maa kinna sakchhau.



11. Listen to the following sentences and circle the words you hear. Check your answers with the Answer Key. 1. लुगा पसलमा



िकताब पसल।



2. उपहार पसलमा



िकराना पसल।



3. उपहार पसलमा



िकराना पसल।



4. िकताब पसलमा



िकराना पसल।



5. िडपाटर् मेन्ट पसलमा



िकताब पसल।



Note: “saknu” सक्नु means “can” or “able” to.



113



I can



ma sakchhu



म सक्छु



You can



tapaai saknuhunchha



He can



wahaa saknuhunchha



तपाईं सक्नुहु न्छ



She can



wahaa saknuhunchha



We can



haami sakchhau



You can



timi sakchhau



ितमी सक्छौ



They can



uniharu sakchhan



उनीहरु सक्छन ्



वहाँ सक्नुहु न्छ



वहाँ सक्नुहु न्छ हामी सक्छौं



Note: “linu” िलनु means “to take” or “to receive.”



12. a) Listen to the following dialogue and repeat after the speaker. Follow along in the workbook. A. Hello. I want to buy a loaf of bread. How much is it? नमःते! मलाई पाउरोटी िकन्न मनलाग्छ। एक पाउन्ड पाउरोटीको कित पछर् ? namaste! malaai paauroTi kinna manlaagchha. ek paaunD paauroTiko kati parchha? B. It is Rs. 20. बीस रुिपयाँ। bis rupiyaa A. Can I pay with a credit card? म बेिडट काडर् ले िकन्न सक्छु? ma kreDitT kaarDle kinna sakhhu? B. I’m sorry, but we take cash. माफ गनुस र् , हामी नगद माऽ िलन्छौं। maaph garns, haami nagad maatrai linchhau.



b) Role-play the dialogue above. Make up similar dialogues using the words below. 1. दई ु िससी पानी two bottles of water dui sis paani 2. िकताब a book kitaab 3. एक काटर्ु न दध ु a carton of milk ek kaarTun dudh



114



4.एक पाउन्ड िचज a pound of cheese ek paaund chij 5. एक दजर्न फुल a dozen eggs ek darjan phul



13. Listen to and read along with the dialogue. Sudhir: Hello, Mina! सुधीर: नमःते, मीना। Sudhir: namaste, Mina! Mina: Hello, Sudhir! मीना: नमःते, सुधीर। Mina: namaste, Sudhir! Sudhir: Where are you going? सुधीर: तपाईं कहाँ जाँदैहु नुहु न्छ? Sudhir: tapaai kahaa jaadaihunuhunchha? Mina: I am going to the grocery store. मीना: म िकरानामा पसल जाँदैछु । Mina: ma kiraanaa pasalmaa jaadaichhu. Sudhir: What do you want to buy? सुधीर: तपाईं के िकन्नुहु न्छ? Sudhir: tapaai ke kinnuhunchha? Mina: I want to buy bread, two bottles of water, and a kilo of pears. Where are you going? ु तपाईं कहाँ जाँदैहु नुहु न्छ? मीना: म पाउरोटी, दई ु िससी पानी र एक िकलो नासपाती िकन्छ। Mina: ma paauroTi, dui sisi paani ra ek kilo naaspaati kinchhu. tapaai kahaa jaadai hunuhunchha? Sudhir: I am going to the department store. सुधीर: म िडपाटर् मेन्ट ःटोर जाँदैछु । Sudhir: ma DipaarTmenT sTormaa jaadaichhu. Mina: What do you want to buy? मीना: तपाईं के िकन्नुहु न्छ? Mina: tapaai ke kinnuhunchha? Sudhir: I want to buy a gift for my grandfather. I want to buy a book or a clock. सुधीर: मलाई मेरो हजुरबाको लािग उपहार िकन्न मनलाग्छ।मलाई िकताब िक घडी िकन्न मनलाग्छ। Sudhir: malaaimero hajurbaako laagi uphaar kinna manlaagchha. malaai kitaab ki ghaDi kinna manlaagchha. Mina: I buy gifts at the gift store. ु मीना: म उपहार पसलमा उपहार िकन्छ। Mina: ma uphaar paslmaa uphaar kinchhu. 115



End-of-Lesson Tasks 1. Translate the following into Nepali. Check your work with the Answer Key. A. B. C. D.



Where do you buy tomatoes and potatoes? Do you take credit cards? No, we take cash. I will buy the gift for my sister in the clothing store. How much is a loaf of bread? – Rs.20.



2. In Nepali, explain where you buy groceries/gifts/books/clothes. 3. What would you tell a salesperson in Nepal if you wanted to buy a carton of milk/a watch/a dozen eggs? How would you ask the price of each item? Role-play the dialogue.



116



Vocabulary List How much …?



Kati



कित



It is…



Yo



यो



I want to buy…



Malaai kinna manlaagchha



मलाई िकन्नमन लाग्छ



As well



Tyo pani



Banana



Keraa



केरा



Butter



Battar



बट्टर



Chicken



Kukhuraa



कुखुरा



Fish



Maachhaa



माछा



Ice cream



Aaiskrim



आइसबीम



Milk



Dudh



दध ु



Tomato



GolbheDaa



गोलभेंडा



Pear



Naaspaati



नासपाती



Potato



Aalu



आलु



Sugar



Chini



िचनी



Cereal



Siriyal



िसिरयल



Cheese



Chij



चीज



Eggs



Phul



फुल



A kilo of cheese



Ek kilo chij



एक िकलो चीज



A bag of potatoes



Ek jhilaa aalu



एक झोला आलु



A loaf of bread



Paauroti



पाउरोटी



A bottle of water



Ek sisi paani



एक िससी पानी



A dozen eggs



Ek darjan phul



एक दजर्न फुल



A box of cereal



Ek baakas siriyal



एक बाक्स िसिरयल



A carton of milk



Ek kaartun dudh



Department Store



Dipaartmentstore



िडपाटर् मेन्ट ःटोर



Clothing Store



Lugaa pasal



लुगा पसल



Grocery Store



Kiraanaa pasal



िकराना पसल



Bookstore



Kitaab pasal



िकताब पसल



Bread



Roti



रोटी



Credit card



Kredit kaard



यो पिन



एक काटर्ु न दध ु



बेिडट काडर्



117



Cash



Nagad



नगद



Cashier



Khachaanchi



खचान्ची



Salesperson



Bechne maanchhe



बे ने मान्छे



To buy



Kinnu



िकन्नु



To take



Linu



िलनु



To pay for



Tirnu



ितनुर्



118



ANSWER KEY Exercise 6 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.



C F A E G B D



I want to buy bread and butter. Hari wants to buy a book. Kabita wants to buy fish. Mahendra wants to buy a clock. We want to buy a gift. They want to buy cheese My sister wants to buy clothes.



Exercise 10 1. उपहार पसल



uphaar pasal



2. िकराना पसल



kiraanaa pasal



3. िकताब पसल



kitaab pasal



4. लुगा पसल



lugaa pasal



5. िडपाटर् मेन्ट ःटोर



DipaarTmenT sTor



My parents buy gifts at the gift store. मेरो आमाबा उपहार पसलमा उपहार िकन्नुहु न्छ। mero aamaabaa uphaar pasalmaa uphaar kinnuhunchha. They buy tomatoes and potatoes at the grocery store. उनीहरु गोलभेंडा र आलु िकराना पसलमा िकन्छन।् uniharu golbheDaa ra aalu kiraanaa pasalmaa kinchhan. My brother buys books at the bookstore. मेरो भाइ िकताब पसलमा िकताब िकन्छ। mero bhaai kitaab pasalmaa kitaab kinchha. My sister and I buy clothes at the clothing store. मेरो िददी लुगा पसलमा लुगा िकन्नुहु न्छ। mero didi lugaa pasalmaa lugaa kinnuhunchha. We can buy clothes, books and gifts at the department store. हामी िडपाटर् मेन्ट ःटोरमा लुगा, िकताब र उपहार िकन्न सक्छौं। maami DipaarTmenT sTormaa lugaa, kitaab ra uphaar kinna sakchhau.



Exercise 11 1. िकताब पसल



kitaab pasal



2. उपहार पसल



uphaar pasal



3. िकराना पसल



kiraanaa pasal



I buy books in the bookstore. ु म िकताब पसलमा िकताबहरु िकन्छ। ma kitaab pasalmaa kitaabharu kinchhu. My sister buys gifts at the gift store. मेरो िददी उपहार पसलमा उपहारहरु िकन्नुहु न्छ। mero didi uphaar pasalmaa uphaarharu kinnuhunchha. My mother buys sugar at the grocery store across from the bank. मेरो आमा बैंकपारीको िकराना पसलमा िचनी िकन्नुहु न्छ। mero aabaa bankpaariko kiraanaa pasalmaa chini kinnuhunchha.



119



4. िकराना पसल



kiraanaa pasal



5. िडपाटर् मेन्ट ःटोर



DipaarTmenT sTor



My grandparents buy milk and butter at the grocery store. मेरो हजुरबाहजुरआमा िकराना पसलमा दध ु र बट्टर िकन्नुहु न्छ। mero hajurbaahajuraamaa kiraanaa pasalmaa dudh ra baTTar kinnuhunchha. We buy clothes, books, and gifts at the department store. हामी िडपाटर् मेन्ट ःटोरमा लुगाहरु, िकताबहरु र उपहारहरू िकन्छौं। haami DipaarTmenT sTormaa lugaaharu, kitaabharu ra uphaarharu kinchhau.



End of Lesson Exercise 1 A. Where do you buy tomatoes and potatoes? तपाईं गोलभेंडा र आलु कहाँ िकन्नुहु न्छ? tapaai golbheDaa ra aalu kahaa kinnu hunchha? B. Do you take credit cards? No, we take cash. तपाईं बेिडट काडर् िलनुहु न्छ? होईन, हामी नगद िलन्छौं। tapaai kreDiT kaarD linihuchha? hoina, haami nagad linchhau. C. I will buy the gift for my sister in the clothing store. ु म मेरो बिहनीको लािग लुगा पसलमा उपहार िकन्नछ। ma mero bahiniko laago lugaa pasalmaa uphaar kinchhu. E. How much is a loaf of bread? एक पाउन्ड पाउरोटीको कित? ek paaunD paauroTiko kati? – Rs.20 बीस रूिपयाँ। bis rupiyaa.



120



Lesson 8 Eating Out



बािहर खाने baahira khaane This lesson will introduce you to: - Eating out in a restaurant in Nepal. - Various menu items. - How to order menu items. - Different table service items.



Every day Nepalese food is very healthy, nourishing, practical and surprisingly tasty. However, foods during festivals can offer an elaborate assortment of gourmet delights. The Nepalese food differs from one culture to another within the country, but a typical sample of food would be: daal, bhaat, and tarkaari. Daal is lentils, baht is rice and tarkaari is curried vegetables. These dishes form the staple diet of most Nepalese people. The majority of Nepalese are in the habit of taking two meals, one in the morning and one in the evening; there is no ‘lunch’ in Nepalese culture. However, people living in urban areas, those who work with diplomatic missions and younger generations do enjoy lunch. In addition to the indigenous cuisine, visitors to Nepal will find a variety of foods from many of the surrounding Asian countries: Indian, Pakistani, Chinese, Thai, Japanese, Korean, and Vietnamese cuisines are all available in Nepal. Consequently, there are plenty of choices for food, and eating out in Nepal can be fun and enjoyable. Most Nepalese eat with the right hand, though urban diners have adopted silverware. Metal spoons are said to ruin the flavor of food and to make you thinner, which is not a good thing in Nepal. Food may be served on a thaali, a metal plate divided into separate compartments. The method is to attack the mountain of daal bhaat quickly, while it’s hot.



121



If the daal came in a separate bowl, you pour it over the rice, and break up the chunks with your fingers as you do. Add a bit of tarkaari or achaar, squeeze it all together, and pop it into your mouth. The hand remains in constant motion until the food vanishes. Listed below are descriptions of some of the more common foods and dishes in Nepal. Bhaat - Cooked rice Daal – lentils, usually eaten with rice; the most popular lentils used in Nepal are black, red and yellow. Saag - Green vegetables such as spinach, mustard greens or broad-leaved mustard. Greens such as these are a standard accompaniment to plain steamed rice for lunch or dinner. Tarkaari - Any vegetables or group of vegetables in curry, usually broth. Curries can be made in many different combinations. Maasu - Meat with spices (curry), usually served with rice. Most Nepalese eat mutton, chicken and some eat buffalo and pork as well. Almost no one eats beef (cow) which is prohibited by law, the cow being sacred to Hindus. Relishes: Achaar - A sour, spicy or sweet pickle that can be made in different ways and combinations. The most popular relishes are made up of ground tomatoes, sliced radish, and boiled or diced potatoes. Red and green chili pickles are also common in restaurants. Dessert: Dahi - Yogurt or curd usually made from buffalo milk Juju dhau - popular creamy curd from Bhaktapur. Juju literally means “king.” Appetizers and Snacks: Momo (Momo cha in Newari) - dumping filled with minced meat (usually buffalo, chicken or mutton) served steamed or fried. This is a very popular appetizer, afternoon snack or even an evening meal. Sekuwaa - grilled meat; usually mutton, chicken, duck, buffalo, or wild boar. SukuTi - spicy dried meat roasted over a charcoal fire; often served in restaurants as an accompaniment to drinks. Aalu tama bodi - special Nepalese traditional curry made with potato, bamboo shoots and small local beans.



122



1. Look at the restaurant menu below. Repeat the words after the speaker, and follow along in the workbook.



  Small World Restaurant    Soup Salad Hamburger Fried potatoes Pasta noodles Chicken Mutton Fish Ice Cream Cake Orange Juice Apple Juice Coffee Milk Tea Beer Wine



Sup Salad Hyaambargar bhuTeko aalu paastaa nuDals Kukhuraa Khasi Maachaa Aaiskrim Kek Suntalaako jus Syaauko jus Kaphi Dudh Chiyaa Biyar Waain



सुप



सलाद अयामबगर्र भुटेको आलु पाःता नूड स कुखुरा खसी माछा आइसिबम केक सुन्तलाको जुस ःयाउको जुस कफी दध ु



िचया िवयर वाइन



Rs.70 Rs. 80 Rs. 80 Rs.55 Rs. 160 Rs.150 Rs. 195 Rs.160 Rs.120 Rs.100 Rs.45 Rs.45 Rs.25 RS.15 Rs.15 Rs.60 Rs.65



                                  2. Imagine that you have Rs. 2,496.55 paisa. What would you order at the “Small World Restaurant”?



The exchange rate as of January 2007 is: US $ 1.00 = Rs. 71.33 paisa. (US $ 35.00 = RS. 2,496.55.)



123



3. A) Listen to, and read along with, the following dialogue between a waiter and a patron. A. माफ गनुस र् ,वेटर। maaph garnus, weTer! A. Excuse me, waiter. B. हजुर! hajur! B. Yes, please. A. मलाई एक कप कफी चािहन्छ। malaai ek kap kaphi chaahinchha. A. I want a cup of coffee. B. माफ गनुस र् । कफी छै न, तर िचया छ। maaph garnus. kaphi chaaina, tara chiyaa chha. B. Sorry, sir. We do not have coffee, but we have tea. B) Make up similar dialogues using the words and word combinations that are in the box. 1 एक कप कफी- िचया। ek kap kaphi- chiyaa 2. एक िगलास दध ु – िचया / कफी। ek gilaas dudh- chiyaa /kaphi 3 एक िगलास सुन्तलाको जुस।. ek gilaas suntalaako jus. 4. माछा र पाःता- कुखुरा र भुटेको आलु। maachhaa ra paastaa – kukhuraa ra bhuTeko aalu.



4. Listen to the following dialogue that takes place at a restaurant. Follow along in your workbook. Pay attention to the new words. Role-play the dialogue. You can substitute some words with any food from the “Small World Restaurant” menu. A. Hello, sir. What do you want to eat? नमःते, सर। तपाईंलाई के खान मन लाग्छ? namaste, sir. tapaailaai ke khaana manlaagchha? B. What do you recommend? तपाईंको िवचारमा कुन खाना िमठो छ? tapaaiko bichaarmaa kun khaanaa miTho chha?



124



A. We have wonderful fried chicken and pasta. They are delicious. भुटेको कुखुरा र पाःता एकदम राॆो छ। यो खानाहरु िमठो छ। bhuTeko kukhuraa ra paastaa ekdam raamro chha. yo khaanaaharu miTho chha. B. Very well. Fried chicken and pasta, please. एकदम राॆो। भुटेको कुखुरा र पाःता िदनुस। ekdam raamro. bhuTeko kukhuaa ra paastaa dinus. A. What do you want to drink? िपउने के िलनुहु न्छ? piune ke linuhunchha? B. A cup of tea with sugar and lemon. एक कप कागती िचया । ek kap kaagati chiyaa. A. Any dessert? कुनै डे जटर् ? kunai DejarT? B. Yes, I want a piece of cheesecake. हो, एउटा चीज केक िदनुस। ho, euTaa chij kek dinus. A. Here is your bill, sir. रिसद यहाँ छ, सर। rasid yahaa chha, sir. B. Can I pay with a credit card? बेिडट काडर् ले ितनर् सक्छु? kreDiT kaarDle tirna sakchhu? A. Yes, you can. हजुर, सक्नुहु न्छ। hajur, saknuhunchha.



125



Present tense



Past Tense



I drink



ma piuchhu



म िपउँ छु



I drank



maile pie



मैले िपएँ



You drink



tapaai piunuhunchha



तपाईं



You drank



tapaaile piunubhayo



तपाईंले



wahaa piunuhunchha



वहाँ



wahaale piunubhayo



वहाँले



He drinks We drink You drink They drink



haami piuchhau timi piuchhau uniharu piuchhan



िपउनुहु न्छ िपउनुहु न्छ



He drank



िपउनुभयो िपउनुभयो



हामी िपउछौं



We drank



hammile piau



हामीले िपयौं



ितमी िपउछौ



You drank



timile piau



ितमीले िपयौ



उनीहरु



They drank



uniharule pie



उनीहरुले िपए



िपउछन ्



5. Using the restaurant menu at the beginning of the lesson, tell your classmates in Nepali what you ate and drank at a restaurant the last time you were there.



6. Listen and read along with the dialogue. Fill in the blanks with the missing word in English. Check your answers with the Answer Key. __________ कहाँ खानुभयो ? ___________ kahaa khaanubhayo? मैले ____________खाएँ। maile ___________ khaae. तपाईंले एक्लै खानुभयो? tapaaile eklai khaanubhayo? होईन, मेरो ____________ मसंग िथयो। hoina, mero ________ masanga thiyo. ऊःले के खायो? usele ke khaayo? मैले पाःता र __________ खायो। maile paastaa ra __________ khayo. ऊःले के __________ ? usle ke ___________ ? वहाँले __________ िपयो। usle __________ piyo. तपाईंले के ____________? tapaaile ke ______________ ? 126



मैले ______ र भुटेको आलु खाएँ। maile ________ ra bhuTeko aalu khaae. तपाईंले के िपउनुभयो? tapaaile ke piunubhayo? मैले _______ िपएँ। maile ________ pie.



7. Below are some table service items. Listen and repeat after the speaker.



Plate pleT लेट



Bowl kachauraa कचौरा



Cup kap कप



Glass gilaas िगलास



Knife chakku चक्कू



Fork kaaTaa काँटा



Spoon chamchaa चम्चा



Napkin haat puchhne rumaal हात पुछ्ने रुमाल



8. Match the English words in the left column with the Nepali equivalents in the right column. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. Plate



A. चम्चा



chamchaa



2. Bowl



B. िगलास



gilaas



3. Cup



C. चक्कू



chakku



4. Glass



D. काँटा



kaaTaa



5. Knife



E. कचौरा



kachauraa



6. Fork



F. लेट



pleT



7. Spoon



G. हात पुछ्ने रुमाल



haat puchhane rumaal



8. Napkin



H. कप



kap



127



9. Listen to the following model and repeat after the speaker. Compose similar sentences using the words in the box below the model. MODEL: A. मेरो चम्चा छै न। चम्चा िदनुस न? mero chamchaa chhaina. chamchaa dinus na? A. I do not have a spoon. Can I have a spoon? B. हजुर, िलनुस। यहाँ छ। hajur, linus. yahaa chha. B. Yes, of course. Here you are. 1. napkin हात पुछ्ने रुमाल haat puchhne rumaal 2. cup कप kap 3. fork काँटा kaaTaa 4. knife चक्कू chakku 5. glass िगलास gilaas



10. Listen to the speaker and fill in the blank with the correct word or words. Check your answers with the Answer Key. 1. मलाई एक िगलास दध ु चािहन्छ।. malaai ek gilaas ______________ chaahinchha. 2. हामीले रे ु रेन्टमा ःयाउको जुस खायौं। haamile reshTurenTmaa ____________________ khaayau. 3. तपाईंले पाःता खानुभयो? tapaaile ____________________ khaanubhayo? 128



4. ऊनीहरुले भुटेको आलु र माछा खाए। uniharule bhuTeko aalu ra _______________________ khaae. 5. वहाँले सलाद र रांगाको मासु खानुभयो। wahaale ___________________________________________ khaanubhayo. 6.मलाई चक्कू िदनुस न? malaai _______________________ dinus na? 7. वहाँको िगलास छै न। wahaako _________________________ chhaina.



129



End-of-Lesson Tasks 1. Explain, in Nepali, what you usually eat and drink for breakfast / lunch / dinner. 2. Say, in Nepali, what you ate and drank at a restaurant the last time you were there. 3. Pretend that you are at a restaurant now. What would you say in Nepali if you wanted to eat salad and fried potatoes? You also want a cup of coffee, and you need a fork and a napkin. What would you say in Nepali if you did not know what to choose? Your classmate is a waiter. Role-play the dialogue. Work in pairs or in small groups. 4. Read and translate the following text into English. Answer the questions that follow. Check the Answer Key to review your translation and check your answers. गएको शुबबार काम पिछ, मेरो भाइ, हाॆो आमाबा र म ‘सानो संसार’रे ु रेन्टमा गयौं।यो सानो रे ु रेन्ट बैंक पारी छ।वेटरले भुटेको कुखुरा, सलाद र पाःता िमठो छ भन्यो।मेरो भाइले रांगाको मासु र आलु खायो,ऊःले कागती िचया खायो। मेरो आमाले सुप र अयामबगर्र खानुभयो। वहाँले ःयाउको जुस



खानुभयो।गुिलयो खाना वहाँले ःटारबेरीजको केक खानुभयो।मेरो बाले रांगाको मासु, भुटेको आलु र गोलभेंडा खानुभयो।वहाँले कफी र गुिलयो खानामा चीज केक खानुभयो।मैले कुखुराको मासु र सलाद खाएँ।खाना िमठो िथयो।मलाई बेिडट काडर् ले ितनर् मन लाग्यो तर मेरो बाले नगद िदनुभयो।हाॆो बेलक ु ा धेरै रमाईलो भयो। gaeko shukrabaar kaam pachhi, mero bhaai, haamro aamaabaa ra ma ‘saano sansaar’ reshTuarenT gayaumaa gyau. yo bank paari saano reshTurenT chha. weTerle bhuTeko kukhuraa, salaad ra paastaa miTho chha bhanyo. mero bhaaile raangaako maasu ra aalu khaayo, usle kaagati chiyaa khaayo. mero aamaale sup ra hyaambargar khaanubhayo. wahaale syaauko jus khaanubhayo.guliyo khaanaa wahaale sTaarberijko kek khaanubhayo. mero baale raangaako maasu, bhuTeko aalu ra golbheDaa khaanubhayo.wahaale kaphi ra guliyo khaanaamaa chij kek khaanubhayo. maile kukhuraako maasu ra salad khaae. khaanaa miTho thiyo. malaai kreDiT kaarDle paisa tirna manlaagyo tare mero bale nagad dinubhayo. haamro belukaa dherai ramaailo bhayo. 1. पिरवारको मान्छे हरु किहले रे ु रेन्टमा जानुभयो? pariwaako maanchheharu kahile reshTurenTmaa jaanubhayo? 2. रे ु रेन्ट कहाँ छ? reshTurenT kahaa chha? 3. वेटरले के खान भन्यो? weTerle ke khan bhanyo? 4. मेरो भाइले के खायो? mero bhaaile ke khaayo?



130



5. ऊःले के िपयो? usle ke piyo? 6. आमाले सुप र अयामबगर्र खानुभयो? mero aamaale sup ra hyaambargar khaanubhayo? 7. वहाँले सुन्तलाको जुस िक ःयाउको जुस खानुभयो? wahaale suntalaako jus ki syaauko jus khaanubhayo? 8. वहाँले डे जटर् मा चीज केक खानुभयो? wahaale DejarTmaa chij kek khaanubhayo? 9. मेरो बाले के खानुभयो? mero baale ke khaanubhayo? 10. ऊःले वाइन खायो? usle waaina khaayo? 11 मेरो बाले बेिडट काडर् ले ितनुभ र् यो?. mero baale kreDiT kaarDle tirnubhayo? 12. बेलुका गजबको िथयो? belukaa gajabko thiyo?



131



Vocabulary List Apple juice



Syaauko jus



ःयाउको जुस



Bowl



Kachauraa



कचौरा



Cheesecake



Chijkek



चीजकेक



Coffee



Kaphi



कफी



Cup



Kap



कप



Fork



KaaTaa



काँटा



Fried



Bhuteko



भुटेको



Glass



Gilaas



िगलास



Knife



Chakku



चक्कु



Napkin



Haat puchhane rumaal



हात पुछ्ने रुमाल



Orange juice



Suntalaako jus



सुन्तलाको जुस



Piece



Tiukraa



Plate



Plet



Please



Kripayaa



कृ पया



Salad



Salaad



सलाद



Soup



Sup



सुप



Spoon



Chamchaa



चम्चा



Tea



Chiyaa



िचया



Beef



Raangaako maasu



रांगाको मासु



Hamburger



Hyaambargar



अयामबगर्र



Here you are



Yahaa chha



यहाँ छ



To Drink / drank



Piunu/ pie



िपउनु / िपएँ



To eat /ate



Kaanu/ khaae



खानु / खाएँ



Recommend



Siphaaris garnu



िसफािरस गनुर्



Wonderful



Gajabko



गजबको



Delicious



Motho



िमठो



Very well



Ekdam raamro



एकदम राॆो



Lemon



Kaagati



कागती



Dessert



Dejart



डे जटर्



Bill



Rasid



ु टबा



लेट



रिसद



132



Wine



Waain



वाइन



Beer



Biyar



िवयर



133



ANSWER KEY Exercise 6 Where did you eat last Sunday? I ate at a restaurant.



gaeko aaitabaar kahaa khaanubhayo?



गएको आईतबार कहाँ खानुभयो?



maile reshTuenTmaa khaae.



मैले रे ु रेन्टमा खाएँ।



Did you eat alone?



tapaaile eklai khaanubhayo?



तपाईंले एक्लै खानुभयो?



No, my brother was with me.



hoina, mero bhaai masanga thiyo.



होईन, मेरो भाइ मसंग िथयो।



What did he eat?



usele ke khaayo?



ऊःले के खायो?



He ate pasta and fish.



usle paastaa ra maachha khaayo.



ऊःले पाःता खायो।



What did he drink?



usele ke piyo?



ऊःले के िपयो?



He drank tea.



usle chiyaa piyo.



ऊःले िचयो िपयो।



What did you eat?



tapaaile ke khaanubhayo?



तपाईंले के खानुभयो?



I ate chicken and fried potatoes. What did you drink?



maile kukhuraa ra bhuTeko aalu khaae.



मैले कुखुराको र भुटेको आलु खाएँ।



tapaaile ke piunubhayo?



तपाईंले के िपउनुभयो?



I drank coffee.



maile kaphi pie.



मैले कफी िपएँ।



Exercise 8 1. Plate



pleT



F लेट



2. Bowl



kachauraa



E कचौरा



3. Cup



kap



H कप



4. Glass



gilaas



B िगलास



5. Knife



chakku



C चक्कू



6. Fork



kaaTaa



D काँटा



7. Spoon



chamchaa



A चम्चा



8. Napkin



haal puchhne rumaal



G हात पुछ्ने रुमाल



Exercise 10 1. दध ु



milk



dudh



apple juice



syaauko jus



2. ःयाउको जुस



pasta



paastaa



3. पाःता



fish



maachhaa



4.माछा



134



salad and beef



salad ra raangaako maasu



5. सलाद र रांगाको मासु



knife



chakku



6. चक्कू



glass



gilaas



7.िगलास



End of Lesson Exercise 4 Check your translation of the text. Then compare your answers to the questions below. Last Friday after work, my brother, our parents and I went to the restaurant “Small World.” It’s a small restaurant across from the bank. A waiter recommended we have fried chicken, salad, and pasta. My brother ate beef and potatoes; he drank tea with sugar and lemon. My mother ate soup and a hamburger. She drank apple juice. For dessert she had a piece of strawberry cake. My father ate beef, fried potatoes, and tomatoes. He ate a piece of cheesecake for dessert and drank coffee. I ate chicken and salad. It was delicious! I wanted to pay with a credit card, but my father paid cash. We had a wonderful evening. गएको शुबबार काम पिछ, मेरो भाइ, हाॆो आमाबा र म ‘सानो संसार’रे ु रेन्टमा गयौं।यो सानो रे ु रेन्ट बैंक पारी छ।वेटरले भूटेको कुखुरा, सलाद र पाःता िमठो छ भन्यो।मेरो भाइले रांगाको मासु र आलु



खायो,ऊःले कागती िचया खायो। मेरो आमाले सुप र अयामबगर्र खानुभयो। वहाँले ःयाउको जुस



खानुभयो।गुिलयो खाना वहाँले ःटारबेरीजको केक खानुभयो।मेरो बाले रांगाको मासु, भूटेको आलु र गोलभेंडा खानुभयो।वहाँले कफी र गुिलयो खानामा चीज केक खानुभयो।मैले कुखुराको मासु र सलाद खाएँ।खाना िमठो िथयो।मलाई बेिडट काडर् ले ितनर् मन लाग्यो तर मेरो बाले नगद िदनुभयो।हाॆो बेलक ु ा गजबको िथयो। gaeko shukrabaar kaam pachhi, mero bhaai, haamro aamaabaa ra ma ‘saano sansaar’ reshTuarenT gayaumaa gyau. yo bank paari saano reshTurenT chha. weTerle bhuTeko kukhuraa, salad ra paastaa miTho chha bhanyo. mero bhaaile raangaako maasu ra aalu khaayo, usle kaagati chiyaa khaayo. mero aamaale sup ra hyaambargar khaanubhayo. wahaale syaauko jus khaanubhayo. guliyo khaanaa wahaale sTaarberijko kek khaanubhayo. mero baale raangaako maasu, bhuTeko aalu ra golbheDaa khaanubhayo. wahaale kaphi ra guliyo khaanaamaa chij kek khaanubhayo. maile kukhuraako maasu ra salad khaae. khaanaa miTho thiyo.malaai kreDiT kaarDle paisa tirna manlaagyo tare mero bale nagad dinubhayo. haamro belukaa gajabko thiyo. 1. When did the family go to the restaurant? The family went to the restaurant last Friday. पिरवार किहले रे ु रेन्टमा खाना खान जानुभयो? गएको शुबबार पिरवार रे ु रेन्टमा खाना खान जानुभयो। paribaar kahile resTurenTmaa khaana jaanubhayo?gaeko shukrabaar paribaar reshTurenTmaa khaana jaanubhayo. 2. Where is the restaurant? The restaurant is across from the bank रे ु रेन्ट कहाँ छ? रे ु रेन्ट बैंक पारी छ। reshTurenT kahaa chha? reshTurenT bank paari chha. 3. What did the waiter recommend? He recommended fried chicken, salad, and pasta. वेटरले के खान भन्यो? ऊःले भुटेको कुखुरा, सलाद र पाःता खान भन्यो। weTerle ke khaana bhayo? usele bhuTeko kukhuraa, salaad ra paastaa khaana bhanyo.



135



4. What did my brother eat? He ate beef and potatoes. मेरो भाइले के खायो? ऊःले रांगाको मासु र आलु खायो। mero bhaaile ke khaayo? usle raangaako maasu ra aalu khaanyo. 5. What did he drink? He drank tea with lemon and sugar. ऊःले के िपयो? ऊःले कागती िचया िपयो। usle ke piyo? usle kaagati chiyaa piyo. 6. Did my mother eat soup and a hamburger? Yes, she did. मेरो आमाले सुप र अयामबगर्र खानुभयो? हो, वहाँले सुप र अयामबगर्र खानुभयो। mero aamaale sup ra hyaambargar khaanubhayo?ho, wahaale sup ra hyaambargar khaanubhayo. 7. Did she drink orange or apple juice? No, she drank only apple juice. वहाँले सुन्तलाको जुस िक ःयाउको जुस खानुभयो? होईन, वहाँले ःयाउको जुस माऽै खानुभयो। wahaale suntalaako jus ki syaauko jus khaanubhayo?hoina, wahaale syaauko jus maatrai khaanubhayo. 8. Did she eat a piece of cheesecake for dessert? No, she had strawberry cake. ु वहाँले एक टबा चीज केक डे जटर् मा खानुभयो? होईन, वहाँले ःशाबेरीको केक खानुभयो। wahaale ek Tukraa chij kek DejarTmaa khaanubhayo? hoina, wahaale sTraaberiko kek khaanubhayo. 9. What did my father eat? He ate beef, fried potatoes, and tomatoes मेरो बाले के खानुभयो? वहाँले रांगाको मासु, भूटेको आलु र गोलभेंडा खानुभयो। mero baale ke khaanubhayo? wahaale raangaako maasu, bhuTeko aalu ra golbheDaa khaanubhayo. 10. Did he drink wine? No, he drank coffee. वहाँले वाइन िपउनुभयो? होईन, वहाँले कफी िपउनुभयो। wahaale waaina piunubhayo? hoina, wahaale kaphi piunubhay. 11. Did my father pay with a credit card? No, he paid cash. मेरो बाले बेिडट काडर् ले पैसा ितनुभ र् यो? होईन, वहाँले नगद िदनुभयो। mero baale kreDiT kaarDle paisaa tirnubhayo?hoin, wahaale nagad dinu bhayo. 12. Was it a wonderful evening? Yes, it was. बेलुका गजबको िथयो? हो, गजबको िथयो। belukaa gajabko thiyo? ho, gajabko thiyo.



136



Lesson 9 Holidays, Customs, and Cultural Traditions वदाहरु, चलन र सांःकृ ितक परम्परा bidaaharu, chalan ra saanskritik paramparaa



This lesson will introduce you to: - How to read dates. - How to use ordinal numbers. - Names of the months. - Holidays, customs, and cultural traditions of Nepal. In Nepal, Hinduism and Buddhism are the two main religions. The two have co-existed through the ages and any Hindu temples share the same complex as Buddhist shrines. Most of the festivals celebrated in Nepal have religious significance. The dates of most festivals are fixed by famous astrologers after consulting the lunar calendar. The biggest and most popular festivals are: Dasain, a celebration of the Goddess Bhagabati’s victory over evil Mahisashur; and Tihar, a celebration of lights dedicated to the Goddess Laxmi. Festivals of Nepal: Mahashivaratri: This is the biggest festival for the worship of Lord Shiva. Maha Shivaratri means the great night of Shiva, who is believed to reside in the Himalayas and is believed to have taken birth on this day. Lord Shiva is the most worshipped God in the Hindu religion. Tens of thousands of Shiva devotees, including sadhus of various sects, arrive in Kathmandu to celebrate the night at the famous Pasupatinath temple. Lord Shiva is believed to be the supreme protector deity of Nepal. This is celebrated in the month of February.



Lhosar: On this day, Buddhists celebrate the arrival of the New Year by cooking traditional Buddhist dishes and inviting relatives to their houses for a feast. Buddhists celebrate the day by organizing folk dances and singing traditional songs. In Kathmandu, the streets are decorated with prayer flags and Buddhists throw tsampa (roasted barley) in the air. The Bouthnath stupa is crowded by Buddhists on this day. This festival is also celebrated in February.



137



Fagu purnima (Festival of Color): This festival is celebrated to commemorate the victory of Lord Krishna, one of the human incarnations of Lord Bishnu, over Holika, a female demon. A popular myth states that Holika conspired with her king brother to kill Prahalad, the latter’s son. Prahalad was a great devotee of Lord Bishnu despite taking birth in the family of demons. The festival is famous among children owing to the use of colorful powers. Several days before and after the festival, children hurl water mixed with colored power on bystanders. It is a very entertaining festival and celebrated in the month of March. Ghode Jatra: This is the festival of horses. It is another festival marking the victory of good over evil. During Ghode Jatra, the Royal Nepalese Army performs various stunts on horses in Tundikhel, the capital's military parade ground. Also, horse races, motorcycling and gymnastics are showcased in Tudikhel. A lot of spectators gather around Tudikhel to observe the proceedings. The show is attended by their Majesties the King and Queen. This festival is also celebrated in the month of March.



Rato Macchendranath: This is the chariot ceremony of Rato Macchendranath, the Buddhist deity of rain. Patan is the focal point of the festival and it is decorated colorfully for the occasion. A myth has it that in ancient times, the Valley went through a long period without rain. A Buddhist priest brought Rato (red) Macchendranath, a deity from the Himalayas. His arrival opened up the skies and it rained. The deity is still worshipped with the belief that he controls rain. The deity is taken across the city on a chariot and people feast and dance during this festival that lasts several days and celebrated in the month of April. Bisket Jatra: The festival is observed on the Nepali New Year April 14. During the festival, an ancient drama featuring demons is reacted in Bhaktapur. The demons are appeased with animal sacrifice, among other things. Chariots are prepared for various gods and men tipsy with local liquor pull the chariots through the city. On the day, a tongue-piercing ceremony is held in the village of Bode. It is believed that piercing the tongue on this day secures you a place in heaven.



138



Buddha Jayanti: This is the Birthday of Buddha, the messenger of peace. Lord Buddha was born in Lumbini, Nepal. His birthplace in Lumbini is dotted with monasteries. During Buddha Jayanti, the birthday of the enlightened one and apostle of peace is commemorated, and Buddhists celebrate his coming to a planet full of pain and suffering. Buddha-believers crowd stupas in the Kathmandu Valley as well as outside and offerings are made to Buddha images and icons. Even traditional dances are organized on the day, which is celebrated in the month of May.



Gai Jatra: This is a festival for the remembrance of the dead and celebrated in the month of August. It has a funny side as well. The day is also famous for gossip and jokes. On the day, several magazines publish funny, half-true, sometimes obscene stories about the rich and powerful. Similarly, people dressed in funny clothes move around the city and are fed by people in the name of the deceased. The festival is believed to have started after an eighteenth century king ordered his subjects to celebrate, in order to cheer his Queen who was inconsolable after the loss of their son.



139



Indra Jatra: During the great festival of Indra Jatra the god of rain is worshiped for good weather and good crops. The Kumari festival is a part of the Indra Jatra festival in which the primary purpose is to worship the God Indra. Three separate chariots containing Kumari, Ganesh, and Bhairav are pulled in Kathmandu to observe the main day of Indra Jatra. It is a grand gala in which people throng into and around the temple of the goddess by the thousands to pay their homage to the Living Goddess. The festival of Indra Jatra lasts for eight days with much rejoicing, singing, dancing and feasting. On the third day of the festival, the living goddess Kumari is taken out in a procession in a chariot. "Kumari" the "living goddess" is considered to be an incarnation of the goddess "Taleju." Chariots of Kumari Ganesha and Bhairav are taken around the city for three days. The festival’s many interesting dances, including the procession of Living Goddess-Mahakali, Mahalaxmi and Dasha Avatara masked dances, are staged in Kathmandu Durbar Square near the Kumari Temple. The "Dasha Avatara" refers to the ten incarnations of Lord Vishnu who is one of the Hindu's Holy trinity.



Teej: On this day, the women worship Lord Shiva and the goddess Parvati. Women fast, sing traditional songs and dance wishing the long life and prosperity of husbands (if married) and ask the deities for an ideal husband if unmarried. Women dressed in sharp colors gather around the Pashupatinath temple. It is also a day for



140



married women to visit their paternal homes and feast with their mothers before the fast begins. It is believed that goddess Parvati displayed exemplary devotion to Lord Shiva on this day. This is celebrated in the month of September.



Dasain / Durga Pooja: This is the most important, prolonged and elaborate festival of the Hindus and is celebrated from the last week of September to the beginning of October. It is celebrated with extravagance, mostly of food, clothes and gambling. It is a 14-day festival commemorating the victory of goddess Durga over demons. On the first day, Ghatasthapana, people perform prayers at home and plant barley seeds on specially prepared cake of sand, mud and cow dung. The barley seed is used ten days later for blessings. While prayers are performed every single day, the other significant day is the seventh day, Fulpati, when people offer flowers to the goddess. On the eighth day, animals are sacrificed for the goddess. On the tenth day, elders put tika (vermilion paste) on the foreheads of juniors and offer blessings. People clad in new, colorful clothes go to their relatives' houses to receive the tika and blessings from seniors. This continues for the next couple of days. People feast, relax and gamble, while children fly kites. Government offices remain closed during Dasain. It is believed that people observe this festival to overcome the evils that exist within the self.



Tihar: This festival is also known as the festival of lights which comes after Dasain. The festival is marked by beautiful decorations in homes and the lighting of candles and lamps outside the home. The most important days during Tihar are Laxmi Puja and Bhai Tika. On Laxmi Puja, people worship goddess Laxmi, the deity of wealth and prosperity in the form of cows decorating their homes with flower garlands and lamps. It is believed that the goddess visits the houses at night and blesses with wealth the house that she finds most beautiful. During Bhai Tika, sisters worship brothers and exchange gifts and wish for each other's welfare, success and prosperity. Tihar lasts for four to five days depending on the lunar calendar. Newari people celebrate the second day of Tihar both as Mah Puja (Self worship) and Newari New Year. The Kathmandu valley looks very festive during Newari New Year.



141



Mani Rimdu: Mani Rimdu is the most important festival observed in the Tengboche monastery, which is situated at an altitude of almost four thousand meters in the Khumbu region of Nepal. North of the monastery are several of the world’s highest mountains, including Mount Everest. Monks and students stay in the monastery under the spiritual guidance of Rimpoche Ngawang Tenzing Zangbu, who is believed to be the reincarnation of the previous Rimpoche Lama Guru. The festival is a nine-day meditation that ends with mask dances and blessings, which have been observed ever since this monastery was built in ancient times. The festival of Mani Rimdu falls in the ninth Tibetan month that usually concurs with late October. The festival largely follows the Mindroling tradition. While Mani comes from the sacred and famous Buddhist chant, Rimdu is an adapted form of Rilbu, meaning the small red pills that are distributed along with blessings at the end of the festival.



142



1. Listen and repeat after the speaker. Follow along in the workbook. एक



1 one



ek



first



pahilo



2 two



dui



second



dosro



दोॐो



3 three



tin



तीन



third



tesro



तेॐो



4 four



chaar



चार



fourth



chautho



चौथो



5 five



paach



पाँच



fifth



paachau



पाँचौं



6 six



chha



sixth



chhaiTau



छैं टौं



7 seven



saat



सात



seventh



saathau



सातौं



8 eight



aaTh



आठ



eighth



aaThau



आठौं



9 nine



nau



ninth



naau



नवौं



10 ten



dash



दश



tenth



dashau



दशौं



पिहलो दई ु



छ



नौ



2. Fill in the blanks to complete the sentences using the words located in the box. Check your answers with the Answer Key. पाँचौं paachau



दोॐो dosro



पिहलो pahilo



छैं टौं chhaiTau



तेॐो tesro



सातौं saatau



1. सोमबार हप्ताको _____________ िदन हो। sombaar haptaako _____________ din ho. 2.मंगलबार हप्ताको _______________ िदन हो। mangalbaar haptaako _____________ din ho. 3. बुधबार हप्ताको ________________ िदन हो।



143



चौथो chautho



सातौं saathau



budhabaar haptaako _______________ din ho. 4. बहीबार हप्ताको _______________ िदन हो। bihibaar haptaako ________________ din ho. 5. शुबबार हप्ताको _____________ िदन हो। shukrabaar haptaako ___________ din ho. 6. शिनबार हप्ताको ____________ िदन हो। shanibaar haptaako ____________ din ho. 7. आइतबार हप्ताको ___________ िदन हो। aaitabaar haptaako __________ din ho.



3. Listen to the ordinal numbers 11 through 19 and repeat after the speaker. Follow along in the workbook. 11 eleven



eghaarah



एघार



eleventh



eghaarau



एघारौं



12 twelve



baarah



बा॑



twelfth



baarahau



बा॑ौं



13 thirteen



terah



ते॑



thirteenth



terahau



ते॑ौं



14 fourteen



chaudhah



चौध



fourteenth



chaudhau



चौधौं



15 fifteen



pandhrah



पन्ी



fifteenth



pandhrahau



पन्ीौं



16 sixteen



sorah



सो॑



sixteenth



sorahau



सो॑ौं



17 seventeen



satra



सऽ



seventeenth



satrau



सऽौं



18 eighteen



aThaara



अठार



eighteenth



aThaarau



अठारौं



19 nineteen



unnaais



उन्नाइस



nineteenth



unnaaisau



उन्नाइसौं



20 twenty



bis



बीस



the twentieth



bisau



बीसौं



144



4. Read the following ordinal numbers in Nepali. 11th, 13th, 15 th, 17th, 19th, 12th, 14th, 16th, 18th



5. Listen to the ordinal numbers 20-30 and repeat after the speaker. 20 twenty



bis



बीस



twentieth



bisayau



बीसौं



21 twenty-one



ekkaais



एक्काइस



twenty-first



ekkaaisayau



एक्काइसौं



22 twenty-two



baais



बाइस



twenty-second



baaisyau



बाइसौं



23 twenty-three



teis



तेइस



twenty-third



teisyau



तेइसौं



24 twenty-four



chaubis



चौबीस



twenty-fourth



chaubisyau



चौबीसौं



25 twenty-five



pachchis



पच्चीस



twenty-fifth



pachchisyau



पच्चीसौं



26 twenty-six



chhabis



छब्बीस



twenty-sixth



chhabisyau



छब्बीसौं



27 twenty-seven



sattaais



स ाइस



twenty-seventh



sattaaisyau



स ाइसौं



28 twenty-eight



aThaais



अठाइस



twenty-eighth



aThaaisyau



अठाइसौं



29 twenty-nine



unnantis



उन्ननतीस



twenty-ninth



unnaantisyau



उन्नानतीसौं



30 thirty



tis



तीस



thirtieth



tisyau



तीसौं



40 forty



chaalis



चालीस



fortieth



chaalisyau



चालीसौं



50 fifty



pachaas



पचास



fiftieth



pachaasayau



पचासौं



145



साठी



60 sixty



saaThi



sixtieth



saaThiyau



70 seventy



sattari



seventieth



sattariyau



80 eighty



asi



eightieth



asiyau



असीयौं



90 ninety



nabbe



नब्बे



ninetieth



nabbau



नब्बौं



100 one hundred



saya



सय



one hundredth



sayau



साठीयौं स री स रीयौं असी



सयौं



6. Listen to the names of the months and repeat after the speaker. January



janawari



जनवरी



February



pherbari



फेरवरी



March



maarch



माचर्



April



april



May



me



मे



June



jun



जुन



July



julaai



जुलाई



August



agast



अगःत



September



sepTembar



सेप्टे म्बर



October



akTubar



अक्टु बर



November



navembar



नभेम्बर



December



disembar



िडसेम्बर



अ ूल



146



7. Look at the picture and say the dates and days of the week in Nepali. Practice the different dates, days, and months throughout the year. MODEL: Today is the 15th of April 1999. It is Thursday. आज अ ूल पन्ी (15) तारीख उन्नाइस सय उन्नानसय (१९९९) हो।आज बहीबार हो। aaja april pandhra (15) taarikh unnaais say unnaansay(1999) ho. aaja bibibaar ho.



8. Listen as the speaker reads the following years. Repeat after the speaker. 1925-nineteen twenty-five



unnaais say pachchis



1900-nineteen hundred



unnaais say



2004-two thousand four



dui hajaar chaar



१९२५- उन्नाइस सय पच्चीस १९००- उन्नाइस सय २००४- दई ु हजार चार



9. Read the following years in Nepali. 2001



1987



1960



1945



2000



1700



1516



10. Listen to the names of the holidays and repeat after the speaker. Follow along in the workbook. 1. Christmas – the 25th of December th



2. Independence Day – the 4 of July th



3. St. Valentine’s Day – the 14 of February.



krismas disember pachchis taarikh



िबसमस- िडसेम्बर पच्चीस



swaatantrataa dibas julaai chaar taarikh



ःवतन्ऽता िदवस जुलाई चार



sent bhyaalenTaains dibas pherbari chaudha taarikh



सेन्ट



147



तारीख तारीख



यालेन्टाइन्स िदवस



फेरवरी चौध तारीख



11. Listen to the speakers talk about their dates of birth. Follow along in the workbook.



1. When were you born? tapaai kahile janminubhayo? तपाईं किहले जिन्मनुभयो? I was born on the 11th of June, 1936. ma jun eghaarah(11) taarikh,unnaais say chhatis (1936) maa janme. म जुन एधा॑ (११) तारीख,



2. When were you born? tapaai kahile janminubhayo? तपाईं किहले जिन्मनुभयो? I was born on the 31st of July, 1960. ma julaai ektis (31) taarikh ,unnaais say saaThimaa (1960) janme. म जुलाई एकतीस (३१) तारीख,



3. When were you born? tapaai kahile janminu bhayo? तपाईं किहले जिन्मनुभयो? I was born on the 23rd of January, 1987. ma janwari1teis (23) taarikh,unnaais say sataasi (1987) maa janme. म जनवरी तेइस (२३) तारीख,



उन्नाइस सय छतीस (१९३६) मा



उन्नाइस सय साठी (१९६०) मा जन्में।



उन्नाइस सय सतासी (१९८७) मा



जन्में।



जन्में।



12. Work in pairs or in small groups. Ask your partner when he was born. Use the model below. MODEL: A. I was born on the 15th of February, 1982. When were you born? A. म फेरवरी पन्ी (१५) तारीख, उन्नाइस सय बेरासी (१९८२) मा जन्में।तपाईं किहले जिन्मनुभयो? ma pherbari pandhrah(15) taarikh, unnaais say beraasi (1982) maa janme.tapaai kahile janminubhayo? B. I was born on the 4th of September, 1979. B. म सेप्टे म्बर चार (४) तारीख, उन्नाइस सय उनासी (१९७९) मा जन्में। ma sepTember chaar (4) taarikh, unnaais say unaasi (1979) maa janme.



13. Describe each member of your family. Use the model below. MODEL: This is my brother. His name is Krishan. He is 40 years old. He was born on the 14th of July, 1934. यो मेरो भाइ हो।ऊःको नाम कृ ंण हो।ऊ चालीस वषर् भयो। ऊ जुलाई चौध (१४) तारीख, उन्नाइस सय चौंतीस (१९३४) मा जिन्मयो। yo mero bhaai ho.usko naam Kriskan ho. u julaai chaudha (14) taarikh, unnaais say chautis (1934) maa janmiyo.



148



14. Read and translate the following text into English. Answer the questions below in English. Check your work with the Answer Key. ु मेरो पिरवार ठलो ू मेरो नाम ूिदप पोखरे ल हो। मेरो घर नेपाल हो। म पोखरामा बःछ। छ, मेरो ौीमती, दईजना छोराछोरी र मेरो आमाबा। ु mero naam Pradip Pokharel ho. mero shrimati tis barshako chha. ma Pokharamaa baschhu. mero pariwaar Thulo chha, mero shrimati , duijanaa chhoraachhori ra mero aamaabaa. ू हामी ठलो घरमा बःछौं। मेरो ौीमती तीस वषर्को छ। ऊ नभेम्बर तेइस(२३) तारीख, उन्नाइस सय स री(१९७०)मा जिन्मको। haami Thuo gharmaa baschhau. mero shirmati tis barshako chha. u navember teis taarikh, unnais say sattarimaa janmieko. ऊ डाक्टर हो र अःपतालमा काम गछर् । मेरो छोराछोरीहरु ब ाथ हन। ु ् u DaakTar ho ra aspataalmaa kaam garchha. mero chhoraachhoriharu bidyaarthi hun. उनीह व ालयमा पढछन।् मेरो छोरी अ ूल छब्बीस (२६) तारीख, उन्नाइस सय बेराननब्बेमा (१९९२)



मा जन्मेको। uniharu bidyaalaymaa paDhchhan. mero chhori april chhabis taarikh, unnais say beraanbbemaa janmieko. मेरो छोरा आठ वषर् भयो। ऊ मे एक (१) तारीख, उन्नाइस सय यानब्बे(१९९६) मा जन्मेको। मेरो आमा धेरै बुढी हनु ु हु न्छ। वहाँ अठह री वषर् हनु ु भयो। mero chhoraa aaTh barsha bhayo. u me ek taarikh, unnais say chhyaanbbemaa janmeko. mero aamaa dherai buDi hunuhunchha. wahaa aThhattari barsha hunubhayo. वहाँ नभेम्बर बाइस (२२) तारीख, उन्नाइस सय छब्बीस(१९२६)मा जिन्मनुभयो। मेरो बा उनासी वषर् हनु ु भयो। वहाँ अगःत पच्चीस (२५) तारीख, उन्नाइस सय पच्चीस(१९२५)मा जिन्मनुभयो। wahaa navembar baais taarikh, unnaais say chhabisaamaa janmnubhayo. mero baa unaasi barsha hunubhayo. wahaa agast pachchis taarikh,unnais sy pachchismaa janmanubhayo. वहाँहरु काम गनुह र् ु न्न। वहाँहरु िकताब प नुहु न्छ, टे िलभजन हे नह ुर् ु न्छ िक केटाकेटीहरुसंग खे नुहु न्छ। wahaaharu kaam garnuhunna. wahaaharu kitaab paDhnuhunchha. Telivijan hernuhunchha ki keTaakeTisanga khelnuhunchha. मेरो पिरवार एकदम राॆो छ। mero pariwaar ekdam raamro chha. 1. Where does the family live? 2. How old is the wife? 3. When was she born? 4. What is her occupation? 5. Where does she work? 6. How many children do they have? 7. How old is the son? When was he born? 8. How old is the daughter? 9. When was she born?



149



10. How old is the grandmother? 11. When was she born? 12. How old is the grandfather? 13. When was he born? 14. What do the grandparents do?



15. Listen to the following conversation between two people. Repeat after the speakers. Follow along in the workbook. Answer the questions that follow. Check your work with the Answer Key. A. नमःते, सहबीर। मे छब्बीस (२६) तारीखमा जन्मिदनको भोज छ। म तपाईंलाई िनम्ता िदन्छु मेरो घरमा आउनुस र मेरो पिरवारलाई भेटनुस। namaste, Sahbir. Me chhabbis (26) taarikhmaa janmadinko bhoj chha. ma tapaailaai nimtaa dinchhu mero gharmaa aaunus ra mero pariwarlaai bheTnus. B. धन्यवाद, ूकाश। कित बजे? dhanyabaad Prakash. kati baje? A. पाँच िक साढे पाँच बजे। paach ki saaDhe paach baje. B. ठे गाना के हो? Thegaana ke ho? A. १०४५९ ःशीट। 10459 sTriT. B. म यहाँ कसरी आउने? ma tyahaa kasari aaune? A. मुख्य बाटोबाट उ र दोॐो ःशीट सम्म जानुस र बायाँ मोड्नुस। दोॐो ःशीटमा जानुस दई ु ब्लाक सम्म र दायाँ मोड्नुस। दायाँितर मेरो घर तेॐो हो। Mukhya baaTobaaT uttar dosro sTriT samma jaanus ra baayaa moDnus. dosro sTriTmaa jaanus dui blaak samma ra daayaa moDnus. daayaatira mero ghar tesro ho. B. म के याउँ ? ma ke lyaau. A. केही पदन, धन्यवाद। kehi pardaina, dhanyabaad.



150



B.



िनम्ताको लािग धन्यवाद। nimtaako laagi dhanyabaad. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.



What is the occasion for the invitation? What is the date? What time should he arrive? What is the address? What directions is he given to get there? What should he bring?



16. Work with a partner. Invite him/her to your house to celebrate a holiday. Give him/her directions how to get to your house. Use the dialogue above as a model.



151



End-of-Lesson Tasks 1. In Nepali ,give the date: -



you were born you graduated from high school of your wedding your child was born you joined the military



152



Vocabulary List first



Pahilo



पिहलो



second



Dosro



दोॐो



third



Tesro



तेॐो



fourth



Chautho



चौथो



fifth



Paachau



पाँचौं



sixth



Chaithau



छै ठौं



seventh



Saatayau



सातौं



eighth



Aathaayau



आठौं



ninth



Nau



नौं



tenth



Dashau



दशौं



eleventh



Eghaarau



एघारौं



twelfth



Baarhau



बा॑ौं



thirteenth



Terhau



ते॑ौं



fourteenth



Chaudhau



चौंधौं



fifteenth



Pandhrau



पन्ीौं



sixteenth



Sorhau



सो॑ौं



seventeenth



Satrau



सऽौं



eighteenth



Athaarau



अठारौं



nineteenth



Unnaaisau



उन्नाइसौं



twentieth



Bisau



बीसौं



twenty-first



Ekkaaisau



एक्काइसौं



twenty-second



Baaisau



बाइसौं



twenty-third



Teisau



तेइसौं



twenty-fourth



Chaubisau



चौबीसौं



twenty-fifth



Pachchisau



पच्चीसौं



twenty-sixth



Chhabbisau



छब्बीसौं



twenty-seventh



Sataaisau



सताइसौं



twenty-eighth



Athaaisau



अठाइसौं



twenty-ninth



Unnaantisau



उन्नानतीसौं



January



Janawari



जनवरी



153



February



Pharwari



फरवरी



March



Maarch



माचर्



April



April



अ ूल



May



Me



मे



June



Jun



जुन



July



Julaai



जुलाई



August



Agast



अगःत



September



September



सेप्टे म्बर



October



Aktubar



November



Navembar



नभेम्बर



December



Disembar



िडसेम्बर



Was born



Janmieko



जिन्मको



To invite



Nimtaa dinu



िनम्तािदनु



Invitation



Nimtaa



िनम्ता



Address



Thegaanaa



ठे गाना



Drive



Chalaaunu



चलाउनु



Along



Eklai



एक्लै



Two blocks



Dui blaak



दई ु ब्लाक



Turn right



Daayaa modnu



दायाँ मोड्नु



Turn left



Baayaa modnu



बायाँ मोड्नु



Come over



Yahaa aaunus



यहाँ आउनुस



To visit



Bhetnu



भे नु



Birthday



Janma din



जन्म िदन



Birthday party



Janmadinko bhoj



जन्मिदनको भोज



Wedding



Bihaa



Funeral



Antyeshti



To bring



Lyaaunu



I want to invite you …



Malaai tapaailaai nimtaa garna man laagchha.



ु अक्टबर



बहा



अन् ये याउनु मलाई तपाईंलाई िनम्ता गनर् मनला छ।



List of Holidays in TL Country New year



नयाँ वषर्



Nayaa barsha



154



Buddha’s Birth Anniversary



Buddha jayanti



बु जयन्ती



Lord Krishna’s anniversary



Krishnaashtami



कृ ंणा ामी



Hindu’s biggest festival



Vijayaadashami



Bothers and sister’s festival



Tihaar



ितहार



Constitution Day



Sambidaan dibas



सं वधान िदवस



Unification Day



Prithibijayanti



पृ वीजयन्ती



Lord Shiva’s festival



Mahaashivraatri



महािशवराऽी



Horse festival



Ghodejaatraa



घोडे जाऽा



Festival of Color



Phaagu purnima



फागुपूिणर्मा



Martyr’s memorial day



Shahiddibas



शहीदिदवस



Democratic day



Prajaatantradibas



ूजातन्ऽिदवस



वजयादशमी



155



ANSWER KEY Exercise 2 1. Monday is the ___________________day of the week. 2. Tuesday is the ___________________day of the week. 3. Wednesday is the ________________day of the week. 4. Thursday is the __________________day of the week. 5. Friday is the _____________________day of the week. 6. Saturday is the ___________________day of the week. 7. Sunday is the ____________________day of the week. 1. पिहलो



pahilo



first



2. दोॐो



dosro



second



3. तेॐो



tesro



third



4. चौथो



chautho



fourth



5. पाँचौं



paachau



fifth



6. छैं ठौं



chhauThau



sixth



7. सातौं



saatau



seventh



Exercise 14 1. Pokhara, Nepal 2. 30 3. November 23, 1970 4. Doctor 5. Hospital 6. 2 7. 8 years old, May 1, 1996 8. 12 years old 9. April 26, 1992 10. 78 11. November 22, 1926 12. 79 13. August 25, 1925 14. Read books, watch television, and play with the grandchildren



156



My name is Pradip Pokharel. I am from Nepal. I live in Pokhara. I have a big family: a wife, two children, and my parents. We live in a big house. My wife is 30. She was born on November 23, 1970. She is a doctor and works at the hospital. My children are students. They study at school. My daughter was born on the April 26, 1992. My son is 8 years old. He was born on the 1st of May, 1996. My mother is very old. She is 78. She was born on the 22nd of November, 1926. My father is 79. He was born on the 25th of August, 1925. They do not work. They read books, watch television, or play with our children. I have a wonderful family. Exercise 15 A. Hi, Sahbir. There is a birthday party the 6th of May. I invite you to come over and visit my family. B. Thank you, Prakash. What time? A. Five or five thirty. B. What is your address? A. It is 10459 Street. B. How can I get there? A. Drive north on the main road to Second Street and turn left. Drive along Second Street two blocks and turn right. My house is the third house on the right. B. What can I bring? A. Nothing, thanks. B. Thank you for the invitation. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.



What is the occasion for the invitation? A birthday party What is the date? May 6 What time should he arrive? 5:00 or 5:30 What is the address? 10459 Street What directions is he given to get there? Drive north on the main road to Second Street and turn left. Drive along Second Street two blocks and turn right. My house is the third house on the right. 6. What should he bring? Nothing



157



Lesson 10 Around the House घरको विरपिर gharko waripari



This lesson will introduce you to: - Basic vocabulary related to the home. - Rooms around the house. - Furniture items you may see.



In Nepal, most of the population lives in rural villages where houses are made of stone and mud bricks, with thatched roofs and raised eaves. Bamboo and reed huts are also prevalent. Most houses have two stories but some may contain only two rooms, a sleeping room and a room for a kitchen. The well constructed houses of the Sherpas in the mountains are generally built of stone, timber, and roofed with wooden slats. About four out of five urban dwellings in Nepal are owner occupied. Housing shortages in urban areas has resulted in construction of multi-storied apartment complexes developed by real estate and private sector developers during these years. They are generally two bedrooms, three bedrooms and even four bedrooms depending upon the requirement and size of the individual family. Housing in Nepal is good and improving, as new houses are built with better designs and more modern conveniences. A typical house in an urban area is furnished with basic amenities which reflect the traditional Nepalese local culture. A sofa, a coffee table, a television, a couple of extra chairs and of course a Nepalese carpet (small or medium size) is a must in a sitting room. These features are combined with a few pictures, scenery on the walls and some old traditional Nepalese utensils which are usually kept in the corner of the sitting room. Central heating is not available and houses are not insulated; one has to use heaters in winter and either a ceiling fan or a table fan in summer. The dining room may have a dining table with chairs in urban homes, but most Nepalese in rural areas dine on the floor, typically sitting on a wooden plank. The kitchen is provided with a kitchen counter, wash basins, basic cooking equipment, and refrigerator to meet the needs. Though individual home furnishings will depend upon the requirement and resources of the individual, the new modern housing complexes will have basic furnishing items like carpet, curtains, fixed kitchen cabinets, wardrobes, etc.



158



1. Listen to the vocabulary below and repeat after the speaker. Bathroom



baathrum



बाथरूम



Bedroom



sutne kothaa



सुत्ने कोठा



Dining room



khaane kothaa



खाने कोठा



Door



dhokaa



ढोका



Floor



bhu



भूई ँ



Window



jhyaal



Garage



motar raakhne thaau



मोटर रा ने ठाउँ



Roof



chhaanaa/ chhat



छाना/ छत



Antenna



erial



एिरयल



Office



kaaryaalay



कायार्लय



Basement



besment



बेसमेन्ट



Yard



aagan/ chauk



आँगन / चौक



Kitchen



bhaansaa



भान्सा



Living room



baithak kothaa



बैठक कोठा



One-story



ek tallaa



एक तल्ला



Two-story



dui tallaa



दई ु तल्ला



First floor



pahilo tallaa



पिहलो तल्ला



Second floor



dosro tallaa



दोॐो तल्ला



याल



2. Match the Nepali words in the left column with their English equivalents in the right column. Check your answers with the Answer Key. 1. बाथरूम



baathrum



A. Basement



2. सुत्ने कोठा



sutne koThaa



B. Yard



3. खाने कोठा



khaane koThaa



C. Garage



4. ढोका



Dhokaa



D. Living room



5. भूईं



bhu



E. Bathroom



jhyaal



F. Kitchen



7. गराज



garaaj



G. Bedroom



8. बैठक कोठा



baiThak koThaa



H. Door



9. कायार्लय



kaaryaalay



I. Dining room



6.



याल



159



10. बेसमेन्ट



besmenT



J. Floor



11. चौक



chauk



K. Office



12. भान्सा



bhaansaa



L. Window



3. Complete the following sentences by filling in the blanks with a word from below. Check your work with the Answer Key. garaaj



Sutne koThaa



erial



chauk



bhaansaa



गराज



सुत्ने कोठा



एिरयल



चौक



भान्सा



baiThak koThaa ra khaane koThaa बैठक कोठा र खाने कोठा



1. त्यहाँ छानामा _______________ छ। tyahaa chhaanaamaa ________________ chha. 2. त्यहाँ कायार्लय र बाथरुमको बीचमा _________________ छ। tyahaa kaaryaalay ra baathroomko bichmaa _______________ chha. 3. त्यहाँ घरको अगाडी ______________ छ। tyahaa gharko agaaDi ____________ chha. 4.त्यहाँ भान्सा ________________को बीचमा छ। tyahaa bhaansaa ____________ko bichmaa chha. 4. Draw a plan of your house and tell your partner in Nepali the types of rooms you have and where they are located. Work in pairs or in small groups. 5. Match the following questions with the correct answers. Check your work with the Answer Key. A baathroom kahaa chha? बाथरूम कहाँ छ? B. bhaansaa kahaa chha?



1. ho, haamro saano garaaj chha. हो, हाॆो सानो गराज छ। 2. sutne koThaa baiTakko chheumaa chha. सुत्ने कोठा बैठकको छे उमा छ। 3. ho, haamro Thulo besmenT chha. ू हो, हाॆो ठलो बेसमेन्ट छ। 4. haamro tin sutne koThaa chha. हाॆो तीन सुत्ने कोठा छ। 5. bhaansaa pahilo tallaamaa chha. भान्सा पिहलो तल्लामा छ।



भान्सा कहाँ छ? C. suntne koThaa kahaa chha? सुत्ने कोठा कहाँ छ? D. tapaaiko khaane koThaa chha? तपाईंको खाने कोठा छ? E. tapaaiko garaaj chha? तपाईंको गराज छ?



160



F. tapaaiko katiwaTaa sutne koThaa chha? तपाईंको कितवटा सुत्ने कोठा छ? G. tapaaiko besmenT chha? तपाईंको बेसमेन्ट छ?



6. bathroom sutne koThaako chheumai chha. बाथरूम सुत्ने कोठाको छे उमै छ। 7. hoina, haamro khaane koThaa chhaina. होईन, हाॆो खाने कोठा छै न।



Note: ‘kati’ कित means how many or how much. 6. Work in pairs or in small groups. Pretend that you want to buy a house. Your classmate is a real estate agent. Make up a dialogue using the model below. MODEL: A. I want to buy a two-story house. A. malaai dui talle ghar kinna man laagchha. मलाई दई ु तल्ले घर िकन्न मन लाग्छ। B. There is a nice small house next to the market. B. bajaarko chheumaa raamro saano ghar chha? बजारको छे उमा राॆो सानो घर छ? A. How many bedrooms does the house have? A. gharmaa katiwaTaa sutne koThaa chha? घरमा कितवटा सुत्ने कोठा छ? B. It has one bedroom. B. euTaa sutne koThaa chha. एउटा सुत्ने कोठा छ। A. How many bathrooms are there in the house? A. gharmaa katiwaTaa baathroom chha? घरमा कितवटा बाथरूम छ? B. There is a big wonderful bathroom in the house. B. tyahaa gharmaa ekdam Thulo raamro baathroom chha. ू राॆो बाथरुम छ। त्यहाँ घरमा एकदम ठलो A. Is there a kitchen in the house? A. gharmaa bhaansaa koThaa chha? घरमा भान्सा कोठा छ? B. Yes, there is. B. ho, chha. हो, छ।



161



7. Familiarize yourself with these terms for furniture and furnishings. Listen and repeat after the speaker.



Bathtub baathTub



Bed ochhyaan



बाथटब



ओछ्यान



Bookcase kitaab raakhne ryaak िकताब रा ने



Chair kurshi



Closet daraaj



कुस



दराज



रयाक



Table



Refrigerator



Dresser



Lamp



Tebul टे बुल



rephrijeTar रे ृीजेटर



Dresar से सर



batti ब ी



Microwave oven mikrowev ovan माबोवेभ ओभन



Radio reDio रे िडयो



Carpet galaichaa गलचा



Sink sink िसन्क



Sofa sophaa सोफा



Stove sTobh ःटोभ



Telephone Telephone टे िलफोन



Television Telibhijan टे िलिभजन



Toilet TyaawleT यावलेट



162



Toaster TosTar टोःटर



8. Below is a chart with rooms you would find in a typical home. Under each room, list in Nepali the furniture and furnishings (from the list above) that you would expect to find there. Some items will be used more than once. bhaansaa



khaane koThaa



baiThak koThaa



sutne koThaa



baathroom



भान्सा



खाने कोठा



बैठक कोठा



सुत्ने कोठा



बाथरुम



9. Work in pairs or small groups. Using the chart above, ask each other questions, in Nepali, about the furniture in your rooms. MODEL: 1. What do you have in your kitchen? तपाईंको भान्सामा के के छ? 1. tapaaiko bhaansaamaa ke ke chha? 2. What do you have in your dining room? तपाईंको खाने कोठामा के के छ? 2. tapaaiko khaane koThaamaa ke ke chha?



I have a stove, a…. in my kitchen. मेरो भान्सामा ःटोभ __________छ। mero bhaansaamaa sTove _______ chha. I have a table, a….in my dining room. मेरो खाने कोठामा टे बल ______ छ। mero khaane koThaamaa Table _____ chha .



10. Listen and read along as a speaker talks about his home and then answer the questions about the passage. Check your work with the Answer Key. ु मेरो नाम राम हरी शमार् हो।म मेरो ौीमती र दईजना केटाकेटीहरुसंग भ पुरमा बःछ।हाॆो सानो ु



दई सुत्ने कोठा छ, एउटा ु तल्ले घर छ। मेरो बा हामीसंग बःनुहु न्छ।घरको दोॐो तल्लामा दईवटा ु कोठा मेरो छोराहरुको लािग र एउटा कोठा मेरो बाको लािग।म र मेरो ौीमती पिहलो तल्लाको सुत्ने कोठामा सुत्छौं। हाॆो दईवटा बाथरुम छ। ु



163



ू भान्सामा ःटोभ, ओभन, िसन्क र रे ृीजेटर छ।भान्सामा ठलो ू टे बुल छ जहाँ हामी हाॆो ठलो खान्छौं।हाॆो खाने कोठा छै न। हाॆो बैठक कोठामा सोफा, टे बुल, दईवटा कुस र सानो टे िलिभजन ु छ। बेलुका खाना पिछ, मेरो पिरवार र म टे िलिभजन हे छ ।



mero naam Ram Hari Sharma ho. ma mero shrimati ra duijanaa keTaakeTisanga Bhaktapurmaa baschhu. haamro saano dui talle ghar chha. mero baa haamisanga basnuhunchha. ghar dosro tallaamaa duiwaTaa sutne koThaa chha. euTaa koThaa mero chhoraaharuko laagi ra euTaa koThaa mero baako laagi. ma ra mero shrimati pahilo tallaako sutne koThaamaa sutchhau. haamro duiwaTaa baathrum chha. haamro Thulo bhaansaamaa sTov, ovan, sink ra rephrijeTar chha. bhaansaamaa Thulo Tebul chha jahaa haami khaanchhau. haamro khaane koThaa chhaina. haamro baiThak koThaamaa sophaa, Tebul, duiwaTaa kursi ra saano Telibhijan chha. belukaa khaanaa pachhi, mero pariwaar ra maTelibhijan herchhau. A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H.



Where does the family live? How many people live in the house? Is the house one story or two stories? How many bedrooms are there? How many bedrooms are on the first floor? Who sleeps there? How many bathrooms are there in the house? Where do they eat their meals? What does the family do in the evening after dinner?



164



End-of-Lesson Tasks



1. Listen to the speaker and circle the terms that you hear. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1.



सुत्ने कोठा



बाथरुम



बैठक कोठा



2.



ब ी



ओभन



ःटोभ



बाथटब



िसन्क



3.



वाइलेट



4.



सोफा



कुस



ओछ्यान



5.



गलचा



भूईं



याल



6.



कुस



से सर



रे िडयो



7.



पिहलो तल्ला



दोॐो तल्ला



एक तल्ला



8.



गाडी रा ने ठाउँ



बेसमेन्ट



छाना छत



2. You have a guest in your home. Give him or her answers in Nepali to the following questions. baathrum kahaa chha? बाथरुम कहाँ छ? bhaansaa kahaa chha? भान्सा कहाँ छ? tapaaiko katiwaTaa sutne koThaa chha? तपाईंको कितवटा सुत्ने कोठा छ? teliphon kahaa chha? टे िलफोन कहाँ छ? ke ma Telibhijan herna sakchhau. के म टे िलिभजन हे नर् सक्छु? tapaai kati baje belukaako khaanaa khaanuhunchha? तपाईं कित बजे बेलक ु ाको खाना खानुहु न्छ? tapaai bihaana kati baje uThnuhunchha? तपाईं वहान कित बजे उठ्नुहु न्छ? tapaai kati baje kaammaa jaanuhunchha? तपाईं कित बजे काममा जानुहु न्छ?



165



Vocabulary List Basement



Besment



बेसमेन्ट



Bathroom



Baathrum



बाथरूम



Bathtub



Baathtab



बाथटब



Bed



Ochhyaan



ओछ्यान



Bedroom



Sutne kothaa



सुत्ने कोठा



Bookcase



Kitaabko ryaak



िकताबको रयाक



Chair



Kurshi



कुस



Closet



Daraaj



दराज



Table



Tebul



टे बुल



Dining room



Khaane kothaa



खाने कोठा



Door



Dhokaa



ढोका



Dresser



Dresar



से सर



Floor



Bhui



भूईं



Garage



Garaaj



गराज



Kitchen



Bhaansaa



भान्सा



Lamp



Batti



ब ी



Living room



Baithak kothaa



बैठक कोठा



Microwave oven



Maaikrowebh ovan



माइबोवेभ ओवन



One-story



Ek tallaa



एक तल्ला



Oven



Ovan



ओभन



Radio



Rediyo



रे िडयो



Carpet



Galaichaa



गलचा



Second floor



Dosro tallaa



दोॐो तल्ला



Sink



Sink



िसन्क



Sofa



Sophaa



सोफा



Stove



Stobh



ःटोभ



Television



Telibhijan



टे िलिभजन



Toaster



Tostar



टोःटर



Toilet



Twaailet



वाइलेट



166



Two-story



Dui tallaa



Window



Jhyaal



दई ु तल्ला याल



167



ANSWER KEY Exercise 2 1. E



Bathroom



baathrum



बाथरुम



2. G



Bedroom



सुत्ने कोठा



3. I



Dining room



4. H



Door



sutne koThaa khaane koThaa Dhokaa



5. J



Floor



bhui



भूईं



6. L



Window



jhyaal



याल



7. C



Garage



garaaj



गराज



8. D



Living room



बैठक कोठा



9. K



Office



baiThak koThaa kaaryaalay



10. A



Basement



besmenT



बेसमेन्ट



11. B



Yard



chauk



चौक



12. F



Kitchen



bhaansaa



भान्सा



खाने कोठा ढोका



कायार्लय



Exercise 3 1. छानामा एिरयल छ। chaanaamaa erial chha. 2. कायार्लय र बाथरुमको बीचमा सुत्ने कोठा छ। kaaryaalay ra baathrumko bichaamaa sutne koThaa chha. 3. घरको अगाडी चौक छ। gharko agaaDi chauk chha. 4.बैठक कोठा र खाने कोठाको बीचमा भान्सा कोठा छ। baiThak koThaa ra khaane koThaako bichmaa bhaansaa chha. garage



bedroom



antenna



yard



kitchen



the living room and the dining room



1. There is a/an _______________on the roof. 2. There is a __________________between the office and the bathroom. 3. There is a _________________ in front of the house. 4. There is a kitchen between __________________________.



168



Exercise 5 A B C D E G F



6 5 2 7 1 3 4



Exercise 10 My name is Ram Hari Sharma. I live with my wife and two children in Bhaktapur. We have a small two-story house. My father lives with us. The house has two bedrooms on the second floor; one for our two sons and one for my father. My wife and I sleep in the bedroom on the first floor. We have two bathrooms. We have a large kitchen with a stove, oven, sink and refrigerator. In the kitchen there is a large table where we eat. We do not have a dining room. Our living room has a sofa, a table, two chairs, and a small television. In the evening after dinner, my family and I watch television. A.Where does the family live? Bhaktapur A. पिरवार कहाँ बःछन ्? भ पुर pariwaar kahaa baschhan? Bhaktapur. B. How many people live in the house? five B. घरमा कितजना मान्छे बःछन।् पाँच gharmaa katijanaa maanchhe baschhan? paach C. Is the house one story or two stories? two-story C. घर एक तल्ला िक दई ु तल्ला छ? दई ु तल्ला ghar ek talaa ki dui talaa chha? dui tallaaa D. How many bedrooms are there? three D. कितवटा सुत्ने कोठा छ? तीनवटा katiwaTaa sutne koThaa chha? tinwaTaa E. How many bedrooms are on the first floor? Who sleeps there? one, husband and wife E.पिहलो तल्लामा कितवटा सुत्ने कोठा छ?त्यहाँ को को सुत्छन।् एक, ौीमान ् र



ौीमती pahilo talaamaa katiwaTaa sutne koThaa chha? tyahaa ko ko sutchhan? ek, shrimaan ra shrimati F. How many bathrooms are there in the house? two F. त्यो घरमा कितवटा बाथरुम छ? दई ु tyo gharmaa katiwaTaa baathrum chha? dui G. Where do they eat their meals? in the kitchen G. उनीहरु उनीहरुको खाना कहाँ खान्छन ्? भान्सामा 169



uniharu uniharuko khaanaa kahaa khaanchhan? bhaansaamaa H. What does the family do in the evening after dinner? watch television H. खाना खाएपिछ पिरवार के गछर् न ्?टे िलिभजन हे छर्न khaanaa khaaepachhi parwaar ke garchhan? Telibhijan herchhan End of Lesson Exercise 1 1. बाथरुम



baathroom



2. ब ी



batti



3. िसन्क



sink



4. ओछ्यान



ochhyaan



5.



याल



6. रे िडयो



jhyaal reDiyo



7. पिहलो तल्ला



pahilo tallaaa



8. छाना / छत



chhaanaa/ chhat



170



Lesson 11 Weather and Seasons मौसम र याम musam ra yam



This lesson will introduce you to: - Vocabulary related to weather, seasons, and climate. - How to ask for and give temperatures. - How to understand weather reports. - How to discuss the weather and climate in Nepal.



1. Listen to the weather terms as they are read aloud. Repeat the weather terms after the speaker.



Rain barshaa बषार्



Sun surya सूयर्



Wind haawaa हावा



Snow hiu िहउँ



Fog kuhiro कुिहरो



Clouds baadal बादल



171



2. Match the pictures with the correct weather term. Check your answers with the Answer Key.



हावा



haawaa सूयर्



surya बषार्



barshaa िहउँ



hiu



3. What do you hear? Circle the terms you hear spoken by the native speaker. Check your work in the Answer Key. PLAY AUDIO बषार्



सूयर्



िहउँ



हावा



बादल



कुिहरो



4. Familiarize yourself with the following terms related to the weather. Pause the recording as many times as you need. Repeat after the speaker. Temperature



taapkram



तापबम



Fahrenheit



pherenhaait



फेरे नहाइट



Celsius



celsius



सेलिसयस



Weather



mausam



मौसम



Weather forecast



mausami anumaan



मौसमी अनुमान



Weather report



mausamko bibaran/ report



मौसमको ववरण / रपोटर्



Winter



jaado mahinaa / hiud



जाडो मिहना / िहउँ द



Spring



basant



बसन्त



172



Summer



garmi



गम



Fall



sharad



शरद



Clear



shaphaa



सफा



Cloudy



baadal laagyo



बादल लाग्यो



Overcast



badali laagnu



बदिल लाग्नु



Windy



haawaa laagyo



हावा लाग्यो



Cold



jaado



जाडो



Low temperature



nyuntam taapakram



न्यूनतम तापबम



Freezing



nikai jaado



िनकै जाडो



Below freezing



thihiraaune jaado



िठिहराउने जाडो



Warm



nyaano



न्यानो



High temperature



adhiktam taapkram



अिधकतम तापबम



Hot



garmi



गम



Dry



sukkhaa



सुक्खा



Sunny



ghaam laagyo



घाम लाग्यो



Rainy



पानी पा यो Note: Future Form: “paani parchha” (it will rain) and past form: “paani paryo.”



पानी पनुर्



paani paryo



paani parnu



to rain



जाडो लाग्नु



िहउँ पनुर्



hiu parnu



to snow



घाम लाग्नु



असीना पनुर्



asinaa parnu



to hail



हावा लाग्नु



शीत पनुर् तुसारो पनुर्



shit parnu



to form dew



बादल लाग्नु



tushaaro parnu



to frost



कुिहरो लाग्नु



सुक्खा पनुर्



sukkhaa parnu



to drought



गम लाग्नु



वषार् याम



barshaa yaam



raining season



173



गम याम



jaaDo laagnu



to feel cold



ghaam laagnu



to be sunny



haawaa laagnu



to be windy



baadal laagnu



to be cloudy



kuhiro laagnu



to be foggy



garmi laagnu



I feel hot/ I am hot



garmi yaam



summer



हावापानी



haawaapaani



climate



जाडो याम



मौसम



mausam



weather



It’s raining now.



ahile paani paryo.



अिहले पानी प यो।



Now it is not raining.



ahile paani pareko chhaina.



अिहले पानी परे को



It rained yesterday.



hijo paani paryo.



िहजो पानी प यो।



It did not rain yesterday. It will rain tomorrow.



hijo paani parena.



िहजो पानी परे न।



bholi paani parchha.



भोिल पानी पछर् ।



It will not rain tomorrow.



bholi paani pardaina.



भोिल पानी पदन।



It’s sunny now.



ahile ghaam laagyo.



अिहले घाम



आितार्



jaaDo yaam



winter



aadrataa



Humidity



छै न।



लाग्यो। Now it’s not sunny. It was sunny yesterday. It was not sunny yesterday. It will be sunny tomorrow. It will not be sunny tomorrow.



ahile ghaam laageko chhaina.



अिहले घाम



hijo ghaam laagyo.



िहजो घाम लाग्यो।



hijo ghaam laagena.



िहजो घाम लागेन।



bholi ghaam laagchha. bholi ghaam laagdaina.



भोिल घाम लाग्छ।



लागेको छै न।



भोिल घाम लाग्दै न।



5. Listen to the typical questions and responses about the weather. Repeat them after the speaker. - How is the weather in December?



decembermaa mausam kasto hunchha?



- It’s cold and snowy.



jaado hunchha ra hiu parchha.



- How is the weather in April?



aprilmaa mausam kasto hunchha?



- It’s warm and clear.



nyaano ra saphaa hunchha.



174



िडसेम्बरमा मौसम कःतो हन्छ ु ?



जाडो हन्छ र िहउँ पछर् । ु अ ूलमा मौसम कःतो हन्छ ु ? न्यानो र सफा हन्छ। ु



- How is the weather in July?



julymaa mausam kasto hunchha?



- It’s sunny and hot.



garmi hunchha ra ghaam laagchha.



- How is the weather in October?



octobermaa mausam kasto hunchha?



- It’s windy and rainy.



haawaa laagchha ra paani parchha.



जुलाईमा मौसम कःतो हन्छ ु ? गम हन्छ र घाम लाग्छ। ु



ु अक्टबरमा मौसम कःतो हन्छ ु ? हावा लाग्छ र पानी पछर् ।



6. Read the following short dialogues on weather and match each one to a picture below. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. आजको मौसम कःतो छ?



aajako mausam kasto chha?



बदिल छ र पानी पद छ।



badali chha ra paani pardaichha. 2. तापबम कःतो छ?



taapkram kasto chha?



अठाइस िडमी सेलिसयस छ ।धेरै न्यानो र सफा छ ।



aThaais Degree Celsius chha .dherai nyaano ra saphaa chha. 3. यहाँको मौसम कःतो छ?



tyahaako mausam kasto chha? िहउँ पदछ र िठिहराउने जाडो छ।



hiu pardaichha ra Thihiraaune jaaDo chha. 4. घाम लाग्यो?



ghaam laagyo? होईन, कुिहरो लाग्यो र जाडो छ।



hoina, kuhiro laagyo ra jaaDo chha.



175



A #___________



B #___________



C # _________



D # ___________



7. Translate the following passages into English. Work with a partner and recite the passages in Nepali. - जनवरीमा मौसम कःतो हन्छ ु ?



Januarymaa mausam kasto hunchha?



- जनवरीमा जाडो हन्छ र कुिहरो लाग्छ। ु



Januarymaa jaaDo hunchha ra kuhiro laagchha.



- मेमा मौसम कःतो हन्छ ु ?



Maymaa mausam kasto hunchha?



- मेमा गम र सुक्खा हन्छ। ु



Maymaa garmi ra sukkhaa hunchha.



- अगःतमा मौसम कःतो हन्छ ु ?



Augustmaa mausam kasto hunchha?



- अगःतमा पानी पछर् र गम हन्छ। ु



Augustmaa paani parchha ra garmi hunchha.



- नभेम्बरमा मौसम कःतो हन्छ ु ?



Novembermaa mausam kasto hunchha



- नभेम्बरमा जाडो हन्छ र िहउँ पछर् । ु



Novembermaa jaaDo hunchha ra hiu parchha.



176



8. Work with a partner. Put the given words in the correct order so that you can ask a question and give an answer about the weather in different places. Check your work with the Answer Key. MODEL: मा/ मुःतांग/पानी पछर् / िडसेम्बर/ पदन/ िहउँ पछर् / मा maa/Mustang/paani parchha/December/ pardaina /hiu parchha/maa Student 1: िडसेम्बरमा मुःतांगमा पानी पछर् ? Decembermaa Mustangmaa paani parchha? Student 2: होईन, िडसेम्बरमा मुःतांगमा िहउँ पछर् । Hoina, Decembermaa Mustangmaa hiu parchha. 1) तराई/ गम / मा / हो/ जुन/ मा/ र / घाम लाग्छ/हन्छ। ु Tarai/garmi/maa/ho/June/maa/ra/ghaam laagchha/ hunchha. 2)पोखरा/ मा/ जाडो हन्छ / नभेम्बरमा/ न्यानो हदै / हावा लाग्छ ु ु न/ र/ हन्छ ु Pokhara/maa/jaaDo hunchha/ Novembermaa/ nyaano hundaina/ra/hunchha/ haawaa laagchha. 3) माचर्/हो/ पानी पछर् / मा/ काठमान्डू मा March/ho/paani parchha/maa/Kathmandumaa



9. Listen to the speaker and mark the statement that you hear. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. A. से टे म्बरमा मौसम सफा हन्छ र घाम लाग्छ । ु B. से टे म्बरमा मौसम न्यानो हन्छ र पानी पछर् । ु C. से टे म्बरमा मौसम जाडो हन्छ र कुिहरो लाग्छ। ु 2. A. आजको मौसम कःतो छ? आज बाइस िडमी सेलिसयस छ। B. आजको मौसम कःतो छ? आज बाइस िडमी फेरे नहाइट छ। C. आजको मौसम कःतो छ? आज बाइस िडमी छ। 3.



A. बसन्तऋतुमा जाडो हन्छ र घाम लाग्छ । ु ? होईन, न्यानो हन्छ ु B. बसन्तऋतुमा पानी पछर् ? होईन,न्यानो हन्छ र घाम लाग्छ। ु C. बसन्तऋतुमा हावा लाग्छ? होईन, न्यानो हन्छ र घाम लाग्छ। ु



177



4. A. भोलीको अनुमािनत मौसम कःतो हन्छ ु ? बदिल लाग्छ र जाडो हन्छ। ु B. भोलीको अनुमािनत मौसम कःतो हन्छ ु ? बादल लाग्छ र जाडो हन्छ। ु C. भोलीको अनुमािनत मौसम कःतो हन्छ ु ? घाम लाग्छ र जाडो हन्छ। ु 5. A. गम मिहनाह मा गम हन्छ र पानी पछर् । िहउँ दमा जाडो हन्छ र िहउँ पछर् । ु ु B. गम मिहनाह मा गम हन्छ र सूक्खा हन्छ। िहउँ दमा जाडो हन्छ र िहउँ पछर् । ु ु ु C. गम मिहनाह मा गम हन्छ र घाम लाग्छ। िहउँ दमा जाडो हन्छ र िहउँ पछर् । ु ु



10. Familiarize yourself with the following terms related to weather and natural disasters. Pause the recording as many times as you need. Repeat after the speaker.



Lightning bijuli chamkanu बजुली चमक्नु



Thunderstorm gaDyaang guDung garnu गड्यांगगुडूंग गनुर्



Hurricane thulo aadhiberi ू ठलो आँधीवेरी



Tornado aadhiberi आँधीवेरी



Flood baaDhi बाढी 178



11. What do you hear? Circle the three terms you hear spoken by the native speaker. Check your answers with the Answer Key. PLAY AUDIO गड्यांगगुडूंग



आँधीवेरी



ू ठलो आँधीवेरी



बजुली चमक्नु



बाढी



12. Answer the questions in Nepali. Check your work with the Answer Key.



A. Is it a thunderstorm? gaDyaang guDung garyo? गड्यांगगुडूंग ग यो? - No, it’s …….. hoina, gareko chhaina. होईन, गरे को छै न।



B. Is it a flood? baaDhi aayo? बाढी आयो? No, it’s …….. . hoina, aaeko chhaina. होईन, आएको छै न।



D. Is it a tornado? aadhiberi aayo? आँधीवेरी आयो? - No, it’s …….. . hoina,aaeko chhaina. आएको छै न।



C. Is it a hurricane? Thulo aadhiberi aayo? ू ठलो आँधीवेरी आयो? - No, it’s …….. . hoina, aaeko chhaina. होईन,आएको छै न।



E. Is it lightning? bijuli chamkyo? बजुली चमक्यो? - No, it’s ……. . hoina, bijuli chamkeko chhaina. होईन, बजुली चमकेको छै न।



179



End-of-Lesson Tasks



1. Listen to the following weather report for four different cities in Nepal. Fill in the chart below with the weather and temperature for each city. Pause or replay the audio if needed. Check your work with the Answer Key. City 1 City 2 City 3 City 4



City



Weather



1. 2. 3. 4.



180



Temperature



2. Listen to the following weather report and answer the questions below. Check your work with the Answer Key. Play Audio 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.



What city is the weather report for? What is the date? What day of the week is this? What is the forecast for today? What will be the high and low temperatures for today? What is the forecast for tomorrow? What will be the high and low temperatures for tomorrow? What time of the day tomorrow is the high temperature expected? Are the temperatures in Fahrenheit or Celsius, or was it not mentioned?



181



Vocabulary List Weather



Mausam



मौसम



Weather forecast



Mausamko anumaan



मौसमको अनुमान



Weather report



Mausami bibran/ report



मौसमी ववरण/ रपोटर्



Rain



Barshaa



बषार्



Sun



Surya



सूयर्



Wind



Haawaa



हावा



Snow



Hiu



िहउँ



Fog



Kuhiro



कुिहरो



Lightning



Bijuli chamkanu



Thunderstorm



Gadhyaangudung garnu



गड्यांगगुडूंग गनुर्



Tornado



Aadhiberi



आँधीवेरी



Hurricane clouds



Thulo aadhiberi baadal



ू ठलो आँधीवेरी बादल



Rainy



Paani paryo



पानी प यो



Sunny



Ghaam laagyo



घाम लाग्यो



Cloudy



Baadal laagyo



बादल लाग्यो



Freezing



Nikai jaado



िनकै जाडो



Clear



Shaphaa



सफा



Temperature



Taapkram



तापबम



Fahrenheit



Pherenhaait



फेरे नहाइट



Celsius



Selsius



सेलिसयस



Hot



Garmi



गम



Cold



Jaado



जाडो



Warm



Nyaano



न्यानो



Dry



Sukkhaa



सूक्खा



Overcast



Badali laagnu



बदिल लाग्नु



Windy



Haawaa laagnu



हावा लाग्नु



Winter



Hiud



िहउँ द



Spring



Basant



बसन्त



Summer



Garmi mahinaa



गम मिहना



Fall



Sharad



बजुली चमक्नु



शरद



182



High



Uchcha



उ च



Low



Nyun



न्यून



183



184



ANSWER KEY Exercise 2 haawaa हावा surya सूयर्



Wind Sun



barshaa बषार् hiu िहउँ



Rain Snow



Exercise 3 सूयर्



A. Sun



surya



B. Wind



haawaa हावा baadal बादल



C. Clouds Exercise 6 A B C D



4 1 2 3



It’s foggy and cold. It is overcast and raining. It is 28 degrees Celsius! It is very warm and clear. It’s snowing and below freezing.



Exercise 7 How is the weather in January? January is cold and foggy. How is the weather in May? May is hot and dry. How is the weather in August? August in rainy and hot. How is the weather in November? November is cold and snowy. Exercise 8 1) Is it hot and sunny in Biratnagar in June? Yes, it is hot and sunny in Biratnagar in June. Biratnagarmaa Junemaa garmi hunchha ra ghaam laagchha? Ho, Biratnagarmaa Junemaa ghaam laagchha ra garmi hunchha. बराटनगरमा जुनमा गम हुन्छ र घाम लाग्छ? हो, बराटनगरमा जुनमा घाम लाग्छ र गम हन्छ। ु



185



2) Is it warm in Pokhara in November? No, it is cold and windy. Pokharamaa Novembermaa nyaano hunchha? hoina, jaaDo hunchha ra haawaa laagchha. पोखरामा नभेम्बरमा न्यानो हन्छ र हावा लाग्छ। ु ? होईन, जाडो हन्छ ु 3) Is it rainy in Pokhara in March? Yes, it is rainy in Pokhara in March. Marchmaa Pokharamaa paani parchha? ho, Marchmaa Pokharamaa paani parchha. माचर्मा पोखरामा पानी पछर् ? हो, माचर्मा पोखरामा पानी पछर् । Exercise 9 1. A. से टे म्बरमा मौसम सफा हन्छ र घाम लाग्छ । ु Septembermaa mausam saphaa hunchha ra ghaam laagchha. B. से टे म्बरमा मौसम न्यानो हन्छ र पानी पछर् । ु Septembermaa mausam nyaano hunchha ra paani parchha. C. से टे म्बरमा मौसम जाडो हन्छ र कुिहरो लाग्छ। ु Septembermaa mausam jaaDo hunchha ra kuhiro laagchha. 2. A. आजको मौसम कःतो छ? आज बाइस िडमी सेलिसयस छ। aajako mausam kasto chha? aaja baais Degree Celsius chha. B.आजको मौसम कःतो छ? आज बाइस िडमी फेरे नहाइट छ। aajako mausam kasto chha? aaja baais Degree pherenhaaiT chha. C. आजको मौसम कःतो छ? आज बाइस िडमी छ। aajako mausam kasto chha? aaja baais Degrees chha. 3. A. बसन्तऋतुमा जाडो हन्छ र घाम लाग्छ । ु ? होईन, न्यानो हन्छ ु basantritumaa jaaDo hunchha? hoina, nyaano hunchha ra ghaam laagchha. B. बसन्तऋतुमा पानी पछर् ? होईन,न्यानो हन्छ र घाम लाग्छ। ु basantritumaa paani parchha? hoina, nyaano hunchha ra ghaam laagchha. C. बसन्तऋतुमा हावा लाग्छ? होईन, न्यानो हन्छ र घाम लाग्छ। ु basantritumaa haawaa laagchha? hoina, nyaano hunchha ra ghaam laagchha. 4. A. भोलीको अनुमािनत मौसम कःतो हन्छ ु ? बदिल लाग्छ र जाडो हन्छ। ु bholiko anumaanit mausam kasto hunchha? badali laagchha ra jaaDo hunchha. B. भोलीको अनुमािनत मौसम कःतो हन्छ ु ? बादल लाग्छ र जाडो हन्छ। ु bholiko anumaanit mausam kasto hunchha? baadal laagchha ra jaaDo hunchha. C. भोलीको अनुमािनत मौसम कःतो हन्छ ु ? घाम लाग्छ र जाडो हुन्छ। bholiko anumaanit mausam kasto hunchha? ghaam laagchha ra jaaDo hunchha. 5. A. गम मिहनाह मा गम हन्छ र पानी पछर् । िहउँ दमा जाडो हन्छ र िहउँ पछर् । ु ु garmi mahinaaharumaa garmi hunchha ra paani parchha. hiudmaa jaaDo hunchha ra hiu parchha. 186



B. गम मिहनाह मा गम हन्छ र सूक्खा हन्छ। िहउँ दमा जाडो हन्छ र िहउँ पछर् । ु ु ु garmi mahinaaharumaa garmi hunchha ra sukkhaa hunchha. hiudmaa jaaDo hunchha ra hiu parchha. C. गम मिहनाह मा गम हन्छ र घाम लाग्छ। िहउँ दमा जाडो हन्छ र िहउँ पछर् । ु ु garmi mahinaaharumaa garmi hunchha ra ghaam laagchha. hiudmaa jaaDo hunchha ra hiu parchha. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.



B B A C C



The weather in September is rainy and warm. What is the temperature today? It is 22 degrees Fahrenheit. Is it cold in spring? No, it’s warm and sunny. What is the weather forecast for tomorrow? Sunny and cold. The summers are hot and sunny. The winters are cold and snowy.



Exercise 11 गड्यांगगुडूंग गनुर्



lightning



gaDyaang guDung garnu bijuli chamkanu



flood



baaDhi



बाढी



thunderstorm



बजुली चमक्नु



Exercise 12 A. Is it a thunderstorm? No, it is lightning. gaDyaan guDung garyo? hoina, bijuli chamkyo. गड्यांग गुडूंग ग यो? होईन, बजुली चमक्यो। B. Is it a flood? No, it is a tornado. baaDhi aayo? hoina aadhiberi aayo. बाढी आयो? होईन, आँिधवेरी आयो। C. Is it a hurricane? No, it is a thunderstorm. Thulo aadhiberi aayo? hoina, gaDyaang guDung garyo. ू ठलो आिधँवेरी आयो? होईन, गड्यांग गुडूंग ग यो। D. Is it a tornado? No, it is a flood. aadhiberi aayo? hoina, baaDhi aayo. आँिधवेरी आयो? होईन, बाढी आयो। E. Is it lightning? No, it is a hurricane. bijuli chamkyo? hoina, Thulo aadhiberi aayo. ू बजुली चमक्यो? होईन, ठलो आँिधवेरी आयो।



187



End of Lesson Exercise 1 1.



City Kathmandu



2.



Bhairahawa



Weather Cloudy 50 % chance of rain Sunny and fair sky



3.



Biratnagar



Sunny and hot



4.



Pokhara



Raining Thunderstorm



Temperature Low 9 degrees High 18 degrees Low 13 degrees High 26 degrees Low 14 degrees High 23 degrees Low 5 degrees High 12 degrees



This is the weather report for Kathmandu for Friday the 24th of November. The low temperature for today will be nine degrees Celsius with a high temperature of 18 degrees. Today’s weather will be mostly cloudy with a chance of rain at five percent. शुबबार चौबीस (२४) तारीख नभेम्बर, यो काठमान्डू को मौसमी रपोटर् हो।आजको न्यूनतम तापबम नौ (९) िडमी सेलिसयस र अिधकतम तापबम अठार (१८) िडमी।आजको मौसम धेरैजसो बादल लाग्छ र पचास (५०) ूितशत पानी पन संभावना छ। shukrabaar chaubis taarikh Novermber , yo Kathmanduko mausami report ho. aajako nyuntam taapakram nau Degrees selsius ra adhiktam taapkram aThaahra Degrees. aajako mausam dheraijaso baadal laagchha ra pachaas pratisat paani parne sambhaabnaa chha. This is the weather report for Bhairahba for Sunday the 20th of November. Today’s weather will be sunny and fair sky. The low temperature for today will be 13 degrees Celsius with a high temperature of 26 degrees. Tomorrow’s weather will be sunny and warm. आइतबार बीस (२०) तारीख नभेम्बर,यो भैरहवाको मौसमी रपोटर् हो।आजको मौसम सफा हने ु छ र घाम



लाग्छ।



आजको न्यूनतम तापबम ते॑ (१३) िडमी सेलिसयस र अिधकतम तापबम छबीस ( २६) िडमी।भोिलको मौसम न्यानो हने ु छ र घाम लाग्ने छ।



aaitabaar bis taarikh November, yo Bhairahbako mausami report ho. aajako mausam saphaa hunechha ra ghaam laagchha. aajako nyuntam taapkram terah Degrees selsius ra adhiktam taapkram chhabis Degrees. bholiko mausam nyaano hune chha ra ghaam laagne chha. This is the weather report for Biratnagar for Monday the 25th November. Today’s weather will be sunny and hot in the afternoon. Tomorrow’s weather will be mostly fair sky and hot in the afternoon. The low temperature for today will be 14 degrees Celsius with a high temperature 23 degrees.



188



सोमबार पचीस (२५) तारीख नभेम्बर, यो बराटनगरको मौसमी रे पोटर् हो। आजको मौसम घाम लाग्ने छ र िदउँ सो गम हने ु छ। भोिल धेरैजसो आकाश सफा हने ु छ र



िदउँ सो गम हने ु छ।आजको न्यूनतम



तापबम चौध (१४) िडमी सेलिसयस र अिधकतम तापबम तेइस (२३) िडमी।



sombaar pachis taarikh Novermber, yo Biratnagarko mausami report ho. aajako mausam ghaam laagne chha ra diuso garmi hune chha. bholi dheraijaso aakaash saphaa hune chha ra diu garmi hune chha. aajako nyuntam taapkram chaidha Degrees ra adhiktam taapkram teis Degrees. This is the weather report for Pokhara for Tuesday the 30th November. Today’s weather will be raining with a chance of a thunderstorm in the evening. Tomorrow’s weather will be cloudy in the morning and a chance of rain in the evening. The low temperature for today will be five degrees Celsius with a high temperature of twelve degrees. मंगलबार तीस (३०) तारीख नभेम्बर ,यो पोखराको मौसमी रपोटर् हो। आजको मौसम पानी पन छ र बेलुकाितर गड्यांग गुडूंग गन संभावना छ। भोिलको मौसम वहान बादल लाग्ने छ र बेलक ु ाितर पानी पन



संभावना छ।आजको न्यूनतम तापबम पाँच (५) िडमी सेलिसयस र अिधकतम तापबम बा॑ (१२) िडमी। mangalbaar tis (30) taarikh November, yo Pokharako mausami report ho. aajako mausam paani parne chha ra belukaatira gaDyaang guDung garne sambhaabnaa chha.bholiko mausam bihaana baadal laagne chha ra belukaatira paani parne sambhaabnaa chha. aajako nyuntam taapkram paach Degrees selsius ra adhiktam taapkram baarah Degrees. This is the Exercise 2 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.



What city is the weather report for? Pokhara. What is the date? April 21. What day of the week is this? Friday. What is the forecast for today? Rainy with a chance of a thunderstorm this evening. What will be the high and low temperatures for today? High of 18 and low of 8. What is the forecast for tomorrow? Cloudy in the morning but sunny in the afternoon. What will be the high and low temperatures for tomorrow? High of 22 and low of 12. What time of the day tomorrow is the high temperature expected? 3:00 pm. Are the temperatures in Fahrenheit, Celsius, or was it not mentioned? Celsius.



Weather report for Pokhara for Friday the 21st of April: Today’s weather will be rainy with a chance of a thunderstorm this evening. Tomorrow’s weather will be cloudy in the morning but sunny in the afternoon. It will also be windy. The low temperature for today will be 8 degrees Celsius with a high temperature of 18. Saturday’s high temperature will be 22 at 3:00 in the afternoon and the low temperature will be 12 degrees.



189



शुबबार २१(एक्काइस)तारीख अूील, यो पोखराको मौसमी ववरण हो।आज पानी पछर् र बेलक ु ा गड्यांगगुडूङग गन संभावना छ।भोली वहान बादल लाग्छ तर िदउँ सो घाम लाग्छ।हावा पिन लाग्छ।आजको न्यूनतम तापबम आठ िडमी सेलिसयस र अिधकतम तापबम अठार िडमी छ।शिनबार तीन बजे िदऊँसो अिधकतम



तापबम बाइस र न्यूनतम तापबम बा॑ िडमी हने ु छ।



shukrabaar ekkaais taarikh yo Pokharako mausami riporT ho. aaja paani parchha ra belukaa gaDyaanguDung garne sambhaawanaa chha.bholi bihaana baadal laagchha tara diuso ghaam laachha. haawaa pani laagchha. aajako nyuntam taapakram aaTh degree celsius ra adhiktam taapakram aThaarah degree celsius chha . shanibaar diuso tin baje adhiktam taapakram baais degree ra nyuntam taapakram baarah degree hunechha .



190



Lesson 12 Personal Appearance य ीगत आकृ ित byaktigat aakriti



This lesson will introduce you to: - Physical features (hair color, weight, height, etc.). - Articles of clothing. - Colors. - Description of a person’s physical appearance, including clothing. - Appropriate ways to ask about someone’s appearance.



1. Look at the pictures below and familiarize yourself with the new vocabulary. Listen to the descriptions of people’s appearances.



Tall aglo अग्लो



Short chhoTo छोटो



Short hocho होचो



Heavy moTO मोटो



Long laamo लामो



Thin dublo दब्लो ु



Blond sunaulo सुनौलो



191



Young saano सानो



Red raato रातो



Old buDho बुढो



Gray phuleko फुलेको



2. Look at the pictures below and listen to the descriptions of people’s appearances.



Nepali woman in traditional Sherpa dress known as “bakhu.”



Nepali man in traditional daura suruwal.



This woman is young. yo swaasni maanchhe jawaan hunuhunchha. यो ःवाःनी मान्छे जवान हनु ु हु न्छ। She is tall and thin. wahaa aglo ra dublo hunuhunchha.



This man is also young. yo logne maanchhe pani jawaan hunuhunchha. यो लोग्ने मान्छे पिन जवान हनु ु हु न्छ। He has an average height and medium frame. wahaa saamaanya uchaai ra madhyam bnauTko hunuhunchha. वहाँ सामान्य उचाई र म यम बनौटको हनु ु हु न्छ।



वहाँ अग्लो र दब्लो हनु ु ु हु न्छ। Tall girl



agli keTi



अग्ली केटी



Tall boy



aglo keTaa



अग्लो केटा



Beautiful girl



raamri keTi



राॆी केटी



Short man



hocho logne maanchhe



होचो लोग्ने मान्छे



Thin woman



dubli aaimaai



दब्ली आईमाई ु



Small girl



saani keTi



सानी केटी



Small boy



saano keTaa



सानो केटा



Old man



buDho



बुढो



Old woman



buDhi



बुढी



Young man



yuwaa/ jawaan



यूवा/जवान



Young woman



yuwati / jawaan



यूवती/ जवान



192



3. Look at the pictures below and familiarize yourself with the new vocabulary. Listen to the speaker and repeat as you follow along in the workbook. sunaulo kapaal



सुनौलो कपाल



Brown



khairo kapaal



खैरो कपाल



Red



raato kapaal



रातो कपाल



Gray



phuleko kapaal



फुलेको कपाल



Curly



ghumrieko kapaal



घुमिरएको कपाल



Straight



sidhaa kapaal



सीधा कपाल



Hair: Blond



This young woman has short brown hair. yo swaasni maanchheko chhoTo khairo kapaal chha.



This young man also has short brown hair. yo logne maanchheko pani chhoTo khairo kapaal chha. यो लोग्ने मान्छे को पिन छोटो खैरो कपाल छ।



यो ःवाःनी मान्छे को छोटो खैरो कपाल छ।



The young girl has long blond hair. saani keTiko laamo sunaulo kapaal chha. सानी केटीको लामो सुनौलो कपाल छ।



The old man has gray hair. buDho maanchheko phuleko kapaal chha. बुढो मान्छे को फुलेको कपाल छ।



193



4. Work with a partner. Look at the pictures and describe each of the people. See if your partner can correctly identify the body type and their color and style of hair from your description.



5. Look at the pictures below and familiarize yourself with the new vocabulary. Listen to the speaker and repeat as you follow along in the workbook.



Ear kaan कान



Nose naak नाक



Light Skin halkaa chhaalaa हल्का छाला



Eye aakhaa आँखा



Mouth mukh मुख



Medium Skin madhyam /majhaulaa chhaalaa म यम /मझौला छाला



194



Glasses chashmaa चँमा



Beard daarhi दा॑ी



Dark Skin saawalaa /gahugoro chhaalaa साँवला /गहँु गोरो छाला



6. From the lists above, choose the characteristics and adjectives used to describe each feature. Fill in the chart below in Nepali. Check your answers with the Answer Key.



Hair



Skin



Height



Frame



Facial Features



7. In each line of text below, cross out the term that does not logically belong. Check your work with the Answer Key.



िनलो



हिरयो



nilo



hariyo



dublo



khairo



hocho



chashmaa



aglo



saamaany



होचो



चँमा



दब्लो ु



खैरो



अग्लो



सामान्य



नाक



दा॑ी



मोटो



आँखा



naak



सुनौलो



daarhi



खरानीरं ग /फुलेको



moTo



aakhaa



sunaulo



kharaanirang/ phuleko



uchaai



उचाई



गहँु गोरो



gahu goro



8. Listen to the descriptions of different people’s appearances while reading the following dialogues. Answer the questions under the box. Check your answers with the Answer Key. 1. सीताको कपाल कःतो छ? - Sitako kapaal kasto chha? वहाँको कपाल खैरो छ। - wahaako kapaal kairo chha. सीताको कपाल लामो क छोटो छ? - Sitako kapaal laamo ki chhoTo chha? छोटो छ। - chhoTo chha. सीताको कपाल घुमिरएको क सीधा छ? - Sitako kapaal ghumrieko ki sidhaa chha? सीधा छ। - sidhaa chha. 195



2. राम चँमा लगाउनुहन्छ? - Ram chashmaa lagaaunuhunchha? होईन, वहाँ चँमा लगाउनुहु न्न। - hoina, wahaa chashmaa lagaaunuhunna. रामको आँखा कःतो छ? - Ramko aakhaa kasto chha? वहाँको आँखा िनलो छ। - wahaako aakhaa nilo chha. 3. हरी अग्लो हनु ु हन्छ ु ? - Hari aglo hunuhunchha? वहाँको उचाई सामान्य छ । - wahaako uchaai saamaanya chha. वहाँ मोटो हनु ु हु न्छ? - wahaa moTo hunuhunchha? होईन, वहाँ दब्लो हनु ु ु हु न्छ। - hoina, wahaa dublo hunuhunchha.



Questions: 1. How many people were described? 2. What were their names? 3. What kind of hair does Sita have? 4. Does Ram wear glasses? 5. Does Ram have brown eyes? 6. Is Hari short and heavy?



9. Familiarize yourself with the new vocabulary on clothing and colors. Listen and repeat after the speaker. Black



kaalo



कालो



Gray



phuleko



फुलेको



Green



hariyo



हिरयो



Red



raato



रातो



Blue



nilo



िनलो



Yellow



pahelo



पहें लो



White



seto



सेतो 196



Red Coat raato koT रातो कोट



Gray Suit kharaanirangko suT खरानीरं गको सुट



Tan Pants halkaa khairo paainT हल्का खैरो पाइन्ट



Blue Jeans nilo jins िनलो जन्स



Green Jacket hariyo jyaakeT हिरयो याकेट



Brown Sweater khairo swiTer खैरो ःवीटर



Orange Shirt suntalaarangko kamij सुन्तलारं गको कमीज



Blue T-Shirt nilo Ti-shirT िनलो टी सटर्



Green Skirt hariyo skarT हिरयो ःकटर्



Purple Dress pyaajirangko Dress याजीरं गको से स



White Sweat Suit seto haaph baahulaako suT सेतो हाफ बाहलाको सुट ु



Yellow Shorts pahelo haaph paainT पहें लो हाफ पाइन्ट



Brown Boots khairo buT खैरो बुट



Blue Shoes nilo juttaa िनलो जु ा



Black Hat kaalo Topi कालो टोपी



197



Gray Uniform kharaanirangko unifarm खरानीरं गको यूनीफमर्



Black Socks kaalo mojaa कालो मोजा



White Socks seto mojaa सेतो मोजा



10. Match each description with the corresponding picture and fill in the blank with the correct letter. Note that there could be more than one match for each description. Check your work with the Answer Key.



A



B



C



D



E



1.___लिलता बुढी ःवाःनी मान्छे हनु ु हु न्छ।



Lalita buDhi swaasni maanchhe hunuhunchha.



3.___गीताको कपाल लामो खैरो छ।



Gitako kapaal laamo khairo chha.



2.___ँयामको कपाल सुनौलोरं गको छ।



4.___विीले खरानीरं गको सुट लगाउनुभएको छ।



5.___ँयामले िनलोरं गको सुट लगाउनुभएको छ।



Shyamko kapaal sunaulorangko chha. Badrile kharaanirangko suT lagaaunubheko chha. Shyamle nilorangko suT lagaaunubhaeko chha.



6.___सरीता जवान आमा हनु ु हु न्छ।



Sarita jawaan aamaa hunuhunchha.



8.___वहाँले पहें लो रं गको से स लगाउनुभएको छ।



wahaale pahelo rangko Dress lagaaunubhaeko chha.



7.___वहाँ अग्लो र दब्लो हनु ु ु हु न्छ।



wahaa aglo ra dublo hunuhunchha.



9.___गीताले िनलो टी-सटर् लगाएको छ।



Gitale nilo T-sarT lagaaeko chha.



10.___विी मोटो हनु ु हु न्छ।



Badri moTo hunuhunchha.



198



11. Translate the following descriptions into English. Check your work with the Answer Key. A. सरीता अग्लो र दब्लो हनु ु ु हु न्छ।वहाँ तीस बषर् हनु ु भयो। वहाँको घुमिरएको सुनौलोरं गको कपाल, हिरयो आँखा



छ र वहाँ गोरो हनु ु हु न्छ ।



Sarita aglo ra dublo hunuhunchha. wahaa tis barsha hunubhayo. wahaako ghumrieko sunaulorangako kapaal , hariyo aakhaa chha ra wahaa goro hunuhunchha. B. ूकाश अग्लो र मोटो हनु ु हु न्छ। वहाँ पैंतालीस वषर् हनु ु भयो । वहाँको छोटो फुलेको कपाल, िनलो आँखा र



हल्का छाला छ ।



Prakash aglo ra moTo hunuhunchha.wahaa paitaalis barsha hunubhyo.wahaako chhoTo phulek kapaal, nilo aakhaa ra halkaa chhaalaa chha.



हनु C. िसपाहीको कपाल कालो र छोटो छ।वहाँ होचो र दब्लो ु ु हु न्छ। sipaahiko kapaal kaalo ra chhoTo chha. wahaa hocho ra dublo hunuhunchha. छ। उःको लामो खैरो कपाल, िनलो आँखा र छाला गहँु गोरो D. सानी केटी दश वषर्को छ । उ अग्लो र दब्लो ु छ।



saani keTi dash barshako chha. u aglo ra dublo chha. usko laamo khairo kapaal, nilo aakhaa ra chhaalaa gahugoro chha.



199



End-of-Lesson Tasks



1. Describe the people you see in the pictures. For each person, include the approximate age, skin tone, color and length of hair, and what he or she is wearing. Use the model in Exercise 2 below.



1



4



2



5



3



6



2. Come up with a simple description for each of the people listed below. (You may substitute any individual you wish for those listed.) Be sure to include hair color and length, approximate height and age, eye color, and skin tone. MODEL: My mother is 63 years old. She is tall and has a medium frame. She has short, gray hair and brown eyes. She has light skin. She wears glasses. A. Mother B. Father C. Co-worker D. President of the United States E. Your next door neighbor 200



Vocabulary List Average



Saamaanya



सामान्य



Beard



Daarhi



दा॑ी



Black



Kaalo



कालो



Blond



Sunaulo



सुनौलो



Blue



Nilo



िनलो



Blue jeans



Nilo jins



िनलो जन्स



Boots



But



बुट



Brown



Khiro



खैरो



Color



Rang



रं ग



Curly



Ghumrieko



घुमिरएको



Dark



Gaadhaa



गाढा



Dress



Dress/ lugaa



से स / लुगा



Ears



Kaan



कान



Eyes



Aakhaa



आँखा



Face



Mukh/ anuhaar



मुख /अनुहार



Frame



Banaut



बनौट



Glasses



Chashmaa



चँमा



Gray



Phuleko/ kharaani rang



फुलेको /खरानीरं ग



Green



Hariyo



हिरयो



Hair



Kapaal



कपाल



Hat



Topi



टोपी



Jacket



Jyaaket



Large



Thulo



ू ठलो



Light



Halkaa



हल्का



Man



Maanchhe



मान्छे



Medium



Madhyam



म यम



Mouth



Mukh



मुख



Nose



Naak



नाक



Old



Budho



बुढो



Pants



Paaint



याकेट



पाइन्ट



201



Red



Raato



रातो



Shirt



Kamij



कमीज



Shoes



Juttaa



जु ा



Short



Hocho



होचो



Skin



Chhaalaa



छाला



Skirt



Skrat



ःकटर्



Small



Saano



सानो



Straight



Sidhaa



सीधा



Suit



Sut



सुट



Sweater



Suiter



ःवीटर



Sweats



Chhoto baahulaako lugaa



Tall



Aglo



छोटो बाहलाको लुगा ु



Thin



Dublo



To wear



Lagaaunu



लगाउनु



T-shirt



Ti-sart



टी-सटर्



White



Seto



सेतो



Woman



Swaasni maanchhe



ःवाःनी मान्छे



Father



Baa



बा



Yellow



Pahelo



पहें लो



Young



Jawaan



जवान



President



Raashtrapati



रा पित



Neighbor



Chhimeki



िछमेकी



अग्लो दब्लो ु



202



ANSWER KEY Exercise 6 Hair छोटो



Skin हल्का



Height अग्लो



Frame मोटो



Facial Features कान



लामो



म यम



होचो



नाक



सुनौलो रं गको



गहँु गोरो



दब्लो ु



रातो



आँखा मुख



फुलेको कपाल



चँमा दा॑ी



Exercise 7 1. thin



दब्लो ु



2. glasses



चँमा



3. heavy



मोटो



4. height



उचाई



blue short nose blond



green glasses beard gray



thin tall heavy height



Exercise 8 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.



How many people were described? Three. What were their names? Sita, Ram and Hari. What kind of hair does Sita have? Short, straight, brown. Does Ram wear glasses? No. Does Ram have brown eyes? No, he has blue eyes. Is Hari short and heavy? No, average height and thin.



1. - What color is Sita’s hair? - Her hair is brown. - Is Sita’s hair long or short? - It’s short.



203



brown average eyes dark



- Is Sita’s hair curly or straight? - It’s straight. 2. - Does Ram wear glasses? - No, he doesn’t wear glasses. - What color are Ram’s eyes? - His eyes are blue. 3. - Is Hari tall? - He is of average height. - Is he heavy? - No, he is thin. Exercise 10 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.



D E B A E C C C B A



Lalita is an old woman. Shyam has blond hair. Gita has long brown hair. Badri is wearing a gray suit Shyam is wearing blue pants. Sarita is a young mother. She is tall and thin. She is wearing a yellow dress. She is wearing a blue t-shirt. Badri is heavy.



Exercise 11 1. Sarita is tall and thin. She is 30 years old. She has blond curly hair, green eyes, and fair skin. 2. Prakash is tall and heavy. He is 45 years old. He has short gray hair, blue eyes, and light skin. 3. The soldier has dark short hair. He is short and thin. 4. A young girl is 10 years old. She is tall and thin. She has long brown hair, brown eyes, and dark skin.



204



Lesson 13 Transportation यातायात Yaataayaat



This lesson will introduce you to: - Verbs of motion. - Ways of asking questions regarding the different modes of transportation. - Different types of transportation available in Nepal.



Transportation facilities in Nepal are very limited as there are few motor vehicles and not many roads. Construction of new roads has been undertaken since the 1970s with aid from India, China, Britain, and United States of America. The main form of transportation has been the network of footpaths, which interlace the mountain terrain and valleys. Due to Nepal’s geographical structure, the role of vehicles as a method of transportation is very limited. In the mountainous regions, it is not uncommon to see Yaks and horses still used as an aid to transport people or goods. In large cities like Kathmandu, people own vehicles, although there is no statistic on what percentage of the population owns a private vehicle. Driving around cities like Kathmandu is not pleasant because of the poor condition of the roads. Cabs, auto rikshaws, bicycles, motorbikes, tempos, and buses are extensively used, as not many can afford to own private vehicles. Nevertheless, walking is the most important method of transportation for the Nepalese. Nepal is a land locked country and therefore the significance of air service is of prime importance. Nepal Airlines is only the national flag carrier. It operates daily flights to India and to other destinations like Hong Kong, Bangkok, Singapore, Dubai, Frankfurt and London on a regular basis. In addition to Nepal airlines, major international airlines like Thai, Singapore airlines, Emirates, Saudi, Indian Airlines, South China, and Sri Lanka air also have connections in Nepal. Nepal has many private air line companies operating their domestic flights to different cities in Nepal; mostly operating in hilly and mountainous areas. There are a couple of helicopter services, which ferry tourists and locals to different destinations.



205



1. Listen and repeat the following words as you read along.



Airplane hawaaijahaaj हवाईजहाज



Bicycle saaikal साइकल



Car gaaDi गाडी



Motorcycle moTersaaikal मोटरसाइकल Note: ‘to walk’ ‘hiDnu’



Ship paanijahaaj पानीजहाज



Ferry Boat pheri Dungaa फेरी डू ं गा



Taxi Tyaaksi याक्सी



Helicopter helikapTer हे िलक टर



Train rel रे ल



िहड्नु



‘to drive’ ‘chalaaunu’ चलाउनु ‘to ride’ ‘chaDhnu’ चढ्नु ma hiDera pustakaalya jaanchhu. I will walk to the library. ु म िहं डेर पुःतकालय जान्छ। wahaa gaaDi chalaaera saangitik kaaryakrammaa jaanuhunchha. वहाँ गाडी चलाएर सांगीितक कायर्बममा जानुहु न्छ। He / she will drive to the concert. Ram bas chaDera peTrol pump jaanuhunnchha. राम बस चढे र पेशोल पम्प जानुहु न्छ। Ram will ride a bus to the gas station.



206



Bus bas बस



Truck Trak शक



To walk



hiDnu



िहड्नु



To drive



chalaaunu



चलाउनु



To ride



chaDhnu



चढ्नु



library



pustakaalay



पुःतकालय



concert



saangitik kaaryakram



सांगीितक कायर्बम



Gas station



peTrol pump



पेशोल पम्प



2. Listen to the questions and answers about using different forms of transportation. Repeat after the speaker as you read along. How do you go to work? tapaai kaammaa kasari jaanuhunchha? तपाईं काममा कसरी जानुहु न्छ? by car gaaDimaa गाडीमा by bus basmaa बसमा by train relmaa रे लमा by bicycle I go ma jaanchhu saaikalmaa साइकलमा ु म जान्छ। by boat Dungaa chaDhera डू ं गाचढे र by motorcycle moTersaaikalmaa मोटरसाइकलमा by truck Trakmaa शकमा



I take the ma linchhu ु म िलन्छ।



207



Car gaaDi गाडी bus bas बस train rel रे ल bicycle saaikal साइकल boat Dungaa डू ं गा motorcycle moTersaaikal मोटरसाइकल truck Trak शक



I walk ma hiDchhu. ु म िहड्छ।



MODEL: Who + the verb of motion + mode of transportation + destination Example:



I ride a bus to school. ma bas chaDhera bidyaalay jaanchhu. ु म बस चढे र िब ालय जान्छ।



3. Read each statement below and match it to the correct picture. Check your work with the Answer Key.



1.____



2.____



3.____



4.____



5.____



6.____



ु A. हरे क िबहान म बस चढे र िव ालय जान्छ। harek bihaana ma bas chaDhera bidyaalay jaanchhu. B. सैिनकहरू. सैिनक शक चढ्छन। sainikharu sainik Trak chaDhchhan. C. पानी पदार् हामी याक्सी चढछौं। paani pardaa haami Tyaaksi chaDhchhau. ु D. गाडी चढे र म काममा जान्छ। gaaDi chaDhera ma kaammaa jaanchhu. E. मेरो साथी आफ्नो साइकल चढे र काममा जानुहु न्छ। mero saathi aaphno saaikal chaDhera kaammaa jaanuhunchha. F. मेरो भाई मोटर साइकल चलाउँ छ। mero bhai moTersaaikal chalaauchha. 208



4. Practice creating complete sentences out of the words below. Use the following model. MODEL: Who + the verb of motion + mode of transportation + destination Example: I ride a bus to school. ma bidyaalay basmaa jaanchhu. ु म िव ालय बसमा जान्छ। I ma म to maa मा airport bimaansthal िवमानःथल to drive chalaaunu चलाउनु



motorcycle moTersaaikal मोटर साइकल school bidhyaalay िव ालय my friend mero saathi मेरो साथी train rel रे ल



my brother mero bhaai मेरो भाइ bicycle saaikal साइकल concert saangitik kaaryakram सांगीितक कायर्बम taxi Tyaaksi टयाक्सी



to ride chaDhnu चढ्नु our parents haamro aamaabaa हाॆो आमाबा library pustakaalay पुःतकालय bus bas बस



car gaaDi गाडी



to walk hiDnu िहड्नु



5. Listen to and read along with the following exchanges. Repeat after the speaker. - Excuse me. I want to go to the library. How do I get there? sunnus ta ma pustakaalay jaane .tyahaa kasari jaane? सुन्नुस त! म पुःतकालय जाने । यहाँ कसरी जाने। - Take bus number 14. chaudha numberko basmaa jaanus. चौध नंम्बरको बसमा जानुस। - Thanks. dhanyabaad. धन्यवाद। - You are welcome. kehi chaina. केही छै न।



209



- How do I get to the hospital? aspataal kasari jaane? अःपताल कसरी जाने? - Take a taxi. Tyaaksi linus/ Tyaaksimaa jaanus. याक्सी िलनुस / याक्सीमा जानुस। - Thank you very much. dherai dhanyabaad. धेरै धन्यवाद। - You are welcome. kehi chhaina. केही छै न। - Please tell me how to get to the hotel from the airport. bimaansthal baaTa hotel kasari jaane , bhannus na. िवमानःथलबाट होटे ल कसरी जाने, भन्नुस न? - Take the train. relmaa jaanus. रे लमा जानुस। - What number? kati numberko ? कित नंम्बरको? - Train number 22. baais numberko relmaa. बाइस नंम्बरको रे लमा।



6. Working with a partner, make up similar exchanges as in the above exercise. Use the words from Exercise 5 and the pictures below to choose the destination.



210



7. Now listen to the dialogues and mark the statement that you hear. Check your answers with the Answer Key. 1. A. तपाईं सांगीितक कायर्बममा



ु याक्सीमा जानुहु न्छ ? होईन, म मेरो गाडीमा जान्छ।



ु B. तपाईं सांगीितक कायर्बकमा बसमा जानुहु न्छ? होईन, म मेरो गाडीमा जान्छ। ु C. तपाईं सांगीितक कायर्बममा रे लमा जानुहु न्छ? होईन, म मेरो गाडीमा जान्छ। 2. A. पोःट अिफस जान कुन बस चढ्नु पछर् ? अठार नंम्बरको बस। B. पोःट अिफस जान कुन बाटो जानु पछर् ? अठारौं ःशीट। C. पोःट अिफस जान कुन एक्जीट िलनु पछर् ? अठार एक्जीट। 3. A. मेरो आमाबा गाडीमा काममा जानुहु न्छ, तर हामी हाॆो साइकलमा जान्छौं। B. मेरो आमाबा गाडीमा काममा जानुहु न्छ, तर हामी िहड्छौं। C. मेरो आमाबा गाडीमा काममा जानुहु न्छ, तर हामी रे लमा जान्छौं।



211



At a service station



8. Familiarize yourself with the following vocabulary. Listen to the speaker and follow along in your book. पेशोल



Gas



peTrol



Gas station



peTrol pump



पेशोल पम्प



Service station



service garne Thaau



सरबीस गन ठाउँ



Diesel



Dijal



िडजल



Car wash



gaaDi dhunu



गाडी धुनु



Oil



tel



तेल



Tires



chakkaa



चक्का



Air



haawaa



हावा



Water



paani



पानी



Flat tire



chakkaamaa haawaa chhaina



चक्कामा हावा छै न



Note: In Nepal, the metric system is used in all the fuel stations, and the liter is used as the unit of measurement. There is only one grade for petrol and diesel as compared to four different grades of fuel in United States. 1 gallon = 3.785 liters 1 quart = .946 liters 1 liter = 2.1 pints 10 liters = 2.63 gallons



212



9. Listen to the people at a service station and find out what each needs. Circle the English equivalents of the terms you hear. Check your answers with the Answer Key. Air Air Air Air



A. B. C. D.



Gas Gas Gas Gas



Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel



Tires Tires Tires Tires



Oil Oil Oil Oil



10. Familiarize yourself with these terms identifying infrastructure. Road



baaTo



बाटो



Highway



raajmaarg



राजमागर्



Local road



sthaaniya baaTo



ःथानीय बाटो



Railroad



relko baaTo



रे लको बाटो



213



Car Wash Car Wash Car Wash Car Wash



End-of-Lesson Tasks 1. Explain how you would get to the following places using various modes of transportation. Try to make your story interesting and include as many details as you can.



2. Listen and write down the responses to the questions below. Check your work with the Answer Key. A. – मेरो गाडीमा पेशोल चािहन्छ।पेशोल पम्प कहाँ छ? mero gaaDimaa peTrol chaahinchha. peTrol pump kahaa chha? B. – मेरो चक्कामा समःया छ। म के गरूँ mero chakkaamaa samasyaa chha. ma ke garu? C. – एक िलटर पेशोलको कित पछर् ? ek liTer peTrol ko kati parchha? D. – तपाईंलाई कित पेशोल चािहन्छ? tapaailaai kati peTrol chaahinchha?



214



Vocabulary List Air



Haawaa



हावा



Airplane



Hawaaijahaaj



हवाईजहाज



Bicycle



Saaikal



साइकल



Boat



Dungaa



डू ं गा



Bus



Bas



बस



Car



Gaadi



गाडी



Car wash



Gaadi dhunu



गाडी धुनु



Concert



Saangitik kaaryakram



सांगीितक कायर्बम



Diesel



Dijal



िडजल



Ferry boat



Pheri Dungaa



फेरी डू ं गा



Freeway



Paisaa natirnebaato



पैसा नितनबाटो



Gallon



Gyaalan



Gas



Petrol



Helicopter



Helikapter



हे िलक टर



Highway



Raajmaarg



राजमागर्



Library



Pustakaalay



पुःतकालय



Liter



Liter



िलटर



Local road



Sthaniya baato



ःथानीय बाटो



Motorcycle



Motersaaikal



मोटरसाइकल



Oil



Tel



तेल



Railroad



Relko baato



रे लको बाटो



Service station



Service station



सिभर्स ःटे शन



School



Bidyaalay



िव ालय



Ship



Paanijahaaj



पानीजहाज



Taxi



Tyaaksi



Tire/tires



Chakkaa/ chakkaaharu



चक्का / चक्काह



Train



Rel



रे ल



Truck



Trak



शक



Water



Paani



पानी



Work



Kaam



यालन पेशोल



याक्सी



काम



215



ANSWER KEY Exercise 3 1. F. My brother rides a motorcycle. 2. D. I drive my car to go to work. 3. E. My friend rides his bike to work. 4. B. Soldiers ride in an army truck. 5. C. When it’s raining, we take a taxi. 6. A. I take the bus to school every morning. Exercise 7 1. 2. 3.



A. Do you take a taxi to the concert? No, I take my car. B. What street should I take to the post office? 18th Street. C. My parents drive their cars to work, but we take the train.



ु 1. A. तपाईं सांगीितक कायर्बममा याक्सीमा जानुहु न्छ ? होईन, म मेरो गाडीमा जान्छ। tapaai saangitik kaaryakrammaa Tyaaksimaa jaanuhunchha? hoina, ma mero gaaDimaa jaanchhu. ु B. तपाईं सांगीितक कायर्बकमा बसमा जानुहु न्छ? होईन, म मेरो गाडीमा जान्छ। tapaai saangitik kaaryakrammaa basmaa jaanuhunchha? hoina, ma mero gaaDimaa jaanchhu. ु C. तपाईं सांगीितक कायर्बममा रे लमा जानुहु न्छ? होईन, म मेरो गाडीमा जान्छ। tapaai saangitik kaaryakrammaa relmaa jaanuhunchha? hoina, a mero gaaDimaa jaanchhu. 2. A. पोःट अिफस जान कुन बस चढ्नु पछर् ? अठार नंम्बरको बस। post office jaana kun bas chaDnu parchha? aThaarah numberko bas. B. पोःट अिफस जान कुन बाटो जानु पछर् ? अठारौं ःशीट। post office jaana kun baaTo jaanu parchha? aThaarau street. C. पोःट अिफस जान कुन एक्जीट िलनु पछर् ? अठार एक्जीट। post office jaana kun exit linu parchha? Exit aThaara. 3. A. मेरो आमाबा गाडीमा काममा जानुहु न्छ, तर हामी हाॆो साइकलमा जान्छौं। mero aamaabaa gaaDimaa kaammaa jaanuhunchha, tara haami haamro saaikalmaa jaanchhu. B. मेरो आमाबा गाडीमा काममा जानुहु न्छ, तर हामी िहड्छौं। mero aamaabaa gaaDimaa kaammaaa jaanuhunchha, tara haami hiDchhau C. मेरो आमाबा गाडीमा काममा जानुहु न्छ, तर हामी रे लमा जान्छौं। mero aamaabaa gaaDimaa kaammaa jaanuhunchha, tara haami relmaa jaanchhau.



216



Exercise 9 A. B. C. D.



Air Gas Gas Diesel



Tires Oil Car Wash Oil



A. I need some air for my tires. mero chakaaharumaa haawaa raakhnu parchha. मेरो चक्काहरूमा हावा राख्नु पछर् । B. I need 10 gallons of gas and 1 quart of oil. malaai das gyaalan peTrol ra ek chauthaai tel chaahichha. मलाई दश यालन पेशोल र एक चौथाइ तेल चािहन्छ। C. I need a car wash and gas. mero gaaDi dhunu parchha ra peTrol raakhnu parchha. मेरो गाडी धुनु पछर् र पेशोल राख्नु पछर् । D. I need diesel for my car and oil. malaai mero gaaDiko laagi dijal ra tel chaahinchha. मलाई मेरो गाडीको लािग िडजल र तेल चािहन्छ। End of Lesson Exercise 2 A. – मेरो गाडीमा पेशोल छै न। पेशोल पम्प कहाँ छ? I have no gas. Where is the gas station? - दई ू िकलोिमटर तल पैसा नितनबाटोमा । Two kilometers down the freeway. B. – मेरो चक्कामा समःया छ ।म के गरूँ? I have a problem with my tire. What should I do? ु - म तपाईंको चक्कामा हावा रािखिदन्छ। I’ll put some air in the tires for you. C. – एक िलटर पेशोलको कित पछर् ? How much is the gas per liter? - एक िलटर को पैंतालीस रूिपयाँ चालीस पैसा। ek liTerko paitaalis rupiyaa chaalis paisa. D. – तपाईंलाई कित पेशोल चािहन्छ? How much gas do you want? - बा॑ िलटरिदनुस। baarah liter dinus. 12 liters



217



Lesson 14 Travel याऽा yaatraa



This lesson will introduce you to: - Vocabulary related to travel. - How to buy a train, bus, or airplane ticket. - How to understand schedules. - Border crossing and roadblock procedures.



In domestic air travel there is no separate business and economy class. The flights are operated by smaller aircraft due to the mountainous terrain. There does exist a difference in price and mode of payment for tickets purchased by locals versus those purchased by foreigners. The locals can pay the air fare in local currency whereas the foreigners have to pay either in foreign currency or equivalent in local currency. Nepal Airlines, the national flag carrier, also operates its flights in the domestic sector. In addition to Nepal Airlines there are other domestic airlines operated by private sectors as well. There are state owned local and long distance buses from the capital city Kathmandu to many destinations. There are many long route express buses operated by the private sector connecting Kathmandu to important cities enabling people and visitors to travel with ease and comfort.



218



Inquiring about a bus and an airplane schedule and buying a ticket Ram Hari



Ram Hari Ram Hari Ram Hari Ram Hari Ram Hari Ram Hari



Where do you get the bus / airlines ticket for Pokhara? Bus tickets are available at Sundhara whereas for airlines, you have to go to New Road.



pokhara jaane basko/ hawaaijahaajko tikat kahaa paainchha?



पोखरा जाने बसको / हवाईजहाजको



basko tikat sundharamaa paainchha tara hawaaijahaajko tikat newroadmaa paainchha.



बसको िटकट सुन्धारामा पाइन्छ



How much is the bus fare from Kathmandu to Pokhara? For express buses, it is Rupees 450.00 per person. How about for airlines?



kathmandubaata pokhara jaana basmaa kati paisa laagchha?



काठमान्डू बाट पोखरा जान बसमा



express basmaa ekjanaako 450 rupiyaa laagchha.



एक्सूेस बसमा एकजनाको ४५०



hawaaijahaajmaa ni?



हवाईजहाजमा िन?



By air it is rupees 5,000.00



hawaaijahaajmaa ekjanaako (5000.00 )paach hajaar rupiyaa laachha.



हवाईजहाजमा एकजनाको (५०००)



How many bus services are there for Pokhara?



ekdinmaa katiwataa bas pokhara jaanchha?



एकिदनमा कितवटा बस पोखरा



There are 30 buses to Pokhara. What is the timing of the first bus? 08.00 o’clock in the morning. Oh, it’s too early!



tiswataa basharu jaanchhan.



तीसवटा बसहरू जान्छन।्



pahilo bas katibaje jaanchha?



पिहलो बस कितबजे जान्छ?



bihaana paach baje.



िबहान पाँच बजे।



What’s the time from Kathmandu to Pokhara by bus? It’s 6 hours by Express bus. Please, give me two tickets for eight o’clock.



िटकट कहाँ पाईन्छ? तर हवाईजहाजको िटकट न्यूरोडमा पाईन्छ। कित पैसा लाग्छ? रूिपयाँ लाग्छ।



पाचँ हजार रूिपयाँ लाग्छ। जान्छ?



ओह! धेरै िछटो।



oh! dherai chhito. kathmandubaata pokhara basmaa kati ghantaa laagchha? express basmaa chha ghantaa laagchha malaai aath bjeko dui tikat dinus



काठमान्डू बाट पोखरा बसमा कित घण्टा लाग्छ? एक्सूेस बसमा ६ घण्टा लाग्छ। मलाई आठ बजेको दई ु िटकट िदनुस।



Ram



Here it is.



linu.



िलनुस।



Hari



Thank you.



dhanyabaad.



धन्यवाद।



219



1. Listen to the following dialogue about buying a ticket at a train station, and read along in the workbook. Soldier: sipaahi िसपाही Ticket Seller: TikeT bechne िटकट बेच्ने Soldier: sipaahi िसपाही Ticket Seller: TikaT bechne िटकट बेच्ने Soldier: sipaahi िसपाही Ticket Seller: TikaT bechne िटकट बेच्ने Soldier: sipaahi िसपाही Ticket Seller: TikaT bechne िटकट बेच्ने Soldier: sipaahi िसपाही Ticket Seller: TikeT bechne िटकट बेच्ने Soldier: sipaahi िसपाही Ticket Seller: TikaT bechne िटकट बेच्ने



Excuse me, ma’am. maaph garnus,mahodayaa. माफ गनुस र् , महोदया। Can I help you? ke ma tapaailaai maddat garna sakchhu? के म तपाईंलाई म त गनर् सक्छु? I need to buy a ticket to Kathmandu. malaai Kathmandu jaane TikaT chaahinchha. मलाई काठमान्डू जाने िटकट चािहन्छ। Departing on what day? kun din jaane? कुन िदन जाने? Today. aaja. आज। One-way or roundtrip? ektarphi ki aaunejaane? एकतफ िक आउनेजाने? Roundtrip. aaunejaane. आउनेजाने। First class or second class? pahilo klaasko ki dosro klaasko? पिहलो क्लासको िक दोॐो क्लासको? Second class, please. dosro klaasko , dinus. दोॐो क्लासको िदनुस। Returning on what day? kun din pharkane? कुन िदन फकर्ने? Friday shukrabaar शुबबार Morning, afternoon, or evening? bihaan, diuso ki belukaa? िबहान, िदऊँसो, िक बेलक ु ा?



220



Soldier: sipaahi िसपाही Ticket Seller: TikaT bechne िटकट बेच्ने Soldier: sipaahi िसपाही Ticket Seller: TikaT bechne िटकट बेच्ने Soldier: sipaahi िसपाही Ticket Seller: TikaT bechne िटकट बेच्ने



Afternoon diuso िदउँ सो Twenty Rs.please. The next train leaves in one hour from platform number 5. bis rupiyaa, dinus. dosro rel ek ghanTa pachhi paach numberko relbe stationbaaTa jaanchha. बीस रूिपयाँ िदनुस। दोॐो रे ल एक घण्टा पिछ पाँच नंम्बरको रे लवे ःटे शनबाट जान्छ। Thank you. What is the train number? Dhanyabaad. relko number kati ho? धन्यबाद।रे लको नंम्बर कित हो? 76 chhihattar. िछह र Is this an express train? yo express rel ho? यो एक्सूेस रे ल हो? Yes, it is an express train. ho, yo express rel ho. हो, यो एक्सूेस रे ल हो।



2. Read the dialogue with a partner. Take turns being the Ticket Seller and Soldier. 3. Role-play the dialogue. You can substitute the name of a city where you need to buy a ticket to, the time and day of arriving and departing, and the price of the ticket. Future tense Conjugation: The verb “jaanu” to go Pronoun Nepali/Roman म ma तपाईं (हरू) tapaai (haru) वहाँ (हरू) wahaa (haru) हामी (हरु) haami (haru) ितमी (हरू) Timi (haru) ऊ u



Positive



Negative



जानेछु jaanechhu जानु हने ु छ jaanu hunechha जानु हने ु छ jaanu hunechha जानेछ jaanechhau जानेछौ jaanechhau जानेछ jaanechha



जानेछैन jaanechhaina जानु हने ु छैन jaanu hunechhaina जानु हने ु छैन jaanu hunechhaina जानेछैन jaanechhainau जानेछैनौ jaanechhainau जानेछैन jaanechhaina



221



English Positive I will go



English Negative I will not go



You will go



You will not go



He/she will go



He/ she will not go



We will go



We will not go



You will go



You will not go



He/she will go



He/she will not go



उनीहरू uniharu



जानेछन ् jaanechhan



जानेछैनन ् jaanechhainan



They will go



They will not go



4. Listen to the following statements and read along in the workbook. Attention, passengers! The next express train to Janakpur will depart from platform 10 in 15 minutes. yaatriharu dhyaan dinus! arko express rel Janakpurko laagi १0 numberko relbe stationbaaTa 15 mineTmaa jaanchha. याऽीहरू ध्यान िदनुस! अक एक्सूेस रे ल जनकपुरको लािग १० नंम्बरको रे लवे ःटे शनबाट १५ िमनेटमा जान्छ। Attention, passengers! The next local train will arrive at platform 10 in 5 minutes. yaatriharu dhyaan dinus! arko sthaaniya rel १० numberko relbe stationmaa ५ mineTmaa aaipugchha. याऽीहरु ध्यान िदनुस! अक ःथानीय रे ल १० नंम्बरको रे लवे ःटे शनमा ५ िमनेटमा आइपुग्छ।



Attention, passengers! Flight number 92 from Pokhara will be one hour late. Please check the schedule for updates. yaatriharu dhyaan dinus! Pokharako uDaan number ९२ ek ghanTaa Dilo hunchha. kripayaa nayaa taalikaa hernus. याऽीहरु ध्यान िदनुस! पोखराको उडान नंम्बर ९२ एक घण्टा िढलो हन्छ। कृ पया नयाँ तािलका हे नस ुर् । ु Attention, passengers! The bus from Biratnagar will arrive at terminal 3 in 10 minutes. yaatriharu dhyaan dinus! Biratnagarko bas ३ numberko basbisaunimaa १० mineTmaa aaunechha. याऽीहरू ध्यान िदनुस! िबराटनगरको बस ३ नंम्बरको बसिबसौिनमा १० िमनेटमा आउँ नेछ। 5. Match each picture with the correct Nepali term by writing the term below the correct picture. Check your work with the Answer Key.



A__________



B__________



C__________



222



D__________



E__________



F__________



G__________



H__________



याऽीहरू



yaatriharu



मालसामान



maalsaamaan



रे लवे ःटे शन



relbe station



तािलका



taalikaa



िटकट



tikat



जाँच्ने ठाउँ



jaachne thaau



िवौाम कक्ष



bishraam kakchha



ढोका



dhokaa



Note: “ma jaanu parchha,” means I have to go/ I need to go/ I should go. All nouns and pronouns have same conjugation form. Conjugate the same way for all nouns and pronouns.



6. Listen to the following statements and read along in the workbook. You must have a ticket to board the train. rel chaDhnako laagi TikaT hunai parchha. रे ल चढनको लािग िटकट हनै ु पछर् । You must have a ticket to board the airplane. hawaaijahaaj chaDnako laagi TikaT hunai parchha. हवाईजहाज चढनको लािग िटकट हनै ु पछर् । 223



Passengers for flight number 25 must go to gate 14. uDaan number २५ ko yaatriharu १४ numberko Dhokaamaa jaanai parchha. उडान नंम्बर २५को याऽीहरु १४ नंम्बरको ढोकामा जानै पछर् । You must pay for your ticket. tapaaile TikaTko laagi paisaa tirnai parchha. तपाईंले िटकटको लािग पैसा ितन पछर् । Passengers have to wait in the waiting area. yaatriharu bishraam kakchhamaa parkhanu parchha. याऽीहरू िवौाम कक्षमा पखर्नु पछर् । You have to wait for your luggage at the baggage claim area. tapaaile maalsaamaanko laagi maalsaamaan line Thaaumaa parkhanu parchha. तपाईंले मालसामानको लािग मालसामान िलने ठाँउमा पखर्नु पछर् ।



7. Fill in the blanks with the correct term from the list below. Check your answers with the Answer Key. Attention



dhyaan dinu



ध्यान िदनु



Baggage claim area



maalsaamaan dine thaau



मालसामान िलने ठाँउ



Express



express



एक्सूेस



First class



pahilo klaas



पिहलो क्लास



Platform



relbe station



रे लवे ःटे शन



Schedule



taalikaa



तािलका



Second class



dosro klaas



दोॐो क्लास



Ticket window



tikat kinne jhyaal



िटकट िकन्ने



Gate



dhokaa



ढोका



याल



A. िटकट िकन्न ________________________________ मा जानुस। TikaT kinna maa jaanus. B. तपाईं तपाईंको मालसामान __________________ िलनुस। tapaai tapaaiko maalsaamaan _______________ linus. C. ___________________! सबै याऽीहरूसंग बस चढनको लािग िटकट हनै ु पछर् । sabai yaatriharusanga bas chaDhnako laagi TikaT hununai parchha. D. तपाईंको जहाज कित बजे उड्छ _________________ हे नस ुर् । tapaaiko jahaaj kati baje uDchha ____________ hernus.



224



E. _____________रे ल िछटो छ िकन भने ठआँ ठाँमा रोकदै न। _______________ rel chhiTo chha kinabane Thaau Thaamaa rokdaina. F. हरे क रे ल फरक फरक _________________ आइपुग्छ। harek rel pharak pharak _____________aaipugchha. G. याऽीहरू ध्यान िदनुस !



उडान नंम्बर # ७२५ A17को _______________ बाट उडदै छ।



yaatriharu dhyaan dinus! uDaan # ७२५ A १७ ko __________baaTa uDdaichha. 8. For each question on the left, there is a corresponding answer on the right. Match them by writing the letter of each question in the blank line in front of the appropriate answer on the right. Check your answers with the Answer Key. A.ःथानीय रे लको िटकट कहाँ िकन्न सिकन्छ? sthaaniya relko TikaT kahaa kinna sakinchha? B. पोखरामा अक बस कित बजे जान्छ? Pokharamaa arko bas kati baje jaanchha?



1. हो। ho. 2. अक बस पोखरामा बीस िमनेट पिछ जान्छ।



C. िबराटनगरको लािग पिहलो क्लासको िटकटको कित



3. रे लवे ःटे सनको छे उमै िटकट िदने



पछर् ? Biratnagarko laagi pahilo klassko TikaTko kati parchha? D.तपाईंलाई याल िनरको सीट चािहन्छ?



relbe stationko chheumai TikaT dine jhyaalmaa. 4.रे ल १६ नंम्बरको रे लवे ःटे शनमा १० िमनेटमा



arko bas Pokharamaa २० mineT pachhi jaanchha. यालमा।



आउँ छ।



E. जयनगरको एक्सूेस रे ल कुन रे लवे ःटे शनमा



rel १६ numberko relbe stationmaa १० mineTmaa aauchha. 5. एकसय रूिपयाँ लाग्छ।



आउँ छ? Jaynagarko express rel kun relbe stationmaa aauchha?



१०० rupiyaa laagchha.



tapaailaai jhyaal nirako sit chaahinchha?



9. Role-play the short dialogues from Exercise 8. Use different cities and numbers.



10. What do you hear? Listen to the speaker and determine which statement is being spoken. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. A You must have a ticket to board the bus. B You must have a ticket to board the ferry.



225



2. A I need a second-class roundtrip ticket to Pokhara. B I need a first-class one-way ticket to Pokhara. 3. A The next express train will depart from platform 15 in 10 minutes. B The next local train will depart from platform 15 in 10 minutes.



At border crossings and roadblocks



11. Listen to these new words and phrases. Border



simaanaa



सीमाना



Customs



bhansaar



भन्सार



Checkpoint



jaach chauki



जाँच चौकी



Roadblock



baato banda



बाटो बन्द



Passport



raahdaani



राहदानी



Drivers’ license



chaalak parichaypatra



चालक पिरचयपऽ



Documents



kaagajpatra



कागजपऽ



Papers



kaagaj



कागज



ID card



parichaypatra



पिरचयपऽ



Show me



dekhaaunu



दे खाउनु



Give me



malaai dinus



मलाई िदनुस



Search



khojnu



खो नु



To Inspect



nirikchhan garnu



िनिरक्षण गनुर्



Inspection



nirikchhan



िनिरक्षण



226



Trunk (of a car)



diki



िडकी



Proceed



aghi badhanu



अिघ बढनु



Rental (car)



bhaadhaako gaadi



भाडाको गाडी



Citizen



naagrik



नागिरक



12. At roadblocks and border crossings, officials usually ask questions about driver identification and vehicle documents. Try to match up the Nepali border crossing requests and questions with their English equivalents. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. मलाई तपाईंको गाडीको कागज दे खाउनुस। malaai tapaaiko gaaDiko kaagaj dekhaaunus. 2. मलाई तपाईंको राहदानी िदनुस। malaai tapaaiko raahdaani dinus. 3. तपाईंको घर कहाँ हो? tapaaiko ghar kahaa ho? 4. तपाईंलाई यहाँ िकन जानु पछर् ? tapaailaai tyahaa kina jaanu parchha? 5. मलाई तपाईंको चालक पऽ िदनु। malaai tapaaiko chaalak patra dinus. 6. तपाईंको पिरचय पऽ छ? tapaaiko parichay patra chha?



A Give me your driver’s license. B Do you have an ID card? C Why do you need to go there? D Show me your car papers. E Give me your passport. F Where are you from?



13. Listen to and read the following dialogue at a border crossing, and then answer the questions below. Try to guess the meaning of unknown words from the context. Check your work with the Answer Key. bhansaarko haakim भन्सारको हािकम gaaDi chaalak गाडी चालक bhansaarko haakim भन्सरको हािकम gaaDi chaalak गाडी चालक bhansaarko haakim भन्सारको हािकम gaaDi chaalak



tapaaiko raahdaani ra chaalak patra dinus. तपाईंको राहदानी र चालक पऽ िदनुस। thik chha. ठीक छ। tapaai american naagrik ho? तपाईं अमेिरकन नागिरक हो? ho. हो, yo gaadiko kaagaj chha? यो गाडीको कागज छ? ho. yo bhaadaako gaadi ho. 227



गाडी चालक bhansaarko haakim भन्सारको हािकम gaaDi chaalak गाडी चालक bhansaarko haakim भन्सारको हािकम gaaDi chaalak गाडी चालक bhansaarko haakim भन्सारको हािकम gaaDi chaalak गाडी चालक bhansaarko haakim भन्सारको हािकम gaaDi chaalak गाडी चालक bhansaarko haakim भन्सारको हािकम A. B. C. D. E. F. G.



हो, यो भाडाको गाडी हो। kahaa jaadai hunuhunchha? कहाँ जाँदै हनु ु हु न्छ? pokhara पोखरा। tyahaa kati basnuhunchha? यहाँ कित बःनुहु न्छ? dash din. दश िदन। tyahaa ke garnuhunchha? यहाँ के गनुह र् ु न्छ? mero pariwaarlaai bhetchhu. ु मेरो पिरवारलाई भेट्छ। gaadiko diki kholnus. haamile jaach garnuparchha. गाडीको िडकी खोल्नुस।हामीले जाँच गनुप र् छर् । thik chha. ठीक छ। thik chha. dhanyabaad. tapaai aghi badhus. ठीक छ।धन्यवाद।तपाईं अिघ बढनुस।



Where is the driver from? Does the driver own the vehicle he is driving? Where is the driver going? Why is he going there? How long will he be there? What does the guard ask the driver to do at the end? Why?



14. Work with a partner. Take turns role-playing the Customs Official and the Car Driver.



228



End-of-Lesson Tasks 1. Translate the following sentences into English. Check your work with the Answer Key. A. मलाई काठमान्डु मा आउनेजाने िटकट चािहन्छ। malaai Kathmandumaa aaunejaane TikaT chaahinchha. ु म नोभेम्बर दईमा जान्छु र िडसेम्बर तीनमा फकर्न्छ। ु ma November duimaa jaanchhu ra December tinmaa pharkanchhu. मलाई यालको िसट चािहन्छ। malaai jhyaalko siT chaahinchha. B. यो एक्सूेस रे ल हो? yo express rel ho? C. कुन बसिबसौनीबाट िबराटनगरको बस जान्छ? kun basbisaunibaaTa Biratnagarko bas jaanchha? D. ३४ नंम्बरको रे ल ५ िमनेटमा ३ नंम्बरको रे लवे ःटे शनबाट जान्छ। ३४ numberko rel ५ mineTmaa ३ numberko relbe stationbaaTa jaanchha.



2. Work with a partner or in a small group. Look at the pictures and come up with the story. Do you think these people are arriving or departing? Do you think they are on time? Is their flight late? Mention their names, age, profession, what they are wearing, and where and why they need to fly or where they are arriving from. Also, tell how they got to the airport (by car, by bus, by train).



229



Vocabulary List Arriving/Arrivals



Aagaman



आगमन



Attention



Dhyaan dinu



ध्यान िदनु



Baggage



Maalsaamaan



मालसामान



Border



Simaanaa



सीमाना



Bus station



Bas bisauni



बस िबसौनी



Checked



Jaach



जाँच



Checkpoint



Jaachne Thaau



जाँच्ने ठाउँ



Citizen



Naagrik



नागिरक



Customs



Bhansaar



भन्सार



Delay/ed



Dilo



िढलो



Departing/Departures



Prasthaan



ूःथान



Documents



Kaagaj patra



कागज पऽ



Driver’s license



Chaalak patra



चालक पऽ



Express



Express



एक्सूेस



First class



Pahilo klaas



पिहलो क्लास



Flight



Udaan



उडान



Fly



Udnu



उड्नु



Give me …



Malaai dinus



मलाई िदनुस



ID card



Parichay patra



पिरचय पऽ



Inspect



Nirikchhan garnu



िनरीक्षण गनुर्



Inspection



Nirikchhan



िनरीक्षण



Inspector



Nirikchhak



िनरीक्षक



Late



Dhilo



िढलो



Local



Sthaaniya



ःथानीय



One-way



Ektarphi



एकतफ



On-time



Thik samay



ठीक समय



Papers



Kaagaj



कागज



Passenger



Yaatri



याऽी



Passport



Raahdaani



राहदानी



Platform



Relbe station



रे लवे ःटे शन



230



Proceed



Aghi badhnu



अिघ ब नु



Rental car



Bhaadaako gaadi



भाडाको गाडी



Roadblock



Baato banda



बाटो बन्द



Roundtrip



Duitarphi/aaunejaane



दईतफ आउने जाने ु



Schedule



Taalikaa



तािलका



Second class



Dosro klaas



दोॐो क्लास



Show me ….



Malaai dekhaaunus



मलाई दे खाउनुस



Terminal



Bisauni



िबसौनी



Ticket



Tikat



िटकट



Ticket window



Tikat kinne jhyaal



िटकट िकन्ने



To board



Chadnu



च नु



To leave



Chhodnu



छोडनु



To return/come back



Pharkanu



फकर्नु



Train station



Rel station



रे ल ःटे शन



Trunk (of a car)



Diki



िडकी



Update



Nayaa banaaunu



नयाँ बनाउनु



Waiting area



Bishraam kakchha



िवौाम कक्ष



Window seat



Jhyaalko sit



यालको िसट



231



याल



ANSWER KEY Exercise 5 A Schedule



taalikaa



तािलका



B Check-in counter



jaach garnethaau



जाँच गन ठाउँ



C Platform



relbe station



रे लवे ःटे शन



D Ticket



tikat



िटकट



E Passengers



yaatriharu



याऽीहरू



F Baggage



maalsaamaan



मालसामान



G Gate



dhokaa



ढोका



H Waiting area



bishraam kakchha



िवौाम कक्ष



Exercise 7 A. िटकट िकन्ने



याल



tikt kinne jhyaal



B. सामान िलने ठाउँ



saamaan line thaau



C. ध्यान िदनु



dhyaan dunu



D. तािलका



taalikaa



E. एक्सूेस



express



F. रे लवे ःटे सन



relbe station



G. ढोका



dhokaa



Go to the ticket window to buy the tickets. TikaT kinnako laagi TikaT kinne jhyaalmaa jaanus. You can get your baggage at the baggage claim area. tapaai aaphno saamaan saamaan dine Thaaumaa lina saknu hunchha. Attention! All passengers must have a ticket to board the bus. dhyaan dinus! sabai yaatriharusanga bas chaDnakolaagi TikaT hunu parchha. Check the schedule to find out when your flight departs. tapaaiko uDaan kati baje chha taalikaa hernus. The express train is faster because it does not make local stops. express rel chhiTo jaanchha kinabhane Thaau Thaaumaa rokdaina. Each train arrives at a different platform. harek rel pharak pharak relbe stationmaa aauchha. Attention, passengers! Flight #725 is departing from gate A17. yaatriharu dhyaan dinus! uDaan # ७२५ A १७ ko DhokaabaaTa jaanchha.



232



Exercise 8 1. D. Do you want a window seat? Yes, please Tapaailaai jhyaalko siT chaahinchha? ho तपाईंलाई यालको िसट चािहन्छ? हो। 2. B. When is the next bus to City? The next bus to City departs in 20 minutes. Arko bas Pokhara kati baje jaanchha? arko bas Pokhara २० mineTmaa jaanchha. अक बस पोखरा कित बजे जान्छ? अक बस पोखरा २० िमनेटमा जान्छ। 3. A. Where can I buy a local train ticket? At the ticket window next to platform one. Sthaaniya basko TikaT kahaa kinna sakinchha? relbe stationko chheuma TikaT kinne jhyaalmaa. ःथानीय बसको िटकट कहाँ िकन्न सिकन्छ? रे लवे ःटे शनको छे उमा िटकट िकन्ने यालमा। 4. E. At which platform is the express train from Jayanagar arriving? That train will arrive at platform 16 in ten minutes. Kun relbe stationmaa express rel aaipugchha? tyo rel 16 numberko relbe stationmaa dash mineTmaa aaipugchha. कुन रे लवे ःटे शनमा एक्सूेस रे ल आइपुग्छ? यो रे ल १६ नंम्बरको रे लवे ःटे शनमा दश िमनेटमा आइपुग्छ। 5. C. How much is a first class ticket to Birtnagar. It is 150 Rs. Biratnagarko pahilo klassko TikaTko kati parchha? 150 rupiyaa . िबराटनगरको पिहलो क्लासको िटकटको कित पछर् ? १५० रूिपयाँ। Exercise 10 1 A, 2 B, 3 A. 1. A तपाईंसंग बस चढने िटकट हनै ु पछर् । tapaaisanga bas chaDhne TikaT hunai parchha. B तपाईंलाई फेिर चढने िटकट हनै ु पछर् । tapaailaai ferrry chaDhne TikaT hunui parchha. 2. A मलाई दोॐो क्लासको पोखरा जाने िटकट चािहन्छ। malaai dosro klaasko Pokhara jaane TikaT chaahinchha. B मलाई पिहलो क्लासको पोखरा जाने िटकट चािहन्छ। malaai pahilo klassko Pokhara jaane TikaT chaahinchha. 3. A. अक एक्सूेस रे ल १५ नंम्बरको रे लवे ःटे शनबाट १० िमनेटमा जान्छ। arko express rel १५ numberko relbe stationbaaTa १० mineTmaa jaanchha. B अक ःथानीय बस १५ नंम्बरको रे लवे ःटे शनबाट १० िमनेटमा जान्छ। arko sthaaniya rel १५ numberko relbe stationbaaTa १० mineTmaa jaanchha.



233



Exercise 12 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.



D E F C A B



Exercise 13 A. B. C. D. E. F. G.



Where is the driver from? U.S. Does the driver own the vehicle he is driving? No, it is a rental car. Where is the driver going? Pokhara Why is he going there? To visit family How long will he be there? Ten days What does the guard ask the driver to do at the end? Open the trunk Why? To do an inspection



Customs Official: Car Driver: CO: CD: CO: CD: CO: CD: CO: CD: CO: CD: CO: CD: CO:



Give me your passport and driver’s license. OK Are you a U.S. citizen? Yes. Do you have papers for this car? Yes. It is a rental car. Where are you going? Pokhara. How long will you be there? Ten days. What will you do there? I will visit my family. Please open the trunk. We need to do an inspection. OK. OK, thank you. You may proceed.



End of Lesson Exercise 1 A. I need to buy a roundtrip ticket to Kathmandu, please. I leave on November 12 and return on December 3. I want a window seat. B. Is this an express train? C. What platform does the bus to Biratnagar leave from? D. Train 34 is departing from platform three in five minutes.



234



Lesson 15 At School



िव ालयमा bidyaalaymaa



This lesson will introduce you to: - Vocabulary related to classroom activities. - Vocabulary related to being a student. - The education system in Nepal.



In Nepal, there are up to ten grades in high school, followed by two years for secondary higher education. The final examination known as School Leaving certificate (SLC), given on the final year of 10th grade of high school, decides whether one will make it to colleges or not. SLC is one of the most serious exams and the most talked about exam in Nepal. After passing SLC, one has the option of studying for higher secondary, which is another two years (11th and 12th grade) study or to undertake a two year course called “Intermediate” or “Proficiency certificate” in a chosen subject. A Bachelor degree is a three year course, and a Masters degree is a two year course, except on internationally recognized universities such as Kathmandu University, where it is four to five years. Teaching in most universities is done mainly in English. Due to lack of course materials in Nepali, students prefer to study using English books and materials such as CD-ROMs and multi media. Exams can be taken in either Nepali or English.



235



Compulsory education is up to 7th grade and the government encourages every one to get their children to school, but socio-economic factors can be a major hurdle or a limitation in many cases. Parents can not afford to send their children to school due to financial restrictions, as the government has not been able to provide free education to every one. Commonly studied subjects include Nepali, English, math, science, geography, and history, in addition to computer science and vocational subjects. The average level of education is grade ten in urban areas and grade five in rural areas. Education Track in Nepal • • • • • •



1st to 5th Grade : Primary School : 5 years 6th to 7th Grade : Secondary School : 2 years 8th to 10th Grade : Upper Secondary School 3 years 11th to 12th Grade : Higher Secondary School: 2 years Bachelor's Degree: 3 to five year course Master's Degree : 2 to 3 year course



236



1. Familiarize yourself with the new vocabulary. Listen to the speaker and read the following text under each of the pictures.



A student writes on the blackboard with chalk. bidyaarthi chakle blackboardmaa lekhchha. िब ाथ चकले लाकबोडर् मा



A student raises her hand to ask a question. bidyaarthi prashna sodhnako laagi haat uThaauchha. िब ाथ ूँन सोध्नको लािग



A teacher teaches students math. sikchhak bidyaarthiharulaai hisaab sikaaunuhunchha. िशक्षक िब ाथ ह लाई िहसाब



ले छ।



हात उठाउँ छ।



िसकाउनुहु न्छ।



Students study chemistry in middle school. bidyaarthiharu maadhyamik bidyaalaymaa rasaayanshaastra adhyayan garchhan. िब ाथ ह माध्यिमक



First grade students read a textbook. pahilo kakchhaako bidyaarthiharu paaThyapustak paDhchhan.



Students will study art in this class. yo kalaasmaa bidyaarthiharu chitra banaauna sikchhan.



िब ालयमा रसायनशा अध्ययन गछर् न ्।



पिहलो कक्षाको िब ाथ ह पा यपुःतक पढ्छन।्



237



यो क्लासमा िब ाथ ह बनाउन िसक्छन।्



िचऽ



There is a book, a notebook, and a calculator. tyahaa kitaab, kaapi ra gananaa garne yantra/kyaalkuleTer chha. त्यहाँ िकताब, कापी र गणना



There is a desk and a chair in the classroom. tyahaa kakchhaamaa desk ra kursi chha.



गन यन्ऽ / क्यालकुलेटर छ।



छ।



त्यहाँ कक्षामा डे ःक र कुस



Students write with pens and pencils. bidyaarthiharu kalam ra sisaa kalamle lekhchhan. िब ाथ ह



कलम र िससा



कलमले ले छन।्



2. Study the new vocabulary you learned from the exercise above, along with some additional words that you may use in the classroom. class



kakchhaa



कक्षा



desk



desk



डे ःक



chair



kursi



कुस



blackboard



blackboard



chalk



chak



चक



pen



kalam



कलम



pencil



sisaakalam



िससाकलम



notebook



kaapi



कापी



computer



computer



क पुटर



printer



printer



ूीन्टर



keyboard



keyboard



िकबोडर्



monitor



moniter



मोिनटर



teacher



shikshak



िशक्षक



student



bidyaarthi



िब ाथ



लाकबोडर्



238



3. Work with a partner and create sentences using the new vocabulary from the exercises above for the following items.



4. Listen to the dialogue while you read along in the workbook. Underline the new vocabulary. What is your name? tapaaiko naam ke ho? तपाईंको नाम के हो?



My name is Shyam mero naam Shyam ho. मेरो नाम ँयाम हो।



How old are you? tapaai kati barsha hunubhayo? तपाईं कित वषर् हनु ु भयो?



I am 16 years old. ma 16 barsha bhae. म सो॑ बषर् भएँ।



What grade are you in? tapaai kun kakchhaamaa paDhnuhunchha? तपाईं कुन कक्षामा पढ्नुहु न्छ?



I am in 10th grade. ma dash kakchhaamaa paDhchhu. ु म दश कक्षामा पढ्छ।



239



What subjects do you study? tapaai kun bishay paDhnuhunchha? तपाईं कुन िवषय पढ्नुहु न्छ।



Math, biology, music, literature, and history. hisaab, jibbigyaan, sangit, saahitya ra itihaans. िहसाब,जीविवज्ञान, संगीत, सािहत्य र इितहाँस।



What is your favorite subject? tapaiko manparne bishay ke ho? तपाईंको मनपन िवषय के हो?



My favorite subject is biology. mero manparne bishay jibbigyaan ho. मेरो मनपन िवषय जीविवज्ञान हो।



Are you a good student? tapaai raamro bidyaarthi hunuhunchha? तपाईं राॆो िब ाथ हनु ु हु न्छ?



Yes, I‘m a good student. ho, ma raamro bidyaarthi hu. हो, म राॆो िब ाथ हँु ।



What will you do after school? tapaai bidyaalay pachhi ke garnuhunchha? तपाईं िब ालय पिछ के गनुह र् ु न्छ?



I will go to college; I want to be a doctor. ma kalej jaanchhu, malaai Daaktar huna manlaagchha. म कलेज जान्छु, मलाई डाक्टर हन ु मनलाग्छ।



What do you like to do after school? school pachhi tapaailaai ke garna manlaagchha? ःकुल पिछ तपाईंलाई के गनर् मनलाग्छ?



After school I like to listen to music. school pachhi malaai sangit sunna manlaagchha. ःकुल पिछ मलाई संगीत सुन्न मनलाग्छ?



5. Listen and read along to hear some of the new words you should have underlined in Exercise 4. grade



darjaa/shreni



दजार् / ौेणी



subject



bishay



िवषय



favorite



manparne



मनपन



math



hisaab



िहसाब



biology



jibbigyaan



जीविवज्ञान



music



sangit



संगीत



literature



saahitya



सािहत्य



history



itihaas



इितहाँस



college



kalej



कलेज



like



manparnu



मनपनुर्



listen to



sunna



सुन्न



240



Grammar note: who + the form of to like + infinitive. For example: Shyam likes to study math.



ँयामलाई िहसाब पढ्न मनलाग्छ।



Shyamlaai hisaab paDhna manlaagchha. Prakash likes to listen to music after school.



ूकाशलाई ःकुल पिछ संगीत सुन्न मनलाग्छ। Prakashlaai school pachhi sangit sunna manlaagchha. Shanta likes to read in the evenings.



शान्तालाई बेलुका पढ्न मनलाग्छ।



Shantalaai belukaa paDhna manlaagchha. We like to speak Nepali in our class.



हामीलाई कक्षामा टील बोल्न मनलाग्छ। Haamilaai kakchhaamaa Til bolna manlaagchha 6. Work with a partner. Come up with a dialogue similar to the one in Exercise 4. List your favorite subjects, say how good you think you are at each of them, say what profession you are going to choose, and say what you like to do after school.



7. Familiarize yourself with the new vocabulary. Listen to the speaker as you go over the dialogue. A. Listen to the recording and take notes. recording sunera notes lekhnus. रकोिड सुनेर नोट ले नुस। B. Put your pencils down. tapaaiko saisaakalam tala raakhnus. तपाईंको िससाकलम तल रा नुस। C. Write your answer on the blackboard. blackboardmaa tapaaiko uttar lekhnus. यालकबोडर् मा तपाईंको उ र ले नुस। D. Open your textbooks. tapaaiko kitaab kholnus. तपाईको िकताब खोल्नुस। E. Raise your hand if you have a question. prashna chha bhane haat uThaaunus. ूँन छ भने हात उठाउनुस।



241



F. Write down your homework, please. tapaaiko grihakaarya lekhnus. तपाईंको गृहकायर् ले नुस।



8. Listen to the following questions and write down the answers that you hear. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. ितमी िब ालयमा के गछ ? timi bidyaalaymaa ke garchhau? 2. ितमी कुन कक्षामा पढ्छौ? timi kun kakchhaamaa paDhchhau? 3. ितमी कुन कुन िवषय पढ्छौ? timi kun kun bishay paDchhau? 4. ितॆो मनपन िवषय के हो? timro manparne bishay kun ho? 5. ितमी राॆो िब ाथ हौ? timi raamro bidyaarthi hau? 9. Work with a partner and make up similar dialogues using expressions from Exercise 9. 10. Work in small groups and describe the following pictures. Come up with ages for the students and the teacher, their names, the subjects they study/teach, what they’re doing right now, what they are wearing, if they seem to like their class and their teacher, etc.



242



11. Listen to and read the following text about the student’s schedule, and then answer the questions below. The new word “busy” is introduced in the text. Try to guess this and other new words from the context. Check your work in the Answer Key. मेरो नाम अनुपमा क्षेऽी हो।म बागमती बोिडर् ङ िब ालयको िब ाथ हँु । म अंमेजी अध्ययन गछर्ु ।मलाई



अनुवादक बन्न मनलाग्छ। मेरो व्यःत तािलका छ। सोमबार, बुधबार र शुबबार, म आठ बजे िब ालय



ु िब ालय पिछ चार बजे म काममा जान्छ। ु म रे ु रेन्टमा वेटरे सको काम गछर्ु । काम पिछ दश बजे जान्छ।



ु मंगलबार र िबहीबार म दश बजे कक्षामा जान्छ। ु िब ालय पिछ बा॑ बजे म पुःतकालय म घर जान्छ।



ु िदउँ सो तीन घण्टा म पुःतकालयमा अध्ययन गछर्ु ।म मेरो गृहकायर् िवहान र ह ाअन्तमा गछर्ु । जान्छ। mero naam Anupama Chhetri ho. ma Bagmati Bording bidyaalaymaako bidyaarthi hu. ma angreji adhyayan garchhu. mlaai anubaadak banna manlaagchha. mero byasta taalikaa chha. sombaar, budhabaar ra shukrabaar, ma aaTh baje bidyaalay jaanchhu. bidyaalay pachhi chaar baje ma kaammaa jaanchhu. ma resTurenTmaa wetresko kaam garchhu. kaam pachhi dash baje ma ghar jaanchhu. mangalbaar, ra bihibaar ma dash baje kakchhaamaa jaanchhu. bidyaalay pachhi baahra baje ma pustakaalay jaanchhu. diu tin ghanTaa ma pustakaalaymaa adhyayan garchhu. ma mero grihkaarya bihaana ra haptaaantamaa garchhu. A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H.



What is the student’s name? Where does she go to school? What does she study? What is her school schedule on Monday, Wednesday and Friday? What is her schedule on Tuesday and Thursday? What job does she have and when does she work? When does the student do homework? What does the student want to do after finishing school?



243



End-of-Lesson Tasks 1. Go over the text from Exercise 12 again. Tell the class about your schedule. Use the questions after the text as an outline for your story. 2. Look at the pictures and tell a story about what you see. Include the grade the students are in, the subjects they are studying, what the teacher is doing, what the students and teachers are wearing, etc.



244



Vocabulary List Art



Kalaa



कला



Basketball



Basketball



बाःकेटबौल



Biology



Jibigyaan



जीविवज्ञान



Blackboard



Blackboard



यालकबोडर्



Busy



Byasta



यःत



Chair



Kurshi



कुस



Chalk



Chalk



चक



Chemistry



Rasaayanshaastra



रसायनशा



Class



Kakchha



कक्षा



College/University



College/biswabidyaalay



कलेज, िव िव ालय



Computer



Computer



क पुटर



Desk



Desk



डे ःक



Elementary School



Praathmik bidyaalay



ूाथिमक िव ालय



English



Angreji



अंमेजी



Grade



Shreni



ौेणी



High School



Uchha maadhmik bidyaalay



उ च माध्यिमक िव ालय



History



Itihaas



इितहाँस



Homework



Grihakaarya



गृहकायर्



Literature



Saahitya



सािहत्य



Math



Hisaab



िहसाब



Middle School



Maadhyaamik bidyaalay



माध्यिमक िव ालय



Music



Sangit



संगीत



Notebook



Kaapi



कापी



Pen



Kalam



कलम



Pencil



Sisaakalam



िससाकलम



Photography



Tasbirkalaa



तःवीरकला



Reading



Padhdai



पढदै



Student



Bidyaarthi



िव ाथ



Subject(s)



Bishayharu



िवषयह



Tape recorder



Tape recorder



टे प रकोडर् र



245



Teacher



Sikchhak



िशक्षक



To like



Manparnu



मनपनुर्



To read



Padhnu



पढ्नु



To study



Adhyayan garnu



अध्ययन गनुर्



To write



Lekhnu



ले नु



Listen to the recording and take notes. Put your pencils down.



Recording senera notes lekhnu



रकोिड सुनेर नोट ले नु तपाईंको िससाकलम तल रा नुस



Write your answer on the blackboard. Open your textbooks.



Tapaaiko sisaakalam tala raakhnus Tapaaiko uttar blackboardmaa likhnus Tapaaiko kitaab kholnus.



Raise your hand!



Haat uthaaunus



हात उठाउनुस



Write down your homework, please



Homework lekhnus.



तपाईंको उ र



तपाईंको िकताब खोल्नुस होमवकर् ले नुस



246



यालकबोडर् मा ले नुस



ANSWER KEY Exercise 8 1. What do you do at school? timi schoolmaa ke garchhau? ितमी ःकुलमा के गछ ? I study many subjects. ma dherai bishayharu paDhchhu. ु म धेरै िवषयह पढछ। 2. What grade are you in? timi kati kalaasmaa paDhchhau? ितमी कित क्लासमा पढ्छौ? I am in 6th grade. ma chha kalaasmaa paDhchhu. ु म छ क्लासमा पढ्छ। 3. What subjects are you studying? timi kun kun bishayharu pDhchhau? ितमी कुन कुन िवषयह पढछौ? Math, Nepali, science, geography, and English. ma hisaab, nepali,bigyaan,bhugol ra angreji paDhchhu. ु म िहसाब,नेपाली,िवज्ञान,भूगोल र अंमेजी पढछ। 4. What is your favorite subject? timro manparne bishay ke ho? ितॆो मनपन िवषय के हो? Geography bhugol भूगोल 5. Are you a good student? timi raamro bidyaarthi hau? ितमी राॆो िव ाथ हौ? I’m very good at chemistry, but I’m bad at math. mero rasaayanshaatra dherai raamro chha tara hisaab raamro chhaina. मेरो रसायनशा धेरै राॆो छ तर िहसाब राॆो छै न।



247



Exercise 11 A. What is the student’s name? Her name is Anupama Chhetri B. Where does she go to school? She goes to Bagmati bidyaalay. C. What does she study? She studies English. D. What is her school schedule on Monday, Wednesday and Friday? She goes to school from 8:00am until 4:00pm. E. What is her schedule on Tuesday and Thursday? She goes to class at 10am, then at 12:00 she goes to the library to study for three hours. F. What job does she have and when does she work? She works as a waitress in restaurant from 4:00 to 10:00pm on Monday, Wednesday and Friday. G. When does the student do homework? She does homework on weekends and in the mornings. H. What does the student want to do after finishing school? She wants to be an interpreter. My name is Anupama Chhetri. I am a student at Bagmati boarding school. I study English. I want to be an interpreter. I have a busy schedule. On Monday, Wednesday, and Friday, I go to school at 8:00. After school, at 4:00pm, I go to work. I work at a restaurant as a waitress. After work, at 10 pm, I go home. On Tuesday and Thursday, I go to class at 10am. After school, at 12:00, I go to the library. I study at the library for three hours in the afternoon. I do my homework on the weekends and in the mornings.



248



Lesson 16 Recreation and Leisure मनोरं जन र फुसर्द manoranjan ra phursad



This lesson introduces you to: - Vocabulary related to recreational and leisure activities. - Ways to discuss hobbies in Nepali. 1. Read the sentences with the new vocabulary and try to guess the meaning of any unknown words.



logne maanchhe ra swaasni maanchheko naach. yo uniharuko saukh ho. लोग्ने मान्छे र ःवाःनी मान्छे को



wahaa peshaawar sangitkaar hunuhunchha. piyaanowaadak saangitik kaaryakrammaa piyaano bajaaunuhunchha. वहाँ पेशावर संगीतकार



yo logne maanchhe tasbir khichchha. wahaa tasbir khichne maanchhe ho. यो लोग्ने मान्छे



नाच। यो उनीहरुको सौख हो।



हनु पयानोवादक ु हन्छ। ु



तःवीर िखच्छ।वहाँ



सांगीितक कायर्बममा पयानो



तःवीर िखच्ने मान्छे



बजाउनुहु न्छ।



हो।



.



249



yo Dan Bahadur ho. usko saukh soccer ho.



logne maanchhe himaalmaa ski garchha. usko saukh ski ho.



यो दान बहादरु हो। उःको सौख



लोग्ने मान्छे िहमालमा ःकी



mero saathi Bina harek diuso klaas pachhi dauDchha. मेरो साथी बना हरे क



गछर् । उःको सौख ःकी हो।



िदउँ सो



सकर हो।



लास पिछ



दौड्छ।



mero bhaailaai bowl garna manlaagchha. yo usko saukh ho.



मेरो भाइलाई बौल गनर् मनलाग्छ।यो उःको सौख हो।



mausam raamro chha bhane, keTaakeTiharu garmimaa harek din pauDi khelchhan. मौसम राॆो छ भने , केटाकेटीहरु गम मा हरे क िदन पौडी खेल्छन ् ।



mero bahinilaai chitra banaauna manlaagchha. मेरो बिहनीलाई िचऽ बनाउन मनलाग्छ।



sainikharu TenTmaa taas khelchhan. uniharulaai taas khelna manlaagchha. सैिनकहरु टे न्टमा तास खेल्छन ्।



उनीहरुलाई तास खेल्न मनलाग्छ।



250



yuwaa logne maanchhe tennis courtmaa tennis khelnuhunchha. यूवा लोग्ने मान्छे टे िनस कोटर् मा टे िनस खेल्नुहु न्छ।



shrimaan ra shrimati harek belukaa hiDchhan. ौीमान ् र ौीमती



हरे क बेलुका िहं ड्छन।्



duijanaa sipaahiharu chess khelchhan. yo uniharuko saukh ho. दईजना िसपाहीहरु चेस खेल्छन।यो उनीहरुको सौख ् ु हो।



yo maanchhe gitaar bajaaunuhunchha ra git gaaunuhunchha. यो मान्छे गीतार बजाउनुहु न्छ र गीत गाउनुहु न्छ।



2. Now listen to the speaker. Check to see if your guesses were correct for exercise 1. Repeat the new words as many times as you need to feel comfortable with the pronunciation. Play



khelnu



खेल्नु



Cards



taas



तास



To ski



ski garnu



ःकी गनुर्



Hobby



saukh / ruchi



सौख / रूिच



To dance



naachnu



नाच्नु



Tennis



tennis



टे िनस



Tennis Court



tennis court/ tennis khelne thaau



टे िनस कोटर् / टे िनस खेल्ने ठाँउ पयानो बजाउनु



Play piano



piano bajaaunu



Musician



sangitkaar



संगीतकार



To take photos



photo khichnu



फोटो िखच्नु



Photographer



tasbir khichne maanchhe



तःवीर िखच्ने मान्छे



To play guitar



gitaar bajaaunu



गीतार बजाउनु



To sing



git gaaunu



गीत गाउनु



Songs



git



गीत



Chess



chess



चेस



251



To walk



hidnu



िहं ड्नु



To swim



paudikhelnu



पौडीखेल्नु



Swimming pool



paudikhelne thaau



पौडीखेल्ने ठाँउ



To run



daudnu



दौड्नु



To bowl



bowl garnu



बौल गनुर्



Soccer



soccer



सकर



3. Listen to the dialogues as you read them. 1. What will they do after school? uniharu school pachhi ke garchhan? उनीहरु ःकूल पिछ के गछर् न।्



2. What sports does he play? u kun khel khelchha? ऊ कुन खेल खेल्छ?



3. What does she do today? aaja u ke garchha? आज ऊ के गछर् ?



A. They will swim after school. uniharu school pachhi pauDi khelchhan. उनीहरु ःकूल पिछ पौडी खेल्छन।् B. They will dance after school. uniharu school pachhi naach chhan. उनीहरु ःकूल पिछ नाच छन।् C. They will sing after school. uniharu school pachhi git gaauchhan. उनीहरु ःकूल पिछ गीत गाउँ छन।् A. He plays soccer and basketball. u soccer ra basketbaal khelchha. ऊ सकर र बाःकेटबल खेल्छ। B. He plays soccer and volleyball. u soccer ra volleyball khelchha. ऊ सकर र भिलबल खेल्छ। C. He plays soccer and tennis. u soccer ra tennis khelchha. ऊ सकर र टे िनस खेल्छ। A. She sings songs. u git gaauchha. ऊ गीत गाउँ छ। B. She paints pictures. u tasbir banaauchha. ऊ तःवीर बनाउँ छ। C. She takes pictures. u tasbir khichchha. ऊ तःवीर िखच्छ।



252



4. Do you play chess? tapaai chess khelnuhunchha? तपा चेस खेल्नुहु न्छ? Do you play guitar? tapaai guitaar bajaaunuhunchha? तपा गीतार बजाउनुहु न्छ? Do you play piano? tapaai piano bajaaunuhunchha? तपा पयानो बजाउनुहु न्छ? 5. What are your hobbies? tapaaiko saukhharu ke ke hun? तपा को सौखहरु के के हन ु ्?



A. Yes, I play chess. ho, ma chess khelchhu. ु हो, म चेस खेल्छ। B. No, I play the piano. hoina, ma piano bajaauchhu. ु होईन, म पयानो बजाउँ छ। C. Yes, I play the piano. ho, ma piano bajaauchhu. ु हो, म पयानो बजाउँ छ। A. I like to run and take pictures. malaai dauDna ra tasbir khichna manlaagchha. मलाई दौड्न र तःवीर िखच्न मनलाग्छ। B. I like to read and swim. malaai paDhna ra pauDikhelna manlaagchha. मलाई प न र पौडीखेल्न मनलाग्छ। C. I like to walk and play soccer malaai hiDna ra soccer khelna manlaagchha. मलाई िहं ड्न र सकर खेल्न मनलाग्छ।



4. Work with a partner. Take turns reading the dialogues in Exercise 3.



5. Work with a partner or in a small group. Make up exchanges using the models and phrases from Exercise 3. 6. Reconstruct the questions in the Nepali. Check your work with the Answer Key. A. ______________________? - Yes, I play chess. ho, ma chess khelchhu. हो, म चेस खेल्छु। B. _______________________? - Yes, I play the piano. ho, ma piano bajaauchhu. ु हो, म पयानो बजाउँ छ। C. _______________________? - My hobbies are running and taking photos. mero saukhharu dauDne ra phoTo khichne ho. मेरो सौखहरु दौड्ने र फोटो िखच्ने हो।



253



D. _______________________? - He plays soccer and basketball. wahaa soccer ra basketball khelnuhunchha. वहाँ सकर र बाःकेटबल खेल्नुहु न्छ? E. _______________________? - My hobbies are reading and swimming. mero saukhharu paDhne ra pauDi khelne ho. मेरो सौखहरु प ने र पौडीखेल्ने हो। F._____________________________? - She likes to walk and play guitar. wahaalaai hiDna ra guitaar bajaauna manlaagchha. वहाँलाई िहड्न र गीतार बजाउँ न मनलाग्छ।



Grammar Note: from…..to…… Time: dekhi……………… samma. Place: baaTa ……………… samma. Examples: Rita 10 baje dekhi chaar baje samma kaam garchha. रीता दश बजे दे खी चार बजे सम्म काम गछर् । Rita works from ten to four. AmericabaaTa Nepal samma hawaai jahaajmaa dui din laagchha. अमे रकाबाट नेपाल सम्म हवाईजहाजमा दई ु िदन लाग्छ। It takes two days to get from America to Nepal in an airplane.



7. Read the text and mark the following statements as either True or False. Check your work with the Answer Key. ु चौरको ु चौरमा छ। म पोखराको बाटले मेरो नाम बीर बहादरु गुरूंग हो। मेरो घर पोखरामा बाटले



ु गन्डकी बोिडग व ालयमा प छ। म मेरो क ा र सौखहरूमा धेरै ु रो टोलीमा खेल्छ।मे



ु म कम्पुटर साइन्स प छु र वँव व ालयको सकर यःत छ।



लास हे रक िदन साढे आठ बजे दे िख िदउँ सो तीन बजे सम्म हन्छ।ःक ूल ु



पिछ हे रक िदन म चार बजे दे िख छ बजे सम्म सकर अभ्यास गछर्ु ।मलाई सकर खेल्न मन लाग्छ।मेरो साथी र म ह ान्तमा पिन खेल्छ ।मलाई पौडीखेल्न र गीतार बजाउन पिन



254



मनलाग्छ।मलाई राॆोसंग गीतार बजाउन आउँ दै न।यो ह ान्तमा मेरो साथी र म पोखराको, लेकसाइड रं गशालामा सांगीितक कायर्बममा जान्छ ।हाॆो मनपन गायकले गाउनुहु न्छ।सांगीितक



कायर्बम पिछ हामी रे ु रेन्टमा जान्छ र खाना खान्छ ।



mero naam Bir bahadur Gurung ho. mero ghar Pokharamaa baTulechaurmaa chha. ma Pokharako baTulechaurko GanDaki borDing bidyaalaymaa paDhchhu. ma mero kakchhaa ra saukhharumaa dherai byasta chhu. ma computer science paDhchhu ra biswabidyaalayko soccer Tolimmaa khelchhu. mero klaas harek din saaDhe aaTh baje dekhi diuso tin baje samma hunchha. school pachhi ma harek din chaar baje dekhi chha baje samma soccer abhyaas garchhu. malaai soccer khelna manlaagchha. mero saathi ra ma haptaaantamaa pani khelchhau. malaai pauDi khelna ra gitaar bajaauna pani manlaagchha. malaai raamrosanga gitaar bajaauna aaudaina. yo haptaaantmaa mero saathi ra ma Pokharako lekside rangshaalaamaa saangitik kaaryakrammaa jaanchhau. haamro manparne gaayak gaaunuhunchha. saangitik kaaryakram pachhi haami reshTurenTmaa jaanchhau ra khaanaakhaanchhau. A. _____Bir Bahadur Gurug is from Pokhara, BaTulechaur. B. _____He is a high school student at GanDaki boarding school in Pokhara, batulechaur. C. _____ Bir Bahadur Gurung studies chemistry. D. _____ Bir Bhadur Gurung plays on the university soccer team. E. _____ He had class every day from 8:30 to 3:00. F. _____Bir Bahadur Gurung likes to swim and play the piano. H. _____After the concert Bir Bahadur Gurung will go home to do his homework.



8. Work with a partner or in a small group and come up with the description of a busy schedule. Use the statements from Exercise 7 as an outline for your story. The pictures given below can help you choose the activities to describe.



255



9. Listen to the vocabulary as you look at the pictures. Try to match the Nepali words with the pictures. Check your answers with the Answer Key.



1



2



3



4



5



6



पौडी खेल्ने ठाउँ



paudi khelne thaau



सकर मैदान



soccer maidaan



टे िनस खेल्ने ठाँउ



tennis khelne thaau



बौिलंग यािल



bowling alley



यायामशाला रं गशाला



byaayaamshaalaa rangshaalaa



256



10. Read the statements in the second box below and think about their meanings. Cross out the words or phrases that do not make sense, and replace them with an appropriate word from the list in the chart above the statements. Check your work with the Answer Key. gymnasium byaayaamshaalaa यायामशाला



stadium rangshaalaa रं गशाला



bowling alley bowling alley बौिलंग यािल



tennis courts Tennis khelne Thaau टे िनस खेल्ने ठाँउ



swimming pool pauDikhelne Thaau पौडीखेल्ने ठाँउ



playing field khelko maidaan खेलको मैदान



A. ब ाथ हरु टे िनस कोटर् मा भिलबल खेल्छन।् bidyaarthiharu Tennis courtmaa volleyball khelchhan. B. केटाकेटीहरु रं गशालामा पौडीखेल्छन।् keTaakeTiharu rangshaalaamaa pauDi khelchhan. C. केटीहरु िहमालमा बौिलंग गनर् जान्छन।् keTiharu himaalmaa bowling garna jaanchhan. D.मेरो साथीहरु बौिलंग यािलमा दगुनर् जान्छन।् mero saathiharu bowling alleymaa dagurna jaanchha. E. केटाहरु पौडीखेल्ने ठाउँ मा सकर खेल्छन।् keTaaharu pauDikhelne Thaaumaa soccer khelchhan.



11. Listen to the statements and write down what you hear, and translate it into English. Check your work in the Answer Key.



1. 2. 3. 4. 5.



257



12. Work with a partner. Look at the pictures and make up dialogues about someone’s hobbies. Use the models and phrases from Exercise 12.



258



End-of-Lesson Tasks.



1. Answer the following questions in Nepali. A. What is your favorite sport or recreational activity? B. How often do you participate in your activity? C. What is your favorite hobby? D. What did you do last weekend? E. What will you do next weekend?



2. Work with a partner or in a small group. In Nepali, describe the pictures below, using the vocabulary you have learned in this lesson.



259



Vocabulary List Bowling alley



Bowling alley



बौिलंग यािल



Bowling



Bowling



बौिलंग



Cards



Taas



तास



Chess



Chess



चेस



Computer science



Computer bigyaan



कम्पुटर व ान



Gymnasium



Byaamshaalaa



Hobby



Saukh / ruchi



सौख / रुिच



Paint pictures



Chitra banaaunu



िचऽ बनाउनु



Playing field



Khelko maidaan



खेलको मैदान



To bowl



Bowl garnu



बौल गनुर्



To dance



Naachnu



नाच्नु



To play chess, cards; play soccer, volleyball;



Chess, taas, soccer, volleyball khelnu



चेस, तास, सकर, भिलबल



To run



Daudnu



दौड्नु



To sing



Git gaaunu



गीत गाउनु



To ski



Ski garnu



ःकी गनुर्



To swim



Paudi khelnu



पौडी खेल्नु



To take pictures



Tasbir khichnu



तःवीर िखच्नु



Soccer field



Soccer maidaan



सकर मैदान



Songs



Git



गीत



Stadium



Rangshaalaa



रं गशाला



Swimming pool



Paudi khelne Thaau



पौडी खेल्ने ठाउँ



Tennis



Tennis



टे िनस



Tennis court



Tennis court



टे िनस कोटर्



Play a guitar



Gitaar bajaaunu



गीतार बजाउँ नु



Play a piano



Piano bajaaunu



260



यायामशाला



खेल्नु



पयानो बजाउँ नु



ANSWER KEY Exercise 6 A. तपा B. तपा



चेस खेल्नुहु न्छ?



पयानो बजाउनुहु न्छ?



tapaai chess khelnuhunchha? tapaai piano bajaaunuhunchha?



C. तपा को सौखहरु के के हन ु ्?



tapaaiko saukhharu ke ke hun?



E. तपा को सौखहरु के के हन ु ्?



tapaaiko saukhharu ke ke hun?



D. वहाँ कुन खेल खेल्नुहु न्छ?



F. वहाँलाई के गनर् मनलाग्छ?



wahaa kun khel khelnuhunchha? wahaalaai ke garna manlaagchha?



Exercise 7 My name is Bir Bahadur Gurung. I am from Pokhara, Batulechaur. I go to college at GanDaki Boradibg School in Pokhara, Batulechaur. I am very busy with my classes and my hobbies. I study computer science, and I play on the university soccer Team. I have class every day from 8:30 to 3:00 in the afternoon. After school I have soccer practice every day from 4:00 to 6:00. I like to play soccer. My friends and I play on the weekends too. I also like to swim and to play the guitar. I’m not very good at the guitar. This weekend my friends and I will go to a concert at the stadium in Pokhara, Lakeside. Our favorite singer will sing. After the concert we will go to a restaurant and have dinner. A. B. C. D. E. F. H.



T Bir Bahadur Gurung is from Pokhara, Batulechaur. F He is a high school student at Gandaki Birading school in Pokhara, Batulechaur. F Bir Bahadur studies chemistry. T Bir Bahadur plays on the university soccer team. T He has class every day from 8:30 to 3:00. F Bir Bahadur likes to swim and play the piano. F After the concert Bir Bahadur will go home to do his homework.



Exercise 9 बौिलंग यािल



bowling alley



2. Gymnasium



यायामशाला



byaamshaalaa



3. Soccer field



सकर मैदान



soccer maidaan



4. Stadium



रं गशाला



rangshaalaa



5. Swimming pool



पौडी खेल्ने ठाउँ



paudi khelne thaau



6. Tennis court



टे िनस कोटर्



tennis court



1. Bowling Alley



261



Exercise 10 A. The students play volleyball in the gymnasium. A. ब ाथ हरु यायामशालामा भिलबल खेल्छन ्। bidyaarthiharu byaayaamshaalaamaa volleyball khelchhan. B. The children swim in the swimming pool. B. केटाकेटीहरू पौडी खेल्ने ठाउँ मा पौडी खेल्छन ्। KeTaakeTiharu pauDi khelne Thaaumaa pauDi khelchhan. C. The girls go bowling in the bowling alley. C. केटीहरू बौिलंग यािल बौिलंग गनर् जान्छन।् keTiharu bowling alley bowling garna jaanchhan. D. My friends go for a run in the stadium. D. मेरो साथीहरू रं गशालामा दौड्न जान्छन।् mero saathiharu rangshaalaamaa dauDna jaanchhan. E. Boys play soccer on the playing field. E. केटाहरु सकर मैदानमा सकर खेल्छन।् keTaaharu soccer maidaanmaa soccer khelchhan. Exercise 11 1. She will sing after school. ःकुल पिछ ऊ गीत गाउँ छ। school pachhi u git gaauchha. 2. He likes to play soccer and basketball. उःलाई सकर र बाःकेटबल खेल्न मनलाग्छ। uslaai soccer ra basketball khelna manlaagchha. 3. She doesn’t paint pictures, but she takes photographs. B. ऊ िचऽ बनाउँ दै न तर पयानो बजाउँ छ। U chitra banaaudaina tara piano bajaauchha. 4. Do you play guitar? तपा गीतार बजाउँ नुहु न्छ? tapaai gitaar bajaaunuhunchha?



No, I play piano. ु होईन,म पयानो बजाउँ छ। hoina, ma piano bajaauchhu.



262



5. What are your hobbies? तपा को सौखहरु के के हन ु ्? tapaaiko saukhharu ke ke hun?



I like to read and dance. मलाई प न र नाच्न मनलाग्छ। malaai panDna ra naachna manlaagchha.



263



Lesson 17 Health and the Human Body ःवाःथ्य र मानव शरीर swaasthya ra maanab sharer



This lesson will introduce you to: - Vocabulary related to the human body. - Asking questions about a person’s state of health. - Answering questions about health conditions. - Typical exchanges at the doctor’s office.



1. Listen as the speaker recites the vocabulary. Then study the diagram and match the Nepali terms for each body part with the diagram. Abdomen



bhudi / aandraabhudi



भुड ँ ी / आन्िाभुड ँ ी



Arm



paakhuraa



पाखुरा



Back



pithiu



पठ्यूँ



Chest



chhaati



छाती



Chin



chudo



िचउँ डो



Ear



kaan



कान



Elbow



kuhino



कुिहनो



Eye



aakhaa



आँखा



Face



anuhaar



अनुहार



Fingers



aulaa



औ ंला



Foot/Feet



khuttaa/khuttaaharu



खुट्टा / खुट्टाहरु



Genitals



jananendriya



योिन / जनने न्िय



Groin



kaap



काप



Hair



kapaal



कपाल



Hand



haat



हात



Head



taauko



टाउको



Heart



mutu



मुटु



Hip



kati



किट



Knee



ghudaa



घुँडा



264



Leg



khuttaa



खुट्टा



Mouth



mukh



मुख



Neck



gardan



गदर् न



Nose



naak



नाक



Pelvis



nitamba



िनतम्ब



Shoulder



kaadh



काँध



Stomach



pet



पेट



Toes



godaako aulaa



गोडाको औल ं ा



Tooth/Teeth



daat / daatharu



दाँत / दाँतहरु



Waist



kammar



कम्मर



2. In Nepali, name the body parts that come in pairs. Check your work with the Answer Key. 3. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate body part in Nepali. Check your answers with the Answer Key. आँखाहरु कानहरु खुट्टाहरु टाउको हात aakhaaharu kaanharu khuTTaaharu Taauko haat A. B. C. D. E. F.



गदर् न मुख gardan mukh



I use my ____________ to read a book. I listen to music with my _____________. Walking is good for my ____________. I wear shoes and socks on my _____________. In the winter, I wear a hat on my _________, gloves on my _________ , and a scarf around my _________. I eat and drink with my __________________. Note: “laagnu” लाग्नु to feel “biraami” बरामी to be sick How do you feel? tapaailaai kasto chha? तपाईंलाई कःतो छ?



I feel sick. ma biraami chhu. ु म बरामी छ। I feel weak. ma kamjor chhu. ु म कमजोर छ। I feel bad. malaai sancho chhaina. मलाई सन्चो छै न। 265



What symptoms do you have? tapaailaai ke ke hunchha? तपाईंलाई के के हन्छ ु ?



I have a sore throat. mero ghaaTi dukhyo. मेरो घाँटी दख् ु यो। I have a fever. malaai jwaro laagyo. मलाई वरो लाग्यो। I have a headache. mero Taauko dukhyo. मेरो टाउको दख्यो। ु



Where does it hurt? kahaa dukchha? कहाँ दख्छ ु ?



My left ankle hurts. mero debre goligaaThaa dukhyo. मेरो दे ॄे गोलीगाँठा दख्यो। ु My back hurts. mero piThyu dukhyo मेरो पठ्यूँ दख्यो । ु My stomach hurts. mero peT dukhyo मेरो पेट दख्यो। ु



Note: The verb “dukhnu” दख् ु नु means hurt, pain and ache. And “laagnu” लाग्नु means “to feel.”



Example: My hand hurts: mero haat dukhyo. मेरो हात दख्यो। ु I am tired:



malaai thakaai laagyo. मलाई थकाई लाग्यो।



4. Listen to the following questions and answers, and read along in the workbook. A. How do you feel? tapaailaai kasto chha? तपाईंलाई कःतो छ? B. What is the matter with her? wahaalaai ke bhayo? वहाँलाई के भयो? C. How do you feel? tapaailaai kasto chha? तपाईंलाई कःतो छ? D. Are you in pain? tapaailaai dukhyo? तपाईंलाई दख्यो ? ु



I feel sick. ma biraami chhu. ु म बरामी छ। Her leg hurts. wahaako khuTTaa dukhyo. वहाँको खुट्टा दख्यो । ु My head hurts. mero Taauko dukhyo. मेरो टाउको दख्यो। ु Yes, my arm is broken. ho, mero paakhuraa bhaachiyo. हो, मेरो पाखुरा भाँिचयो। 266



E. Where does it hurt? kahaa dukhchha? कहाँ दख्छ ु ?



My stomach hurts. mero peT dukhyo. मेरो पेट दख्यो। ु



F. Are you sick? tapaai biraami hunuhunchha? तपाईं बरामी हनु ु हु न्छ? G. Are you OK?



No, I’m pregnant. hoina, ma garbhbati chhu. ु होईन, म गभर्वती छ। I don’t feel good. I feel nauseous and have a stomachache. malaai sancho chhaina. malaai waak waak laagyo ra mero peT dukhyo. मलाई सन्चो छै न।मलाई वाक वाक लाग्यो र मेरो पेट दख्यो। ु Yes, over-the-counter ones. ho, saadhaaran aushadhi khaadaichhu.



tapaailaai Thik chha? तपाईंलाई ठीक छ? H. Are you taking any medication? tapaai aushadhi khaadai hunuhunchha? तपाईं औषधी खाँदै हनु ु हु न्छ?



हो, साधारण औषधी खाँदैछु ।



5. Work with a partner and role-play the dialogues from Exercise 4. 6. Match each picture with the corresponding statement. Check your work with the Answer Key.



A



B



1. युवती बरामी छै न। ऊ गभर्वती छ। yuwati biraami chhaina . u garbhabati chha. 2. सानी केटीलाई वरो लाग्यो, घाँटी दख्यो , जीउ दख् ु ु यो,



C



घा लाग्यो र िछयूँ



गदछ। ऊःलाई लू भयो। saani keTilaai jwaro laagyo, ghaaTi dukhyo, jiu dukhyo, rughaa laagyo ra chhiu gardaichha. uslaai phlu bhayo. 3. सानो केटालाई वाक वाक लाग्यो र ऊःको पेट दख्यो। ु saano keTaalaai waak waak laagyo ra usko peT dukhyo. 267



7. Work with a partner and role-play the doctor and patient. Use the questions from Exercise 5 as a model. Use the phrases from Exercise 6 to describe your symptoms. 8. Listen to and read the list of the typical symptoms for each ailment. Flu



phlu



लू



Fever



jwaro



वरो



Congestion



jammaa hunu



Sore throat



ghaaTi dukhnu



Body aches



jiu dukhnu



Sneezing



chhiu garnu



िछउँ गनुर्



Coughing



khoknu



खोक्नु



Head cold



saamaanya rughaakhoki



सामान्य



Congestion



jammaa hunu



Sore Throat



ghaaTi dukhnu



जम्मा हनु ु



Sneezing



chhiu garnu



िछउँ गनुर्



Coughing



khoknu



खोक्नु



Severe Pain



saahrai dukhnu



सा॑ै दख् ु नु



Broken Bone



bhaachieko haDDi



भाँिचएको



Swelling



sunninu



सु न्ननु



Bruise



nilDaam



िनलडाम



Bleeding



ragat bagnu



रगत बग्नु



Sprain



markanu



मकर्नु



Bruise



nilDaam



िनलडाम



Swelling



sunninu



सु न्ननु



Pain



dukhnu



दख् ु नु



जम्मा हन ु



घाँटी दख् ु नु जीउ दख् ु नु



घाखोक घाँटी दख् ु नु



हड्डी



268



9. Look at the chart of symptoms in Exercise 8. Work with a partner or in a small group. Develop questions a doctor can ask about one’s symptoms in order to diagnose the problem. Use the following model to create a dialogue. MODEL: - Do you have a fever? - No, I don’t. - Do you have a cough and body aches? - No, doctor. - That’s very good. You don’t have the flu. It’s a cold. - Thank you, doctor. - You are welcome. In Nepal, both units of measurements are used. Height is measured in feet and inches, and also in meters and centimeters. Both systems of measurement are in general use. For weight measurements, the metric system is in use (kilograms and grams), except in some of the new department stores. They have started to use pounds as their units of measurement. This is in limited use only. Read the following passages, noting how measure words are used in Nepali. - How tall is he, and how much does he weigh? u kati aglo chha , ra usko taul kati chha? ऊ कित अग्लो छ, र ऊःको तौल कित छ? - He is 70 inches tall and weighs 185 pounds. u sattari (70) inch aglo chha, ra usko taul eksaya pachaasi(185) paunD (=84 kilogram) chha. ऊ स री ईन्च अग्लो छ, र ऊःको तौल एकसय पचासी प ड छ। - How tall are you? How much do you weigh? tapaai kati aglo hunuhunchha? tapaaiko taul kati chha? तपाईं कित अग्लो हनु ु हु न्छ? तपाईंको तौल कित छ? - I am 66 inches tall and weigh 120 pounds. ma chiyaasaThi (66) inch aglo chha, ra mero taul eksaya bis (120) paunD(==54.4 kilogram) chha. म यासठी ईन्छ अग्लो छु, र मेरो तौल एकसय बीस प ड छ। 10. Work with a partner. Take turns asking each other about your height and weight. Do not forget to use the units of measure appropriate for Nepal.



269



11. Listen to the speaker while you read the statements below. Translate each exchange. You can check the English translation in the Answer Key. A. tapaailaai kasto chha? तपाईंलाई कःतो छ? malaai sancho chhaina. malaai waak waak laagyo. मलाई सन्चो छै न। मलाई वाक वाक लाग्यो। B. tapaailaai kasto chha? तपाईलाई कःतो छ? malaai Thik chha, tara ali ali waak waak laagyo. मलाई ठीक छ, तर अिल अिल वाक वाक लाग्यो। C. tapaailaai kasto chha? तपाईंलाई कःतो छ? malaai sancho chhaina, tara malaai waak waak laageko chhaina. मलाई सन्चो छै न, तर मलाई वाक वाक लागेको छै न। D. mero bichaarmaa mero khuTTaa bhaachiyo. kripayaa ambulance bolaaidinus! मेरो वचारमा मेरो खुट्टा भाँिचयो।कृ पया अम्बूलेन्स बोलाइिदनुस।् E. mero bichaarmaa usle usko khuTTaa bhaachyo kripayaa ambulance bolaaidinus! मेरो वचारमा ऊःले ऊःको खुट्टा भाँच्यो।कृ पया अम्बूलेन्स बोलाइिदनुस।् F. usle usko khuTTaa bhaachyo? mero bichaarmaa. kripayaa ambulance bolaaidinus! ऊःले ऊःको खुट्टा भाँच्यो? मेरो वचारमा । कृ पया अम्बूलेन्स बोलाइिदनुस।



270



12. What do you hear? Listen to the speaker and mark the statement that you hear. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. A. कहाँ दख्यो। मेरो पेट दख्यो। ु ु



B. कहाँ दख्यो ? मेरो पठ्यूँ दख्यो। ु ु



C. कहाँ दख्यो ? मेरो गदर् न दख्यो। ु ु 2.



A. तपाईंलाई के के भयो? मलाई B. तपाईंलाई के के भयो? मलाई C. तपाईंलाई के के भयो? मलाई



3.



वरो लाग्यो र मेरो टाउको दख्यो। ु वरो लाग्यो र पेट दख्यो। ु



वरो लाग्यो र मेरो जीउ दख्यो। ु



A. तपाईंलाई कःतो छ? मलाई सन्चो छै न। मलाई वाक वाक लाग्यो। B. तपाईंलाई कःतो छ? मलाई ठीक छ, तर अिल अिल वाक वाक लाग्यो। C. तपाईंलाई कःतो छ? मलाई सन्चो छै न, तर मलाई वाक वाक लागेको छै न।



4.



A. मेरो वचारमा मैले मेरो खुट्टा भाँचें।कृ पया अम्बूलेन्स बोलाइिदनुस। B. मेरो वचारमा ऊःले ऊःको खुट्टा भाँच्यो। कृ पया अम्बूलेन्स बोलाइिदनुस। C. ऊःले ऊःको खुट्टा भाँच्यो? मेरो वचारमा, कृ पया अम्बूलेन्स बोलाइिदनुस।



271



End-of-Lesson Tasks 1. Ask and answer the following questions in Nepali. Check the Answer Key for a translation of the questions. A. When you have the flu, what are your symptoms? B. Are you taking any medications? C. Have you ever broken a bone? If yes, which one(s)? D. What is your height and weight? E. How often do you see a doctor? Every month? Every year? Every 3 years?



2. Tell the class what you do in order to keep a healthy weight? Do you exercise? What types of exercise do you do? How often and for how long do you exercise? Do you have a special diet? What kind? What do you eat and not eat? Give an example of your menu. What do you order when you eat out? How does it affect your diet the next day? 3. Work with a partner or in a small group. Describe the picture below.



272



Vocabulary List Abnormal



Asaadhaaran



असाधारण



Allergies



Elarji



एलज



Ambulance



Ambulance



अम्बूलेन्स



Arm



Paakhuraa



पाखुरा



Chest



Chaati



छाती



Chin



ChiuDo



िचउँ डो



Are you in pain?



Tapaailaai dukhyo?



तपाईंलाई दख्यो ? ु



Are you taking any medication?



Tapaai kun aushadhi khaadai hunuhunchha?



तपाईं कुन औषधी खाँदै



Body aches



Jiu dukhnu



जीउ दख् ु नु



Broken bone



Bhaachieko haddi



भाँिचएको हड्डी



Bruise



Nildaam



िनलडाम



Call an ambulance!



Ambulance bolaaunu



अम्बूलेन्स बोलाउनु



Congestion



Jammaa hunu



Coughing



Khoknu



Ear



Kaan



कान



Elbow



Kuhino



कुिहनो



Eye



Aakhaa



आँखा



Fingers



Aulaaharu



औल ं ाह



Foot



Khuttaa



खुट्टा



Feel



Khuttaaharu



खुट्टाह



Fever



Jwaro



वरो



Flu/Influenza



Phlu /rughaako jwaro



लू /



Hand



Haat



हात



Head



Taauko



टाउको



Hip



Kati



किट



Knee



GhuDaa



घूँडा



Help!



Maddat



म त



How do you feel?



Tapaailaai kasto chha?



तपाईंलाई कःतो छ?



Hurt



Dukhnu



हनहन्छ ु ु ?



जम्मा हनु ु खोक्नु



दख् ु नु



273



घाको



वरो



Leg



Khuttaa



खुट्टा



Mouth



Mukh



मुख



Nose



Naak



नाक



Neck



Gardan



गदर् न



Medicine



Aushadhi



औषधी



Nausea



Waak waak



वाक वाक



Pain



Dukhnu



दख् ु नु



Pregnant



Garbhabati



गभर्वती



Shoulder



Kaadh



काँध



Toes



Godaako aulaa



गोडाको औल ं ा



Waist



Kammar



कम्मर



Sick



Biraami



बरामी



Sneezing



Chhiu garnu



िछयूँ गनुर्



Sore throat



GhaaTi dukhnu



घाँटी दख् ु नु



Stomach



Pet



पेट



Stomach cramps



Pet baauDinu



पेट बाउँ िडनु



Strain



Tankyaaunu



तन्क्याउनु



Swelling



Sunninu



सु न्ननु



Symptoms



Lakchhan



ल ण



What is the matter?



Ke bhayo?



के भयो?



Where does it hurt?



Kahaa dukhchha?



कहाँ दख्छ ु ?



274



ANSWER KEY Exercise 2



कानहरु



kaanharu



कुिहनोहरु



kuhinoharu



आँखाहरु



aakhaaharu



खुट्टाहरु



khuTTaaharu



हातहरु



haatharu



घूँडाहरु



ghuDaaharu



काँधहरु



kaadhharu



पाखुराहरु



paakhuraaharu



खुट्टाहरु



khuTTaaharu



किटहरु



kaTiharu



Exercise 3 A. आँखाहरु



aakhaaharu



B. कानहरु



kaanharu



C. खुट्टाहरु



khuttaaharu



D खुट्टाहरु



khuttaaharu



E. टाउको, हातहरु, गदर् न



taauko, haatharu, gardan



F. मुख



mukh



Exercise 6 A. 2 The little girl has a fever, a sore throat, body aches, and she is sneezing and coughing. She has the flu. B. 1 The young woman is not sick. She is pregnant. C. 3 The little boy is nauseous and has a stomachache. Exercise 11 A. B. C. D.



How do you feel? I don’t feel well. I’m nauseous. How do you feel? I feel fine, but I’m a little nauseous. How do you feel? I don’t feel well, but I’m not nauseous. I think I broke my leg. Please call an ambulance! 275



E. I think he broke his leg. Please call an ambulance! F. Did he break his leg? I think so. Please call an ambulance! Exercise 12 1. B. 2. A. 3. A. 4. C.



Where does it hurt? My back hurts. What are your symptoms? I have a fever and a headache. How do you feel? I don’t feel well. I’m nauseous. Did he break his leg? I think so, please call an ambulance! 1. A. कहाँ दख्यो। मेरो पेट दख्यो। ु ु kahaa dukhyo? mero peT dukhyo. B. कहाँ दख्यो ? मेरो पठ्यूँ दख्यो। ु ु kahaa dukhyo? mero piThiu dukhyo. C. कहाँ दख्यो ? मेरो गदर् न दख्यो। ु ु kahaa dukhyo? mero gardan dukhyo. 2. A. तपाईंलाई के के भयो? मलाई वरो लाग्यो र मेरो टाउको दख्यो। ु tapaailaai ke ke bhayo? malaai jwaro laagyo ra mero Taauko dukhyo. B. तपाईंलाई के के भयो? मलाई वरो लाग्यो र पेट दख्यो। ु tapaailaai ke ke bhayo? malaai jwaro laagyo ra mero peT dukhyo. C. तपाईंलाई के के भयो? मलाई वरो लाग्यो र मेरो जीउ दख्यो। ु tapaailaai ke ke bhayo? malaai jwaro laagyo ra mero jiu dukhyo. 3. A. तपाईंलाई कःतो छ? मलाई सन्चो छै न। मलाई वाक वाक लाग्यो। tapaailaai kasto chha? malaai sancho chhaina . malaai waak waak laagyo. B. तपाईंलाई कःतो छ? मलाई ठीक छ, तर अिल अिल वाक वाक लाग्यो। tapaailaai kasto chha? malaai Thik chha, tara ali ali waak waak laagyo. C. तपाईंलाई कःतो छ? मलाई सन्चो छै न, तर मलाई वाक वाक लागेको छै न। tapaailaai kasto chha? malaai sancho chhaina, tara malaai waak waak laageko chhaina. 4. A. मेरो वचारमा मैले मेरो खुट्टा भाँचें।कृ पया अम्बूलेन्स बोलाइिदनुस। mero bichaarmaa maile mero khuTTaa bhaache. kripayaa ambulance bolaaidinus. B. मेरो वचारमा ऊःले ऊःको खुट्टा भाँच्यो। कृ पया अम्बूलेन्स बोलाइिदनुस। mero bichaarmaa usle usko khuTTaa bhaachyo. kripayaa ambulance bolaaidinus. C. ऊःले ऊःको खुट्टा भाँच्यो? मेरो वचारमा, कृ पया अम्बूलेन्स बोलाइिदनुस। usle usko khuTTaa bhaachyo? mero bichaarmaa, kripayaa ambulance bolaaidinus.



276



End of Lesson Exercise 1 A. लू हँु दा तपाईंलाई के के हन्छ ु ? phlu hudaa tapaailaai ke ke hunchha? B. तपाईं कुनै औषधी खाँदै हनु ु हु न्छ? tapaai kunai aushdhi khaadai hunuhunchha? C. तपाईंको किहले हड्डी भाँिचएको छ? यिद हो भने कुन चांिह? tapaaiko kahile haDDi bhaacheko chha? yadi ho bhane kun chaahi? D. तपाईंको उचाईं र तौल कित छ? tapaaiko uchaai ra taul kati ho? E. तपाईं कित पटक डाक्टर दे खाउनुहु न्छ? हरे क मिहना? हरे क वषर्? तीन वषर्मा एक पटक? tapaai kati paTak doctor dekhaaunuhunchha? harek mahinaa? harek barsha? tin barshamaa ek paTak?



277



Lesson 18 Political and International Events राजनैितक र अन्तरराि य घटना raajnaitik ra antarraashTriya ghaTanaa



This lesson will introduce you to: - Vocabulary associated with politics and international issues. - Examples of reports in Nepali newspapers and other media. Nepal is traditionally a constitutional monarchy with a parliamentary form of government that is multiethnic, multi-lingual, a hindu kingdom, and has a king as the head of state. After the people's movement in April 1990, the existing party-less “panchayat” system of government was abolished. Under the new constitution in 1990, the legislature is bicameral; a democratically elected parliament consists of the House of Representatives (lower house) and National Assembly (upper house). The National Assembly consists of 60 members: 35 are elected by the House of Representatives, 10 are nominated by the king (earlier as head of the state) and the remaining 15 are elected by an electoral college made up of chairs of village and towns. Legislature in the National Assembly has a six year term and can not be dissolved by the king. The House of Representatives consists of 205 elected members from national single member constituencies. The term for the House of Representatives is five years. There has not been a parliamentary election since 1999. Present King Gyanendra ascended to the throne in June 2001, after the Crown Prince Deependra gunned down his parents King Birendra and Queen Aishwarya and seven other royals before killing himself. On February 01, 2005 King Gyanendra dismissed then prime Minister Sher Bahadur Deuba's government for failing to hold a promised general election. King Gyanendra assumed direct power and declared a state of emergency for 3 months in view of the serious crises posed to the nation's sovereignty, integrity and security due to the escalation of violence by the CPN-Maoist rebels. But in April 2006, another major people's movement pressured the king to relinquish power and King Gyanendra reinstated the parliament that had been dismissed in May 2002. Former Prime Minister G.P. Koirala was selected as the leader of the agitating seven party alliances to lead the government. The Communist Party of Nepal which has been waging the people's war since February 1996 declared a cease fire on April 26, 2006. The government also announced a cease fire and a peace proposal with the rebels. The country is going through a critical period in its history. The SPA (seven party alliances) and CPN Maoist (Communist Party of Nepal) signed the interim constitution on December 15, 2006 which has 168 articles and will be promulgated once the arms management of the CPN-Maoist is completed. Leaders of the political party, intellectuals and experts on conflict management stressed that the interim constitution is another big leap in the political history of Nepal. With this, the country is about to enter into a new political direction. The interim constitution has effectively shifted all the privileges and power of the king to the Prime Minister. The king is virtually powerless now and the fate of the monarchy will be decided by the first meeting of Constitution Assembly. As per the interim constitution, it will be a mixed electoral system for the 425-seat Constitution Assembly for which 205 members will be elected by direct voting and 204 will be elected through a proportional system, ensuring a minimum quota for women, indigenous nationalities and religious groups, while 16 members will be nominated by the Prime Minister with the consent of the cabinet. The election for Constitution Assembly is proposed for June 2007.



278



1. Familiarize yourself with the following terms. Government



sarkaar



सरकार



Prime minister



pradhaanmantri



ूधानमन्ऽी



President



raashTrapati



रा पित



Leader



netaa



नेता



Dictator



taanaashaah



तानाशाह



Parliament



sansad



संसद



Ministry



mantraalay



मन्ऽालय



Election



chunaab



चुनाव



Officials



aadhikaarik



आिधकारीक



Political Party



raajnaitik dal



राजनैितक दल



Vote



mat



मत



Republic



gantantra



गणतन्ऽ



State



raajya



राज्य



Democracy



prajaatantra



ूजातंन्ऽ



Democratic



prajaataantrik



ूजातान्ऽीक



Term of office



kaaryakaal



कायर्काल



Policy



niti



नीित



Human Rights



maanab adhikaar



मानव अिधकार



Religious



dhaarmik



धािमर्क



Racial



jaatiya



जातीय



Radical



maulik



मौिलक



World



sansaar



संसार



Conflict



dwandwa



War



yudha



यू



Invade



aakraman garnu



आबमण गनुर्



Nuclear weapons



aanwik hatiyaar



आणिवक हितयार



न्



279



2. Listen to and read the following statements. While reading, note the use of the new vocabulary. The Iraqi leader



iraaki netaa



इराकी नेता



The Russian officials



rasiyan adhikaari



रिसयन अिधकारी



The South African government



dakchhin aphriki sarkaar



दिक्षण अिृकी सरकार



Religious differences



dhaarmik bibhinnataa



धािमर्क िविभन्नता



Middle East conflict



madhyapurba dwandwa



मध्यपूवर्



The war in Iraq



iraaki yudha



इराकी यू



The radical political party



maulik raajnaitik dal



मौिलक राजनैितक दल



Islamic fundamentalism



islaamik ruDhibaad



इसलामीक रुढीवाद



न्



The President of the United States is George Bush. sanyukta raajya amerikaako raashTrapati George Bush hunuhunchha. संयु राज्य अमेिरकाको रा पित जजर् बुश हनु ु हु न्छ। Japan and Great Britain have prime ministers. jaapaan ra belaayatmaa pradhaanmantri hunuhunchha. जापान र वेलायतमा ूधानमन्ऽी हनु ु हु न्छ। This was the first political election in that country. yo tyo deshko pahilo raajnaitik chunaab thiyo. यो त्यो दे शको पिहलो राजनैितक चुनाव िथयो। Human rights are a very important issue in the world today. aaja sansaarmaa maanab adhikaar dherai mahtyapurna bishay ho. आज संसारमा मानव अिधकार धेरै महत्वपूणर् िवषय हो। Note: During the King’s direct rule, the state owned media were being controlled by the government and even the news published by the private media was subjected to censorship. All political news was subject to strict censorship by the government. But since the democracy movement in April 2006, the news media enjoys complete freedom and is free to express their views without any hindrance.



280



3. Listen to and read the following news report from Nepal. Then answer the questions that follow. Check your work in the Answer Key. अमेिरका नेपालमा शािन्त दे ख्न चाहन्छ गोरखापऽ समाचारदाता काठमान्डौं, साउन ५ गते। नेपालका लािग संयु



राज्य अमेिरकाका राजदत ू जेम्स ृािन्सस ्



मोिरआट ले शािन्तपूण,र् समुन्नत र ूजातािन्ऽक मुलुकका रुपमा िवकास गनर् नेपाललाई अमेिरकाले सहयोग जारी राख्ने बताउनुभएको छ।



वहाँले कायर्भार सम्हाल्नुभएपिछ पिहलो पटक आज यहाँ आयोजना गिरएको पऽकार सम्मेलनमा राजदत ु मोिरआट ले भन्नुभयो – अमेिरका नेपालमा शािन्त, सम्पन्नता र ूजातंन्ऽ भएको दे ख्न चाहन्छ, नेपाललाई यो लआयमा लैजानका लािग हाॆो समथर्न हन्छ। ु



amerikaa nepaalmaa shaanti dekhna chaahanchha gorkhaapatra samaachaardaataa kaaThmaanDau, saaun paach gate. Nepaalka laagi sanyukta raajaya amerikaaka raajdut James Francis Moriartyle shaantipurna, samunnat ra prajaataantrik mulukkaa rupmaa bikaas garna nepaallaai amerikaale sahyog jaari raakhne bataaunubhaeko chha. wahaale kaaryabhaar samhaalnubhepachhi pahilo paTak aaja yahaa aayojanaa garieko patrakaar sammelanmaa raajdut Moriartyle bhannubhayo- amerikaa nepaalmaa shaanti, sampannataa ra prajaatantra bheko dekhna chaahanchha, nepaallaai yo lakchhamaa lyaijaanakaa laagi haamro samarthan hunchha. 1. What is the name of the American Ambassador to Nepal? 2. In what type of development did Mr. James Francis Moriarty want to provide support? 3. Where was he speaking? 4. What does America wants to see in Nepal? 5. What goal is fulfilled through American support? 4. Work in small groups. Pretend that you are a crew working for a news program. Come up with a short description of a political event. Use the questions from Exercise 3 as an outline for your report.



281



5. Work in a small group or with a partner. Go over the information on the political system in the Nepal one more time. Recall the information in the Nepali. Report to your teacher and to the class.



International Geography



6. Read the information about Nepal. Answer the questions. Check your work in the Answer Key. नेपाल दिक्षणपूवर् एिसयामा चारै ितरबाट घेिरएको छ र यःको पूव, र् पिँचम,दिक्षणितर भारत छ र उ रितर चीन छ।दिक्षणितर १६९० िकलोिमटर खुला भारतको सीमाले दई ु दे शबीचको सांःकृ ितक,धाम क र िमऽा दे खाउँ छ।उ रितरको सीमा चीनसंग जोिडएकोछ जुन िहउँ ले



ू सारको दश सबभन्दा ठलो िहमाल मध्ये आठवटा नेपालमा छन ्, सगरमाथा ढािकएको हन्छ।सं ु



सबभन्दा अ लो िहमाल जःको उचाई ८८५० िकलोिमटर छ।नेपालको जम्मा क्षेऽफल १४०८०० ःक्यार िकलोिमटर र सबभन्दा तल ७० िकलोिमटर , सबभन्दा माथी ८८५० िकलोिमटर छ।हावापानी जाडो र गम मा फरक फरक हन्छ ु ।नेपाल भौगोिलक



ि कोणबाट तीन दे ऽ



िहमाल,पहाड, र तराईमा बाँिडएको छ।



Nepaal dakchhinpurba esiyaamaa chaaraitirabaaTa gherieko chha ra yasko purba, pashchim, dakchhintira bhaarat chhaa ra uttartira chin chha. dakchhintira 1690 kilomiTer bhaaratk khulaa simaale dui deshko saansakriti, dhaarmikr mitrataa dekhaau chha. uttartirako simaa chinsanga joDieko chha jun hiule Dhaakieko hunchha. sansaarko dash sabbhandaa Thulo himaal madhya aaThwaTaa nepaalmaa chhan, sabbhandaa sabbhandaa aglo himaal jasko uchaai 8850 kilomiTer chha. nepaalko jammaa chhetaphal 140800 skyaar kilometer ra sabbhandaa tala 70 kilomiTer , sabbhandaa maathi 8850 kilomiTer chha. haawaapaani jaaD ra garmimaa pharak pharak hunchha. nepaal bhaugolik drishikonle tin chhetra himaal , pahaaD ra taraimaa baaDieko chha.



282



1. chaaraitira – चारै ितर - fourside 2. baaTa- बाट- from 3. gherinu- घेिरनु - sourding 4. khulaa- खुला - open 5. saanskriti- सांःकृ ितक - cultural 6. dhaarmik- धाम क - religious 7. mitrataa- िमऽता - friendly 8. dekhaaunu- दे खाउनु – to show 9. simaa- सीमा - border



10. sansaar- संसार - world 11. himaal- िहमाल - mountain 12. madhya- मध्ये - among 13. jammaa- जम्मा - total 14. chhetraphal- क्षेऽ - area 15. tala- तल – low 16. maathi-



मािथ – top



17. haawaapaani- हावापानी - climate 18. pharak-



फरक - different



19. bhaugolik-



भौगोिलक- geographically



20. drishTikon-



ि कोण- point of view



21. chhetra22. pahaaD23. Tarai24. baaDinu-



क्षेऽ - area पहाड- hills तराई- flat land बाँिडनु – to divide



1. Who are the two big neighbors of Nepal? 2. Where is Mount Everest, the tallest peak of the world? 3. What are the highest and lowest points of elevation in Nepal? 4. Is the southern border between Nepal and India is open or closed? 5. What are the 3 geographical regions of Nepal?



283



Nepal and her neighboring countries Note: Nepal is a landlocked country.



7. Listen to the speaker and follow along in your book. Afghanistan/Afghani



aphgaanistaan/ aphgaani



अफगािनःतान / अफगानी



Canada/Canadian



kyaanaadaa/ kyaanedian



क्यानाडा / क्यानेिडयन



China/Chinese



chin/ chaanij



चीन / चाइिनज



Denmark/Danes



denmaark/ denis



डे नमाकर् / डे िनस



Egypt/Egyptian



egipat/ egipsian



इिजप्ट / इिजप्सीयन



England/English



belaayat/ angrej



वेलायत / अंमेज



Finland/Finns



phinlyaand/ phinis



िफनल्यान्ड / फीिनस



France/French



phraans/ phraanseli



ृान्स / ृान्सेली



Germany/German



jermany/ jerman



जमर्नी / जमर्न



Great Britain/British



belaayat/ belaayati



284



वेलायत / वेलायती



India/Indian



bhaarat/ bhaartiya



भारत / भारतीय



Indonesia/Indonesian



indonesiyaa/ indonesiyan



इन्डोनेसीया / इन्डोनेसीयन



Iran/Iranian



iraan/ iraani



इरान / इरानी



Iraq/Iraqi



iraak/ iraaki



इराक / इराकी



Ireland/Irish



aayarlyaad / aairish



आयरलैन्ड / आइरीस



Israel/Israeli



ijraayl/ijraayli



इजरायल / इरायली



Italy/Italian



itaali/ itaaliyan



इटाली / इटालीयन



Japan/Japanese



jaapaan/ jaapaani



जापान / जापानी



Jordan/Jordanian



jorden/jordanian



जोडन / जोडनीयन



Korea/Korean



koriyaa/ koriyan



कोिरया / कोिरयन



Kuwait/Kuwaiti



kuwet/ kuweti



कुवेत / कुवेती



Mexico/Mexican



meksiko/ meksikan



मेक्सीको / मेक्सीकन



Netherlands/Dutch



nederlyaand/ dach



नेदरल्यान्ड / डच



Norway/Norwegian



norwe/ norwijiyan



नोव / नोरिविजयन



Pakistan/Pakistani



paakistaan/ paakistaani



पािकःतान / पािकःतानी



Philippines/Filipino



philipinas / philipino



िफिलिपन्स / िफिलिपनो



Russia/Russian



rus/ rasiyan



रुस / रिसयन



Saudi Arabia/Saudi



saaudi arebiyaa/ saaudi



साउदी अरे िबया / साउदी



Scotland/Scot



skatlyaand/ skat



ःकटल्यान्ड / ःकट



South Africa/South African



dakchhin aphrikaa/ dakchhin aphrikan



दिक्षण अिृका / दिक्षण



Spain/Spanish



spen/ spaanish



ःपेन / ःपािनश



Sweden/Swede



swedan/swedis



ःवेडन / ःवेडीस



Syria/Syrian



siriyaa/ siriyan



िसिरया / िसिरयन



Thailand/Thai



thaailyaand/ thaai



थाइल्यान्ड / थाइ



Vietnam/Vietnamese



bhiyatnaam/ bhiyatnaami



िभयतनाम / िभयतनामी



Wales/Welsh



waalsh/ welsh



वाल्स / वेल्श



North America



uttar amerikaa



उ र अमेिरका



Central America



kendriya amerikaa



केन्िीय अमेिरका



South America



dakchhin amerikaa



दिक्षण अमेिरका



Western Europe



paschimi yurop



पिँचम यूरोप



Central Europe



kendriya yurop



केन्िीय यूरोप 285



अिृकन



Eastern Europe



purbiya yurop



पूव य यूरोप



Middle East



madhya purba



मध्य पूवर्



Southwest Asia



dakchhinpaschim eshiyaa



दिक्षणपिँचम एिसया



Southeast Asia



dakchhinpurba eshiyaa



दिक्षणपूवर् एिसया



Africa



aphrikaa



अिृका



Australia



ashtreliyaa



अःशे िलया



Eastern Asia



purbi eshiyaa



पूव एिसया



Arctic



aartik



आट क



Antarctic



antaarktik



अन्टारकटीका



Pacific Rim



mahaasaagarko kinaaraa



महासागरको िकनारा



8. Listen to and read the dialogues about nationality. Note the ways to determine one’s nationality. Are you from Syria? tapaaiko ghar siriyaa ho? तपाईंको घर िसिरया हो?



No, I’m from Egypt. I’m an Egyptian. hoina, mero ghar egipaT ho. ma egipsian hu. होईन, मेरो घर इिजप्ट हो। म इिजप्सीयन हँु ।



Are you American? tapaai amerikan hunuhunchha? तपाईं अमेिरकन हनहन्छ ु ु ?



No, I’m Canadian. hoina, ma kyaaneDian hu. होईन, म क्यानेिडयन हँु ।



What are you? tapaai ke hunuhunchha? तपाईं के हनु ु हु न्छ।



I’m Vietnamese. ma bhiyatnaami hu. म िभयतनामी हँु ।



Where are you from? tapaaiko desh kun ho? तपाईंको दे श कुन हो?



I’m from India. I’m Indian. mero ghar bhaarat ho. ma bhaartiya hu. मेरो घर भारत हो। म भारतीय हँु ।



Are you Indonesian? tapaai inDonesiyan hunuhunchha? तपाईं इन्डोनेसीयन हनु ु हु न्छ?



Yes, I’m Indonesian. ho, ma inDonesiyan hu. हो, म इन्डोनेसीयन हँु ।



Are you from Afghanistan? tapaaiko ghar aphgaanistaan ho? तपाईंको घर अफगािनःतान हो



I live in Afghanistan, but I am Pakistani. ma aphgaanistaanmaa baschhu, tara ma paakistaani hu. म अफगािनःतानमा बःछु, तर म पािकःतानी हँु ।



286



9. Create questions in Nepali that are appropriate to the answers provided. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. ___________________? - Yes, I’m Vietnamese. ho, ma bhiyatnaami hu. हो,म िभयतनामी हँु । 2. ____________________? - No, I’m not American. I’m Canadian. hoina, ma amerikan hoina. ma kyaaneDian hu. होईन, म अमेिरकन होईन। म क्यानेिडयन हँु । 3. ____________________? - I live in Pakistan, but I’m Afghani. ma paakistaanmaa baschhu, tara ma aphgaani hu. म पािकःतानमा बःछु, तर म अफगानी हँु । 4. ____________________? - Yes, we are Iraqis. ho, haami iraaki hau. हो, हामी इराकी हौं।



10. What do you hear? The speaker will read one word from each line of text. Mark the word that you hear. Check your answers with the Answer Key. 1.



अफगािनःतान



पािकःतान



इरान



भारत



2.



आयरल्यान्ड



थाइल्यान्ड



नेदरल्यान्ड



वेलायत



3.



िभयतनाम



इन्डोनेिशया



जापान



चीन



4.



साउदी अरे िबया



िसिरया



इजरायल



जोडन



5.



कुवेत



इराक



इिजप्ट



रुस



287



End-of-Lesson Tasks 1. Translate the following headlines into English. Check your work with the Answer Key. 1. एितहािसक शािन्त सम्झौताको सवर्ऽ ःवागत etihaasik shaanti samjhautaa sarbatra swaagat 2. आतंकवाद िवरु को ूितयू aatankbaad birudhako pratiyudha 3. अःशे िलयामा िव ाथ ारा राइसको िवरोध asTreliyaamaa biddhyaarthidwaaraa Riceko birodh 4. इराकी नाकाबन्दी हटाउन अमेिरकाले पहल गन iraaki naakaabandi haTaauna amerikaale pahal garne 5. जलाल अफगान रा पित पदको लािग मिहला उम्मेदवार Jalaal aphgaan raashTrapatiko laagi mahilaa ummedbaar 6. अमेिरका र िभयतनाम रक्षामन्ऽीबीच भेटवातार् america ra bhiyatnaam rakchhaamantribich bheTbaartaa 2. Listen to and read the following news report from Nepal, then answer the questions that follow. Check your work in the Answer Key. अमेिरका शािन्तपूणर् समाधानको पक्षमा वािसंगटन,२१ जेठ(एजेन्सीहरु)- अमेिरकाले नेपाली कांमेस(ूजातान्ऽीक) का सभापित शेरबहादरु



दे उवा ूधानमन्ऽीमा िनयू



भएपिछ उत्पन्न राजनैितक िवकासूित चासो दे खाउदै शािन्तपूणर्



बाटोबाटै समःया समाधान हने ु िवँवास िलएको छ।



अमेिरकी िवदे श मन्ऽालयका ूव ा िरचाडर् बौचरले िबहीबार सबै राजनीितक पाट ले आफूहरुबीचका मतिभन्नता राजनैितक बाटोबाटै समाधान गन र नेपाली नागिरकले पिन



शािन्तको बाटो अबलम्बन गन िवँवास िलएको बताउनु भएको हो।



288



amerikaa shaantipurna samaadhaanko pakchhamaa waasingTan, 21 jeTha ( ejensiharu)- amerikaale nepaali kaangres (prajaataantrik) kaa sabhaapati Sherbahadur Deiwaa pradhaanmantrimaa niyukti bhaepachhi utpanna raajnaitik bikaasprati chaaso dekhaaudai shaantipurna baaTonaaTai smasyaa samaadhaan hune bishwaas lieko chha. ameriki bidesh mantraalaykaa prabaktaa Richard baicharle bihibaar sabai raajnaitik parTyle aaphuharubichkaa matbhinntaa raajnaitik baTobaata samaadhan garne ra nepali naagrikle pani shantiko baaTo ablamnan garne bishwaas lieko bataaunu bhaeko chha. 1. What position was Mr. Sher Bahadur appointed to? 2. America is interested in what subject? 3. How can the problem be solved? 4. Who is Richard Boucher? 5. How can the political parties eradicate differences among themselves? 3. Work with a partner or in a small group. From the list of the countries above, choose one and give a briefing on its location and political system. Pretend that you are giving a press conference. Your classmates will role-play the news reporters by asking you questions. The following questions may help you in your work: 1. Does this country have a president? Who is a current president? 2. How many political parties are there in this country? 3. Is there a war in this country now? 4. Does this country have a parliament? 5. Is there a democracy in this country? 6. Does this country have a prime minister? 7. Is the leader of this country a dictator? 8. Is this country a republic? 9. What is a specific geographical feature of this country?



289



Vocabulary List न्



/ िभडन्त



Conflict



Dwandwa/ bhidanta



Democracy/democratic



Prajaatantra / prajaataantrik



ूजातंन्ऽ / ूजातान्ऽीक



Dictator



Taanaashaah



तानाशाह



Dispute



Waadwiwaad



वादिववाद



Election



Chunaab



चुनाव



Government



Sarkaar



सरकार



Human Rights



Maanab adhikaar



मानव अिधकार



Invade/invasion



Aakraman garnu / aakraman



आबमण गनुर् / आबमण



Leader



Netaa



नेता



Ministry



Mantraalay



मन्ऽालय



Nuclear weapons



Aanuwik hatiyaar



आणुिवक हितयार



Official



Aadhikaarik



आिधकारीक



Parliament



Sansad



संसद



Policy



Niti



नीित



Political Party



Raajnaitik dal



राजनैितक दल



President



Raashtrapati



रा पित



Prime minister



Pradhaan mantri



ूधान मन्ऽी



Racial



Jaatiya



जातीय



Radical



Maulik



मौिलक



Religious



Dhaarmik



धािमर्क



Republic



Gantanra



गणतंऽ



State



Raajya



राज्य



Term of office



Kaaryaabdhi



कायर्अविध



To kill



Maarnu



मानुर्



To vote



Mat dinu



मत िदनु



To invade



Aakraman garnu



आबमण गनुर्



War



Yudha



यू



World



Sansaar



संसार



290



ANSWER KEY Exercise 3 America wants to see peace in Nepal Gorkhapatra Reporter Kathmandu, 5th of Saun (Nepali month). American Ambassador to Nepal, Mr. James Francis Moriarty urged that America will continue to provide assistance in developing Nepal as a peaceful, prosperous, and a democratic nation. In a press conference organized after his appointment as an ambassador to Nepal, Mr. Moriarty said, “America wants to see peace, prosperity, and democracy in Nepal. America has full support to help Nepal reach this goal.” 1. वहाँको नाम जेम्स ृािन्सस मोरआट हो। His name is James Francis Moriarty. 2 . शान्तपूण, र् समुन्नत र ूजातान्ऽीक नेपालको िवकासमा। In the development of Nepal as a peaceful, prosperous, and democratic country. 3. वहाँ पऽकार सम्मेलनमा बोल्दै हनु ु हु न् यो। He was speaking at a press conference. 4. अमेिरका नेपालमा शािन्त,सम्पन्नता र ूजातन्ऽ दे ख्न चाहन्छ। America wants to see peace, prosperity, and democracy in Nepal. 5. नेपालको लआय शािन्त,सम्पन्नता र ूजातन्ऽमा अमेिरकाको समथर्न हने ु छ। America will support Nepal’s goal of peace, prosperity, and democracy. Exercise 6 Nepal is a landlocked country in South East Asia, strategically situated between two Asian giants, China on the north and India on three sides east, west and south. The 1,690 km southern open border with India symbolizes the traditional, cultural and friendly relation between two neighbors. The northern border with China is guarded with high mountains covered with snow through out the year. Nepal contains eights of the 10 world’s highest peaks, including Mount Everest, the world’s tallest (8,850m-1990), popularly known as the roof top of the world. Nepal has a total area of 140,800 sq. km, with the unique diversity of the lowest point being 70m and the highest being 8,850m. Climate varies from cool summers and severe winters in the north to subtropical summers and mild winters in the south. Nepal is geographically divided into 3 regions: Mountain region, Hilly region and the Terai region.



291



1.भारत र चीन। 2.नेपल। 3.७० िकलो िमटर र ८८५० िकलोिमटर। 4.हो, खुला छ। 5.िहमाल, पहाड र तराई। Exercise 9 1. तपाईं िभयतनामी हनु ु हन्छ ु ? 2. तपाईं अमेिरकन हनु ु हन्छ ु ? 3. तपाईं पािकःतानी हनु ु हन्छ ु ? 4. तपाईं इराकी हनु ु हन्छ ु ?



tapaai bhiyatnaami hunuhunchha? tapaai amerikan hunuhunchha? tapaai paakistaani hunuhunchha? tapaai iraaki hunuhunchha?



Exercise 10 1. India



भारत



bhaarat



2. England



वेलायत



belaayat



3. Indonesia



इन्डोनेिशया



inDoneshiyaa



4. Israel



इजरायल



ijraayal



5. Russia



रुस



rus



End of Lesson Exercise 1 1. Welcome of historical peace agreement 2. Fight against terrorism 3. Student protest against Rice in Australia 4. America to remove Iraq blockade 5. Jalaal is a female candidate for Afghan president 6. Talk between America and Vietnam Defense minister Exercise 2 America in support of peaceful resolution Washington, 21st Jeth (Agencies) America expressed confidence in the peaceful resolution to the problems of Nepal after the political development that occurred with the appointment of Mr. SherBahadur Deuba, the chairman of Nepali Congress (Democratic), as the Prime Minister of Nepal.



292



On Thursday, the US Assistant Secretary of State, Richard Boucher, expressed his confidence that all the political parties will solve their differences through political tactic and that every Nepalese citizen will also follow the path of peace 1. शेरबहादरु दे उवा ूधानमन्ऽी हनु ु हु न्छ। Sherbahadur deuwa is a Prime Minister. 2. अमेिरकाले राजनैितक िवकासूित चासो दे खाएको छ। America is interested in political development. 3. समःयाको सामसधान शािन्तपूणब र् ाटो बाट गनर् सिकन्छ। Problems can be solved through peaceful manner. 4. िरचाडर् बौचर अमेिरिक िवदे शमन्ऽी हनु ु हु न्छ। Richard Boucher is a US Assistant Secretary of State. 5. राजनैितक पाट हरुले आफुहरुबीचको मतिभन्नता राजनैितकबाटो बाटै हटाउने। Political parties should eliminate the differences among themselves thorough political approach.



293



Lesson 19 The Military सैिनक sainik



This lesson will introduce you to: - Basic military vocabulary. - The rank structure of the U.S. Army and Nepali military forces. - Names of weapons and army vehicles.



1. What do soldiers do? What do soldiers use? What do soldiers wear? The pictures will help you guess the meaning of unknown terms.



यी िसपाहीहरुले बद लगाएका छन।उनीहरुले खुट्टामा बुट र टाउकोमा हे लमेट लगाएका ् छन।हे ् लमेटले उनीहरुको टाउको तोपबाट, गोलाबारुदबाट र िवःफोटबाट सुरिक्षत राख्छ।िसपाहीहरुको हातमा हितयारहरु छन।्



yi sipaahiharule bardi lagaaekaa chhan. uniharule khuTTaamaa buT ra Taaukomaa helmeT lagaaekaa chhan. helmeTle uniharuko Taauko topbaaTa, golaabaarudbaaTa ra bisphoTbaaTa surkchhit raakhchha. sipaahiharuko haatmaa hatiyaarharu chhan.



294



sipaahi usko raaiphalle goli chalaauchha. िसपाही उःको राइफलले गोली चलाउँ छ।



sipaahi reDiyomaa aaphno adhikritsanga kuraa garchha. िसपाही रे िडयोमा आफ्नो



sipaahiko rakeT launcher chha. िसपाहीको रकेट लौनचर



अिधकृ तसंग कुरा गछर् ।



छ।



2. Now listen to the new vocabulary and repeat them after the speaker. Soldier



sipaahi



िसपाही



Uniform



bardi



बद



Boots



buT



बुट



Helmet



helmeT



हे लमेट



To protect



surakchhaa garnu



सुरक्षा गनुर्



Artillery



topkhaana



तोपखाना



Ammunition



golaabaarud



गोलाबारुद



Explosives



bisphoTak



िवःफोटक



Weapons



hatiyaar



हितयार



Radio



reDio



रे िडयो



Commander



uchchadhikrit



उच्चअिधकृ त



To fire



goli haannu



गोली हान्नु



Rifle



raaiphal



राइफल



Rocket launcher



rakeT chhoDnu/ launchar



रकेट छोड्नु / लौनचर



295



3. Read the statements and match each one with the correct picture. Check your answers with the Answer Key.



1.



2.



3.



A. u sarbsaadaaran ho. usanga hatiyaar chhaina. usko bachchaaharu chhan. ऊ सवर्साधारण हो। ऊसंग हितयार छै न।्उःको बच्चाहरु छन।् B. u sipaahi ho. usko hatiyaar chha. ऊ िसपाही हो। ऊःको हितयार छ। C. sipaahile sarbsaadhaaranko hatiyaarko laagi khaantalaashi garchha. िसपाहीले सवर्साधारणको हितयारको लािग खानतलासी गछर् ।



4. Listen to the new words and repeat them after the speaker.



1. 2. These vehicles are HUMMVEE’s. yi HUMMVEE sabaari hun. यी हम्मभी सवारी हन। ु 296



3. Self-propelled Missile Launcher swachaalit kchhepaastra launchar ःवचािलत क्षेपा लौनचर।



4. Tank Tyaank ट्यांक



5. Self-propelled Gun swachaalit -banduk ःवचािलत बन्दक ु



6. Armored Vehicle bakhtarband gaaDi बख्तरबन्द गाडी



5. Now cover the names of the vehicles with a sheet of paper and name them. Repeat Exercise 4 as many times as you need to feel comfortable with the new terms.



6. Listen to the new words and repeat them after the speaker.



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



8



297



1 Mortar



top



तोप



5 Mine



khaani



खानी



2 Rifle



raaiphal



राइफल



6 Pistol



pistol



िपःतोल



3 Machine gun 4 Grenade



meshingan



मेिशनगन



7 Missile



kchhepaastra



क्षेपा



haatgolaa



हतगोला



8 Weapons cache hatiyaar lukaaune Thaau



हितयार लुकाउने ठाउँ



7. Look at the pictures in Exercise 6. Cover the Nepali translations and the English words in Exercise 6. Match each term with the correct picture. Replay the sound as many times as you need. Check your work with the Answer Key. A. mine



khaani



खानी



B. missile



kchhepaastra



क्षेपा



C. grenade



haatgolaa



हतगोला



D. weapons cache



hatiyaar lukaaune Thaau



हितयार लुकाउने ठाउँ



E. pistol



pistol



िपःतोल



F. mortar



top



तोप



G. machine gun



meshingan



मेिशनगन



H. rifle



raaphal



राइफल



8. In the following lists of items, three belong to the group, but the fourth does not logically belong. Cross out the one that does not belong. Check your answers with the Answer Key.



1.



टैं क



हतगोला



शक



हम्मभी



2.



राइफल



तोप



हे लमेट



मेिशनगन



3.



बद



िसपाही



सवर्साधारण



उच्च अिधकृ त



4.



रे िडयो



नक्शा



जमीनमा िवःफोटक रािखएको क्षेऽ



हितयार



5.



हे लमेट



तोपखाना



बद



बुट



6.



अिधकृ त



िसपाही



सवर्साधारण



उच्च अिधकृ त



298



9. What do you hear? Listen to the speaker and write down what you hear. Check your work in the Answer Key. 1 2



10. Listen and repeat the new words after the speaker. Army base



sainik kchhetra



सैिनक क्षेऽ



Be careful!



hoshiyaar hunus!



Curfew



karphyu



होिशयार हनु ु स ्!



In charge of …



haakim



हािकम



Minefield



जमीनमा िवःफोटक रािखएको क्षेऽ



Roadblock



jaminmaa bispaoTak raakhieko kchhetra baaTo banda



Checkpoint



chauki



चौकी



Identification



prichaypatra



पिरचयपऽ



Patrol



gasti



गःती



Base



aadhaar



आधार



Barracks



byaarek/ sainik nibaas



कफ्यूर्



बाटो बन्द



यारे क / सैिनक िनवास



11. Fill in the blanks with the correct word from the vocabulary list above. Check your answers with the Answer Key. A. गःतीको ___________को हनु ु हु न्छ? गःतीको हािकम। gastiko ___________ko hunuhunchha? gastiko haakim. B. यहाँ__________________ छ? हो, आठ बजे राती दे िख िवहान छ बजे सम्म। tyahaa __________________chha? ho, aaTh baje raati dekhi bihaan chha baje samma. C. ______________________! यहाँ सडक पािर _______________ छ। _______________________! tyahaa saDak paari ___________________ chha! D. सबैजनाले उनीहरुको _______________ ____________मा दे खाउनै पछर् । sabaijanaale unihauko ______________maa dekhaaunai parchha. E. कहाँ छ ? आधार क्षेऽको अक पट्टी। ________________ kahaa chha? aadhaar kchhetrako arko paTTi.



299



12. Work with a partner and take turns reading and role-playing the dialogues from Exercise 11. 13. Work in a small group and make up similar dialogues, and then role-play them. 14. Study the list of U.S. Army ranks. Compare them with the Nepal military equivalents. Enlisted



bharti gareko



भत गरे को



Private



niji



िनजी



Corporal



sarjagbhandaa muniko ohadaa



सरजंगभन्दा मुिनको ओहदा



Sergeant



sarjang / sainik adhikaari



सरजंग / सैिनक अिधकारी



Sergeant Major



sarjang mejar /senaani



सरजंग मेजर / सेनानी



Officer



adhikrit



अिधकृ त



Lieutenant



rathi/upsenaani



रथी / उप-सेनानी



Captain



sahsenaani



सह-सेनानी



Major



senaani/ mejar



सेनानी / मेजर



Lt. Colonel



lephTineT karnel



लेिफ्टनेन्ट कनल



Colonel



karnel/ mahaasenaani



कनल / महासेनानी



General



mahaarathi/ jarnel



महारथी / जनल



Brigadier



sahaayak rathi



सहायक रथी



Chief of the Army/ Commander-in-chief



pradhaan senaapati



ूधान सेनापित



300



End-of-Lesson Tasks 1. Work with a partner or in a small group. In Nepali, make up a caption for each picture below.



1. …………………………………………………… . 2. …………………………………………………… . 3. …………………………………………………… .



2. a) Translate the following sentences into English. Check your work with the Answer Key. A. हितयार लुकाउने ठाउँ कहाँ छ? hatiyaar lukaaune Thaau kahaa chha? B. गःतीको हािकम को हनु ु हु न्छ? gastiko haakim ko hunuhunchha? C. तपाईंले तपाईंको पिरचयपऽ चौकी पास गदार् दे खाउनै पछर् । tapaaile tapaaiko parichaypatra chauki pass gardaa dekhaaunai parchha. D. सबै सवर्साधारणहरुको हितयारहरुको खानतलासी हनै ु पछर् । sabai sarbasaadhaaranharuko hatiyaarharuko khaantalaasi hunai parchha. E. कफ्यूर् नौ (९:००) बजे राती शुरु हन्छ। अिहले आठ पैंतालीस (८:४५) भयो।तपाईं ु



घर फकर्नुस।् karphu nau(9:00) baje raati shuru hunchha. ahile aaTh paitaalis bhayo. tapaai ghar pharkanus. F. सैिनक क्षेऽमा िसपाहीहरु माऽै ूवेश गनर् सक्छन।् sainik kchhetramaa sipaahiharu maatrai prabesh garna sakchhan.



301



b) Work with a partner or in a small group. Make up situations where you can use sentences C, D, E, and F as a reply. Create the first part of the conversation so that you have short dialogues. Role-play them.



3. a) Translate the following into Nepali. Compare your translation against the Answer Key. A. Please step out of the car. We must search the vehicle for weapons. B. It is after curfew. You must come with me for questioning. C. The weapons cache is on the other side of Checkpoint Delta. C. Be careful. There is a minefield east of the railroad. D. Every soldier needs to have a radio and a map. E. You must know all the checkpoints and roadblocks in this area.



b) Work with a partner or in a small group. Make up situations where you can use these sentences as a reply. Create the first part of the conversation so that you have short dialogues. Role-play them.



302



Vocabulary List Ammunition



Golaabaarud



गोलाबारुद



Army base



Sainik kchhetra



सैिनक क्षेऽ



Artillery



Topkhaanaa



तोपखाना



Barracks



Byaarek/ sainik niwaas



Base



Aadhaar



आधार



Be careful!



Hoshiyaar hunu



Boots



But



होिशयार हनु ु



Checkpoint



Chauki



चौकी



Civilian



Sarbsaadhaaran



सवर्साधारण



Commander



Uchchaadhikrit



उच्चअिधकृ त



Curfew



Karphyu



कफ्यूर्



Enemy



Shatru



शऽु



Explosive



Bisphotak



िबःफोटक



Grenade



Hatgolaa



हतगोला



Gun



Banduk



बन्दक ु



Helmet



Helmet



हे लमेट



In charge (of a patrol, base) Machine gun



Gastiko haakim



गःतीको हािकम



Meshingan



मेिशनगन



Map



Nakshaa



नक्शा



Military



Sainik



सैिनक



Mine



Khaani



खानी



Minefield



Jaminmaa bisphotak raakhieko kchhetra



जमीनमा िबःफोटक रािखएको



यारे क / सैिनक िनवास



बुट



क्षेऽ



Missile



Kchhepaastra



क्षेपा



Mortar



Top



तोप



Officer



Adhikrit



अिधकृ त



Protection



Surkchhaa



सुरक्षा



Radio



Rediyo



रे िडयो



Rank



Pad/ ohadaa



पद / ओहदा



Rifle



Raaiphal



राइफल 303



Roadblock



Baatobanda



बाटोबन्द



Rocket



Raket



रकेट



Rocket launcher



Raket chhodnu



रकेट छोड्नु



Search



Talaasi/ khoj



तलासी / खोज



Soldier



Sipaahi



िसपाही



Tank



Tyaank



ट्यांक



Uniform



Bardi



बद



Weapons



Hatiyaar



हितयार



Weapons cache



Hatiyaar lukaaune Thaau



हितयार लुकाउने ठाँउ



Enlisted



Bharti garieko



भत गिरएको



Private



Niji



िनजी



Corporal



Sarjangbhandaa muniko ohadaa



सरजंगभन्दा मुिनको सैिनक ओहदा



Sergeant



Sarjang



सरजंग



Sergeant Major



Sarjang mejar



सरजंग मेजर



Officer



Adhikrit



अिधकृ त



Lieutenant



Up-senaani



उप-सेनानी



Captain



Sah-senaani/ kaptaan



सह-सेनानी / क ान



Major



Senaani



सेनानी



Lt. Colonel



Lephtinet karnel



लेिफ्टनेन्ट कनल



Colonel



Mahaasenaani/ karnel



महासेनानी / कनल



General



Mahaarathi/ jarnel



महारथी / जनल



304



ANSWER KEY Exercise 3 1. C. The soldier searches the civilian for weapons. 2. B. He is a soldier. He has a weapon. 3. A. He is a civilian. He does not have weapons. He has children. Exercise 7 A. 5 mine



khaani



खानी



B. 7 missile



kchhepaastra



क्षेपा



C. 4 grenade



hatgolaa



हतगोला



D. 8 weapons cache



हितयार लुकाउने ठाऊँ



E. 6 pistol



hatiyaar lukaaune Thaau pistol



F. 1 mortar



top



तोप



G. 3 machine gun



meshingan



मेिशनगन



H. 2 rifle



raaiphal



राइफल



िपःतोल



Exercise 8 1. 2. 3. 4.



5. 6.



Tank टैं क Rifle राइफल Uniform बद Radio रे िडयो Helmet हे लमेट Officer अिधकृ त



Grenade हतगोला Mortar तोप Soldier िसपाही Map नक्शा



Truck शक Helmet हे लमेट Civilian सवर्साधारण Minefield जमीनमा िवःफोटक



Humvee हम्मभी Machine Gun मेिशनगन Commander उच्च अिधकृ त Weapon हितयार



Artillery तोपखाना Soldier िसपाही



रािखएको क्षेऽ Uniform बद Civilian सवर्साधारण



Boots बुट Commander उच्च अिधकृ त



305



Exercise 9 1. A. Soldiers wear helmets for protection from explosives. sipaahiharule bisphoTakbaaTa surkchhako laagi helmeT lagaauchhan. िसपाहीहरुले िवःफोटकबाट सुरक्षाको लािग हे लमेट लगाउछन।् 2. B. We are searching all enemy soldiers for weapons. haami sabai shatru sipaahiharulaai hatiyaarko laagi khaantalaasi gardaichhau. हामी सबै शऽु िसपाहीहरुलाई हितयारको लािग खानतलासी गदछ । Exercise 11 A. Who is in charge of the patrol? The patrol leader. gastiko haakim ko hunuhunchha? gastiko aguwaa. गःतीको हािकम को हनु ु हु न्छ? गःतीको अगुवा। B. Is there a curfew? Yes, from 8:00pm to 6:00am. aaja karphyu chha? ho, aaTh (8:00 ))baje belukaa dekhi bihaana chha(6:00) baje samma. आज कफ्यूर् छ? हो, आठ (८:००) बजे बेलक ु ा दे िख िबहान छ (६:००) बजे सम्म। C. Be careful! There is a minefield across the road! hoshiyaar hunus! tyahaa saDak paari jaminmaa bisphoTak raakhieko kchhatra chha. होिशयार हनु ु स।् यहाँ सडक पारी जमीनमा िवःफोटक रािखएको क्षेऽ छ। D. Everyone must show their identification at the checkpoint. Sabaijanaale chaukimaa parichaypatra dekhaaunai parchha. सबैजनाले चौकीमा पिरचयपऽ दे खाउनै पछर् । E. Where are the barracks? On the other side of the base. byaarekharu kahaa chhan? chhetrako arko paTTi. यारे कहरू कहाँ छन ्। क्षेऽको अक पट्टी। End of Lesson Exercise 2a A. Where is the weapons cache? B. Who is in charge of this patrol? C. You must show your identification when you pass the checkpoint. D. All civilians must be searched for weapons. E. Curfew starts at 9:00pm. It’s 9:45 now. Go back to your home. F. Only soldiers may enter the army base. Exercise 3a A. Please step out of the car. We must search the vehicle for weapons. kripayaa gaaDibaaTa baahira aaunus. haamile hatiyaarko laagi sabaariko talaasi linai parchha. कृ पया गाडीबाट बािहर आउनुस। हामीले हितयारको लािग सवारीको तलासी िलनै पछर् ।



306



B. It is after curfew. You must come with me for questioning. yo karphyu pachhi ho. tapaai puchhtaachhko laagi masanga aaunai parchha. यो कफ्यूर् पिछ हो। तपाईं पुछताछको लािग मसंग आउनै पछर् । C. The weapons cache is on the other side of Checkpoint Delta. hatiyaar lukaaune Thaau chaukiko arkotirako Thaaumaa chha. हितयार लुकाउने ठाउँ चौकीको अक ितरको ठाउँ मा छ। D. Be careful. There is a minefield east of the railroad. hoshiyaar hunus. relroDko purbatira jaminmaa bisphoTak raakhieko chha. होिशयार हनु ु स।् रे लरोडको पूविर् तर जमीनमा िवःफोटक रािखएको छ। E. Every soldier needs to have a radio and a map. sabai sipaahiharusanga reDiyo ra naksaa hunu parchha. सबै िसपाहीहरुसंग रे िडयो र नक्सा हनु ु पछर् । F. You must know all the checkpoints and roadblocks in this area. tapaaile sabai chhaukiharu ra baaTobanda bhaeko kchhetra thaahaa paaunai parchha. तपाईंले सबै चौकीहरु र बाटोबन्द भएको क्षेऽ थाहा पाउनै पछर् ।



307



Lesson 20 In the Hospital अःपतालमा Aspataalmaa



This lesson will introduce you to: - Vocabulary related to medical emergencies and life-saving measures. - Ways to ask questions about vital signs.



By North American standards, health care conditions in much of Nepal are abysmal. Although good facilities exist in the major towns and cities, larger parts of the rural areas are sorely neglected and still lack health care facilities. This is compounded by the high incidence of diseases, poor sanitary conditions and inadequate immunization programs. Medicines for cough, cold, painkillers and many more are easily available at all the pharmacies without prescriptions and ambulance services are free to every one. Nepal has a population of 27.1 million (UNFPA updated October 15, 2005) with an annual growth rate of 2.25 %. Nepal has one of the lowest physicians to population ratios in the world, dismal health indicators like infant mortality rates and a wide prevalence of infectious diseases with very poor medical infrastructure in the country. The infant mortality rate is 61/1000 (2005), and life expectancy is 61.8 years for males and 62.5 years for females. Health care services in Nepal are provided by the government, which operates health posts, health centers, district hospitals, zonal hospitals and central hospitals providing specialized services. There are two medical research institutions, B P Koirala Institute of



308



Health and Sciences and Tribhuwan University Teaching Hospital. These institutes also provide health care services to the people in addition to their normal academic courses and research activities. Not all the health posts provide basic primary care, and there is a plan to establish a sub-health post at the village level, as an extension of health posts to provide minimal care, particularly maternal and child care at the grass roots level. The Government allocates a certain percentage of the annual budget for health care, which is the major source of financing to meet the health expenditures. Foreign assistance in the form of medicine supplies, medical equipment and donations from donors and charitable organizations is another resource for the development of health care facilities in Nepal. Nepal has no social security health insurance system and, interestingly, no one has health insurance in Nepal. People who work for government organizations do have medical coverage benefits depending upon their positions and number of years of service, but that too differs from one organization to other. In the case of military and police personnel, they have their own separate hospitals; well equipped hospitals which take care of their health care services. These hospitals also take care of their family health care needs for limited types of services.



309



In Lesson 17, you learned the names of human body parts, how to ask questions about a person’s state of health, and how to describe health conditions and symptoms of sickness. You also know how to handle a visit to the doctor’s office. In this lesson, you will familiarize yourself with the vocabulary used for emergency or life threatening health conditions, such as heart attacks, gunshot wounds, severe bleeding, and head injuries.



1. Go over the text with the pictures. Try to guess the meaning of the words in bold from the context.



1 yo logne maanchheko paakhuraamaa choT laageko chha. यो लोग्ने मान्छे को पाखुरामा चोट लागेको



2 yo swaasni maanchheko paakhuraamaa ghaau chha. यो ःवाःनी मान्छे को पाखुरामा घाउ छ।



छ।



4



3 yo maanchheko khuTTaa ghaaite chha. यो मान्छे को खुट्टा घाइते छ।



yo maanchheko ghaaTimaa choT laageko chha. यो मान्छे को घाँटीमा चोट लागेको छ।



310



Did you understand the bold words wound/wounded and injury/injured? घाउ ghaau means wound. घाइते / घाउ भएको ghaaite/ ghaau bhaeko means wounded. चोट choT means injury. चोट लागेको choT laageko means injured. 2. Look at the pictures in Exercise 1 and match the number of the picture with the correct definition below. Check your answers with the Answer Key. A. घाउ भएको खुट्टा ghaau bhaeko kuTTaa B. चोट लागेको गदर् न choT laageko gardan C. घाउ भएको पाखुरा ghaau bhaeko paakhuraa D. चोट लागेको पाखुरा choT laageko paakhuraa



picture number _____. picture number _____. picture number _____. picture number _____.



3. Tell your classmates, in Nepali, if you ever had an injury or wounds.



4. Listen to and read the dialogue between the doctor and the nurse in the emergency room of a military hospital. Note the use of new vocabulary. Doctor: How does Sergeant Rabindra Basnet feel? DaakaTar: sarjang Rabindra Basnetlaai kasto chha? डाक्टर: सरजंग रिबन्ि बःनेतलाई कःतो छ? Nurse: He feels bad, Doctor Pratap. nars: wahaalaai raamro chhaina, DaakTar Prataap. नसर्: वहाँलाई राॆो छै न, डाक्टर ूताप। Doctor: What is the matter with him? DaakTar: wahaalaai ke bhaeko chha? डाक्टर: वहाँलाई के भएको छ? Nurse: His leg hurts. nars: wahaako khuTTaa dukheko chha. नसर्: वहाँको खुट्टा दखे ु को छ।



311



Doctor: Is it injured? DaakTar: wahaako khuTTaamaa choT laageko chha? डाक्टर: वहाँको खुट्टामा चोट लागेको छ? Nurse: Yes. He has a gunshot wound. He is bleeding. nars: ho, wahaalaai bandukko goliko ghaau chha. wahaako khuTTaabaaTa ragat bagdai chha. नसर्: हो, वहाँलाई बन्दकको गोलीको घाउ छ। वहाँको खुट्टाबाट रगत बग्दै छ। ु Doctor: Does he have fever? DaakTar: wahaalaai jwaro aaeko chha? डाक्टर: वहाँलाई ज्वरो आएको छ? Nurse: Yes, he does. nars: ho, jwaro chha. नसर्: हो, ज्वरो छ। Doctor: Is he taking any medication? DaakTar: wahaa kunai aushadhi khaadaihunuhunchha? डाक्टर: वहाँ कुनै औषधी खाँदैहु नुहु न्छ? Nurse: Yes, antibiotics and painkillers. nars: ho, anTibaayoTik ra penkilar. नसर्: हो, एन्टीवायोटीक र पेनिकलर। 5. Work with a partner. Role-play the dialogue from Exercise 4. 6. Match each of the pictures with the corresponding statement. Try to guess the meanings of unknown words from the context. Check your answers with the Answer Key.



A



B



C



1. yo maanchheko ghaau bheko paakhuraamaa paTTi baadheko chha. यो मान्छे को घाउ भएको पाखुरामा पट्टी बाँधेको छ। 2. yo maanchhele usko Topi lagaaena. aaja dherai garmi thiyo. uslaai garmiko dhakkaa pareko chha. यो मान्छे ले उःको टोपी लगाएन। आज धेरै गम िथयो। उःलाई गम को धक्का परे को छ। 3. yo sipaahiko khuTTaamaa choT laageko chha. यो िसपाहीको खुट्टामा चोट लागेको छ।



312



Did you understand the meanings of the bold words? गम को धक्का garmiko dhakkaa means heat stroke. पट्टी paTTi means dressing.



7. Listen to the speaker and read along in your textbook. Use the Answer Key to check the meanings of unknown words.



yi byaanDejharu ra byaanD-aiDharu hun. yiniharu tapaailaai kaaTekomaa ra ghaaumaa paTTi baadhna chaahinchha. yiniharu prashodhit (puraa saphaa) hunu parchha. यी ब्यानडे जहरु र ब्यानड-एडहरु हन।ियनीहरु तपाईंलाई काटे कोमा र घाउमा पट्टी बाध्न ु ्



चािहन्छ। ियनीहरु ूशोिधत (पूरा सफा) हनु ु पछर् ।



8. Familiarize yourself with some new medical terminology. Listen as the speaker recites the names of internal organs. Repeat after the speaker.



1



2



3



4



1. heart



man/ muTu



मन / मुटु



2. brain



dimaag



िदमाग



3. lung



phokso



फोक्सो



4. kidney



mrigaulaa



मृगौला



5. liver



kalejo



कलेजो



313



5



9. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate name of the organ in Nepali. Check your answers with the Answer Key. मुटु



कलेजो



फोक्सो



मृगौला



िदमाग



The human ____________ is in charge of all body system functions. The _________ is a very important organ because it helps our body get rid of fat. Exercising is very important for my ____________. Smoking can cause ____________cancer. E. Drinking a lot of water is necessary for the ___________.



10. Listen to and read the dialogue between the doctor and a patient in a military hospital emergency room. In the Military Hospital Emergency Room



Doctor: Hello, Major Sanjay. DaakTar: namaste, mejar Sanjay. डाक्टर: नमःते, मेजर संजय। Major: Good morning, Doctor Ashok. mejar: namaste, DaakTar Ashok. मेजर: नमःते। डाक्टर अशोक। Doctor: What happened to you? DaakTar: tapaailaai ke bhayo? डाक्टर: तपाईंलाई के भयो? Major: I don’t now. I didn’t feel well. I had chest pain, headache, and dizziness. mejar: malaai thaahaa chhaina. malaai sancho chhaina.mero chhaati dukhchha, Taauko dukhchha ra malaai ringaTaa laagchha. मेजर: मलाई थाहा छै न। मलाई सन्चो छै न। मेरो छाती दख्छ र मलाई ु , टाउको दख्छ ु िरं गटा लाग्छ।



314



Doctor: For how long did you have your symptoms? DaakTar: yo lakchhan dekhaa pareko kati bhayo? डाक्टर: यो लक्षण दे खापरे को कित भयो? Major: For about 2 days. mejar: dui din dekhi. मेजर: दई ु िदन दे िख। Doctor: Did you take any medications? DaakTar: tapaaile kunai aushadhi khaanubhayo? डाक्टर: तपाईंले कुनै औषधी खानुभयो? Major: Yes, I took painkillers. mejar: ho, maile penkilar khaae. मेजर: हो, मैले पेनिकलर खाएँ। Doctor: For how long? DaakTar: kati din samma? डाक्टर: कित िदन सम्म? Major: For about 2 days… What happened to me, doctor? mejar: dui din samma. malaai ke bhayo DaakTar? मेजर: दई ु िदन सम्म। मलाई के भयो, डाक्टर? Doctor: Well, when you got in the ER, you couldn’t breathe. We had to do CPR. You had abnormal blood pressure. It was 230 over 180. You had a heart attack. What symptoms do you have now? DaakTar: khai,jaba tapaaiko iaar lieko, tapaaile saans pherna saknubhaena. haamile tapaaiko sipir linu parchha. tapaaiko rakktachhap asaamaanya chha. eksay asi (180) maa duisay tis(230) thiyo. tappailaai haarT aTTyaak bhayo. tapaailaai ahile ke ke hunchha? डाक्टर: खै, जब तपाईंको ईआर िलएको, तपाईंले सांस फनर्सक्नु भएन। हामीले तपाईंको सीिपआर िलनु पछर् । तपाईंको र चाप असामान्य छ।एकसय असी (१८०) मा दई ु सय तीस (२३०) िथयो। तपाईंलाई हाटर् अट्याक भयो। तपाईंलाई अिहले के के हन्छ ु ? Major: I feel weak. mejar: malaai kamjoro mahashus hunchha. मेजर: मलाई कमजोर महशुस हन्छ। ु Doctor: Are you allergic to any medications? DaakTar: tapaailaai kunai aushadhiko elarji chha? डाक्टर: तपाईंलाई कुनै औषधीको एलज छ? Major: Yes, I’m allergic to penicillin. mejar: ho, malaai pencilinko elarji chha. मेजर: हो, मलाई पेिन्सिलनको एलज छ। Doctor: Do you have any kidney, liver, lung, or brain diseases? Diabetes? Cancer? DaakTar: tapaailaai mrigaulaako, liverko, phoksoko ki dimaagko rog chha? madhumeh chha? Cancer chha? डाक्टर: तपाईंलाई मृगौलाको, िलभरको, फोक्सोको िक िदमागको रोग छ?



315



Major: No, I don’t. mejar: hoina, chhaina. मेजर: होईन, छै न। Doctor: Do you smoke? DaakTar: tapaai churoT piunuhunchha? डाक्टर: तपाईं चुरोट िपउनुहु न्छ? Major: No, I don’t. mejar: hoina, ma piudina. मेजर: होईन, म िपउँ िदन। Doctor: Have any members of your family had heart diseases or had a heart attack? DaakTar: tapaaiko pariwaarko kunai sadsyalaai muTuko rog ki haarT aTTyaak bhaeko thiyo? डाक्टर: तपाईंको पिरवारको कुनै सदःयलाई मुटु को रोग िक हाटर् अट्याक भएको िथयो? Major: Yes, my father died three years ago from heart disease. mejar: ho, mero baa tin barsha agi muTuko rogle bitnubhayo. मेजर: हो, मेरो बा तीन वषर् अिध मुटु को रोगले िबत्नु भयो। Doctor: Well, I think you must stay in the hospital and rest for a few days. DaakTar: hernus, mero bichaarmaa tapaai kehi din aspataalmaa basnu parchha ra aaraam garnu parchha. डाक्टर: हे नस ुर् , मेरो िवचारमा तपाईं केही िदन अःपतालमा बःनु पछर् र आराम गनुर् पछर् । Major: But I need to get back to my unit! mejar: tara ma mero Tolimaa pharkanu parchha. मेजर: तर म मेरो टोलीमा फकर्नु पछर् । Doctor: No, you have to stay in the hospital, rest, and take aspirin. DaakTar: hoina, tapaai aspataalmaa basnu parchha, aaraam garnu parchha ra asprin khaanu parchha. डाक्टर: होईन, तपाईं अःपतालमा बःनु पछर् , आराम गनुर् पछर् र एःूीन खानु पछर् ।



11. Work with a partner. Pretend to be a doctor and a patient and role-play the dialogue from Exercise 10. 12. Match the questions and answers. When you have finished, check your answers with the answer key. A.tapaailaai kasto chha? तपाईंलाई कःतो छ? B.tapaailaai ke bhayo? तपाईंलाई के भयो?



1.ho, malaai paakhuraamaa bandukko goliko choT chha. हो, मलाई पाखुरामा बन्दकको गोलीको चोट छ। ु 2.malaai kamjori mahshus hudaichha ra irganTaa laagyo. मलाई कमजोरी महशुस हँु दैछ र िरं गटा लाग्यो।



316



C. tapaailaai kasto chha/ तपाईंलाई कःतो छ? D.tapaailaai dukhyo? तपाईलाई दख्यो ? ु E.kahaa dukhchha? कहाँ दख्छ ु ? F.tapaailaai choT laageko chha? तपाईंलाई चोट लागेको छ? G.tapaai kunai aushadhi kaadai hunuhunchha? तपाईं कुनै औषधी खाँदैहु नुहु न्छ?



3.mero ghaaubaaTa ragat bagdai chha. मेरो घाउबाट रगत बग्दै छ। 4.mero peT duhyo. मेरो पेट दख्यो। ु 5.ho, mero chhaati dukhyo. ma saans lina sakdina. हो, मेरो छाती दख्यो। म सांस िलन सिक्दन। ु 6.ho, penkilar. हो, पेनिकलर। 7.malaai nikai sancho chhaina. मलाई िनकै सन्चो छै न।



13. What do you hear? Listen to the speaker and write down what you hear. Check your answers with the Answer Key. 1. 2. 3.



317



End-of-Lesson Tasks 1. Practice answering the following questions in Nepali: A. What is your normal pulse? B. What is your normal blood pressure? C. Are you allergic to any medications? Have you ever had a head injury? E. Have you ever had heat stroke?



2. Work with a partner or in a small group. Look at the picture and say, in Nepali, what you think has happened with a patient. You might want to mention the following things: Is the patient a man or a woman? What is his/her age? Is he/she a soldier? Is he/she wounded? Is he/she injured? Is he/she in pain? Does he/she have bleeding? Does he/she have a fever? Will he/she need to stay in the hospital? Does he/she have high blood pressure? Does he/she have chest pain? Is he/she having a heart attack? Can he/she breathe? Will he/she need CPR? Is he/she allergic to the medications? Does he/she take any medications?



318



Vocabulary List Abnormal



Asaamaanya



असामान्य



Aspirin



Esprin



एःूीन



Bandage



Patti



पट्टी



Band-aid



Byaand-ed



ब्यान्ड-एड



Bleeding



Ragatbagnu



रगतबग्नु



Brain



Dimaag



िदमाग



Breathing



Saaslinu



सांस िलनु



Cancer



Kyaansar



क्यान्सर



CPR



Sipiaar



सीिपआर



Cut



Kaatnu



काट्नु



Diabetes



Madhumeha



मधुमेह



Dressing



Patti badhnu



पट्टी बाँध्नु



ER



Iaar



ईआर



Gunshot wound



Bandukko boliko ghaau



Head injury



Taaukoko chot



Heart



Mutu



मुटु



Heart attack



Haart attak



हाटर् अट्याक



Heart disease



Mutuko rog



मुटु को रोग



Heat stroke



Garmiko aaghaat



गम को आधात



High blood pressure



Uchcha rakattachaap



उच्च र चाप



I am allergic to…/ Are you allergic to…



Malaai elarji …….. Tapaailaai elarji ……



मलाई एलज



Injured



Jakhmi/ ghaaite/ chot/ laageko



जख्मी / धाइते / चोट लागेको



Injury



Chot



चोट



Kidney



Mrigaulaa



मृगौला



Liver



Kalejo



कलेजो



Lungs



Phokso



फोक्सो



Organs



Jaiwik



जैिवक



Painkillers



Penkilar



पेनिकलर



बन्दकको गोलीको घाउ ु



टाउकोको चोट



319



तपाईंलाई एलज



…… …….



Penicillin



Pensilin



पेिन्सिलन



Pulse



Naadi



नाडी



Sterile



Baajho



बाँझो



To die



Marnu



मनुर्



To stay



Basnu



बःनु



Wound/ Wounded



Ghaau / ghaau bhaeko



घाउ /घाउ भएको



320



ANSWER KEY Exercise 2 A. 3 B. 4 C. 1 D. 1



Wounded leg Injured neck and/or 2 Wounded arm Injured arm



Exercise 6 A. 3 This soldier has an injured leg. B. 2 This man didn’t wear his hat. It was very hot today. Now he has heat stroke. C. 1 This man has a dressing on his wounded arm. Exercise 7 These are bandages and band-aids. You need them to make a dressing for a cut or wound. They have to be sterile. Exercise 9 A. िदमाग



dimaag



B. कलेजो



kalejo



C. मुटु



muTu



D. फोक्सो



phokso



E. मृगौला



mrigaulaa



Exercise 12 A. How do you feel? B. What is the matter with you? C. What do you feel? D. Are you in pain? E. Where does it hurt? F. Are you injured? G. Are you taking any medication?



7. I feel really bad. 3. My wound is bleeding. 2. I feel weak and dizzy. 5. Yes, I have a chest pain. I can’t breathe. 4. My stomach hurts. 1. Yes, I have a gunshot injury in my arm. 6. Yes, painkillers.



321



Exercise 13 1. C. What are your symptoms? I have a fever and a pain in my neck. tapaaiko lakchhanharu ke ke hun? malaai jwaro aayo ra mero garden dukhyo. तपाईंको लक्षणहरु के के हन ु ु ्? मलाई ज्वरो आयो र मेरो गदर् न दख्यो। 2. A. How do you feel? I don’t feel well. I have chest pain. tapaailaai kasto chha? malaai sancho chhaina. mero chhaati dukhyo. तपाईंलाई कःतो छ? मलाई सन्चो छै न। मेरो छाती दख्यो। ु 3. B. Are you a doctor? This man just had a heart attack. tapaai DaakTar hunuhunchha? yo maanchhelaai bharkhar haarT aTyaak bhayo. तपाईं डाक्टर हनु ु हु न्छ? यो मान्छे लाई भखर्र हाटर् अट्याक भयो?



322